General Monitors 610A Four Channel Control Module Combustible Gas Monitor Instruction Manual
The Model 610A Controller is a four-channel system designed to continuously monitor for potential explosive concentrations of most combustible gases/vapors. Normally, only a periodic calibration check is needed to assure dependable performance. The system operates in the range of 0-100% LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) and is calibrated for a particular gas or vapor. Each channel has constant current sensor drive circuit, LED indicators for High, Low, Fault, Calibration, and Setup, Mode Button, Digital Display in %LEL, High, Low and Fault relays. The system can be powered by AC or DC power.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Model 610A Four Channel Control Module Combustible Gas Applications The information and technical data disclosed in this document may be used and disseminated only for the purposes and to the extent specifically authorized in writing by General Monitors. Instruction Manual 04-08 General Monitors reserves the right to change published specifications and designs without prior notice. MAN610A Part No Revision MAN610A F/04-08 This page intentionally left blank. ii Model 610A Table of Contents ILLUSTRATIONS .........................................................................................................................V LIST OF TABLES........................................................................................................................VI INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 1 Protection for Life.................................................................................................................................... 1 Special Warning...................................................................................................................................... 1 Customer Support ..................................................................................................................... 2 1.0 BEFORE INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 3 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Differences Between Models 610A and 610 ............................................................................. 3 General Product Description ..................................................................................................... 3 Controller ................................................................................................................................... 4 Sensor Assembly....................................................................................................................... 5 2.0 INSTALLATION...................................................................................................................... 6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 Location of the Controller .......................................................................................................... 6 Power Connections ................................................................................................................... 6 Battery Backup .......................................................................................................................... 7 Analog Output Connection ...................................................................................................... 11 Remote Reset Connection ...................................................................................................... 11 Choosing Sensor Locations..................................................................................................... 11 2.6.1 Vapor Density ............................................................................................................. 11 2.6.2 Air Currents ................................................................................................................ 11 2.6.3 Likely Sources of Gas Emission................................................................................. 11 2.6.4 Environmental Factors................................................................................................ 12 2.6.5 Catalytic Poisons ........................................................................................................ 12 Sensor Installation ................................................................................................................... 12 Alarm Wiring Connections ....................................................................................................... 15 Special Voting Option .............................................................................................................. 16 3.0 START-UP AND OPERATION............................................................................................. 18 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Types of User Interfaces ......................................................................................................... 18 Initial Application of Power ...................................................................................................... 19 Resetting Latched Alarms ....................................................................................................... 19 Analog Output.......................................................................................................................... 19 Calibration Check Mode .......................................................................................................... 20 Calibration Mode ..................................................................................................................... 21 3.6.1 Aborting Calibration .................................................................................................... 21 Setup and Setup Check Modes............................................................................................... 22 3.7.1 Entering the Password ............................................................................................... 23 3.7.2 High Alarm Options .................................................................................................... 23 3.7.3 Low Alarm Options ..................................................................................................... 23 3.7.4 Calibration Level Option ............................................................................................. 24 3.7.5 Password Enabled/Disabled Option........................................................................... 24 3.7.6 LED Test..................................................................................................................... 24 iii Model 610A 3.8 3.9 3.10 Setup Mode Selection Table ................................................................................................... 25 Check Points for Calibration and Operation ............................................................................ 26 3.9.1 Frequency of Calibration ............................................................................................ 26 3.9.2 Background of Combustible Gases............................................................................ 26 3.9.3 Replacing a Sensor .................................................................................................... 26 Special Options ....................................................................................................................... 26 3.10.1 Optional Model 610A Controller for Zone Control (Voting) ........................................ 26 3.10.2 Set Up Options ........................................................................................................... 27 4.0 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 28 4.1 4.2 General Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 28 Periodic System Verification.................................................................................................... 28 5.0 TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................................................... 29 5.1 5.2 5.3 General .................................................................................................................................... 29 Troubleshooting Table............................................................................................................. 29 Fault Codes ............................................................................................................................. 30 6.0 CUSTOMER SUPPORT ....................................................................................................... 31 6.1 6.2 General Monitors’ Offices ........................................................................................................ 31 Other Sources of Help ............................................................................................................. 31 7.0 APPENDIX............................................................................................................................ 32 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 Warranty .................................................................................................................................. 32 Sensor Operating Principle...................................................................................................... 32 General Specifications - Controller.......................................................................................... 34 7.3.1 Mechanical Specifications .......................................................................................... 34 7.3.2 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................... 34 7.3.3 Electrical Specifications.............................................................................................. 34 7.3.4 System Specifications ................................................................................................ 34 General Specifications - Sensor .............................................................................................. 34 7.4.1 System Specifications ................................................................................................ 34 7.4.2 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................... 34 Cable Requirements................................................................................................................ 35 Sensors.................................................................................................................................... 35 Accessories ............................................................................................................................. 36 7.7.1 Calibration Equipment ................................................................................................ 36 7.7.2 Sensor Covers............................................................................................................ 36 Recommended Spare Parts .................................................................................................... 37 Sample Calibration Schedule and Checklist ........................................................................... 38 Product Configuration Tables .................................................................................................. 39 Engineering Documentation .................................................................................................... 41 7.11.1 Panel Assembly, Panel Mount – 98, Ref: 10199C ..................................................... 41 7.11.2 Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 610A Controller.................................. 42 iv Model 610A Illustrations Figure 1: Model 610A Controller............................................................................................................. 4 Figure 2: Schematic Battery Backup System ......................................................................................... 7 Figure 3: Outline Drawing & Rear Terminal Connections (REF: 20659)................................................ 8 Figure 4: Rear Terminal Common Relay Configuration ......................................................................... 9 Figure 5: Rear Terminal Discrete Relay Configuration......................................................................... 10 Figure 6: Junction Box Assembly – Sensor.......................................................................................... 14 Figure 7: Protection Circuit for Relay Contacts .................................................................................... 16 Figure 8: Front Panel Display ............................................................................................................... 18 Figure 9: Portable Purge Calibrator...................................................................................................... 20 Figure 10: Panel Assembly, Panel Mount –98, Ref: 10199C............................................................... 41 Figure 11: Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 610A Controller .......................................... 42 v Model 610A List of Tables Table 1: Model 610A Mounting Parts ..................................................................................................... 6 Table 2: Terminal Colors ...................................................................................................................... 13 Table 3: Maximum Cable Run Distance............................................................................................... 13 Table 4: Sensor Guards ....................................................................................................................... 15 Table 5: De-Energized Alarm Relay Contacts...................................................................................... 15 Table 6: Energized Alarm Relay Terminations..................................................................................... 15 Table 7: Setup Display Options ............................................................................................................ 25 Table 8: Relay Alarm Options............................................................................................................... 27 Table 9: Troubleshooting Table............................................................................................................ 30 Table 10: Maximum Cable Lengths...................................................................................................... 35 Table 11: GMI Sensors Available for 610A System ............................................................................. 35 Table 12: Recommended Spare Parts ................................................................................................. 37 Table 13: Product Configuration Tables............................................................................................... 40 vi Model 610A Introduction Protection for Life General Monitors’ mission is to benefit society by providing solutions through industry leading safety products, services, and systems that save lives and protect capital resources from the dangers of hazardous flames, gases, and vapors. This manual provides instruction for installing and operating the General Monitors Model 610A Four Channel Control Module for Combustible Gas Applications. While the 610A system is easy to install and operate, this manual should be read in full and the information contained herein understood before attempting to place the system in service. The safety products you have purchased should be handled carefully and installed, calibrated, and maintained in accordance with the respective product instruction manual. Remember these products are for your safety. Special Warning Through engineering design, testing, manufacturing techniques, and rigid quality control, General Monitors (GMI) supplies the finest gas detection systems available. The user must recognize his responsibility for maintaining the gas detection system in operational condition. The Model 610A Four Channel Combustible Gas Monitor contains components, which can be damaged by static electricity. Special care must be taken when wiring the system, to ensure that only the connection points are touched. Only catalytic bead sensors designed by General Monitors will work with the Model 610A Controller. Any attempt to use a sensor that has not been approved by General Monitors, will void the warranty. General Monitors cautions, as with all equipment of this type, that high levels or long exposure to certain atmospheres will “poison” the sensor catalyst and eventually affect sensitivity. Please see Section 2.6.5 for specific information. Use in such atmospheres requires calibration checks on a more frequent schedule than normal. General Monitors should be consulted for an application feasibility determination, before installing a system in such atmospheres. General Monitors’ sensors and sensor housings are designed and tested for use in certain classes of hazardous atmospheres. Explosion-proof integrity cannot be maintained, if sensors and sensor housings are operated in other than the “as designed” condition. Terminal access covers of sensor housings must be securely fastened. Sensor housing must be installed in accordance with National Electrical Code acceptable practices, for the class of hazardous atmospheres. 1 Model 610A Sensors are designed with sintered metal, or screen covers, that act as flame arrestors. Do not operate sensors without screen or sintered metal parts in place. General Monitors’ gas detection systems are primarily safety devices for the protection of personnel and facilities and must be “always ready”. With proper installation, calibration, and maintenance, the system provides continuous monitoring of hazardous areas. The user must assume all liability for misuse of General Monitors’ gas detection systems. The system’s full two-year warranty will be voided if customer personnel, or third parties, damage the system during repair attempts. Customer Support For additional product information not contained in this manual, please contact General Monitors Customer Support (Section 6.1). 2 Model 610A 1.0 Before Installation 1.1 Differences Between Models 610A and 610 610A differences: • Wiring: Connectors must be rewired for 610A • Auto-Calibration • Front Panel: Polycarbonate with inlay Refer to Section 2.0, Installation, and Section 3.0, Startup and Operation, for details. 1.2 General Product Description The Model 610A Controller is a four-channel system designed to continuously monitor for potential explosive concentrations of most combustible gases/vapors. Normally, only a periodic calibration check is needed to assure dependable performance. The system operates in the range of 0-100% LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) and is calibrated for a particular gas or vapor. There are relatively few combustible gases, which should not be monitored; however, as a precaution, GMI should always be consulted to verify the feasibility of monitoring any gas or vapor other than those specified at the time of purchase. The Model 610A Controller consists of a controller plus four sensor assemblies. The controller is fully solid-state. It should be mounted in a weather protected, non-hazardous area. Several GMI mounting accessories are available for panel, wall or 19-inch rack installation. For hazardous areas, an explosion-proof housing is available for Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C & D. Any GMI low temperature catalytic bead combustible gas sensor assembly may be used with the system. NOTE: Sensor assemblies may be mounted outdoors in hazardous areas (National Electric Code Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C & D). They must be connected to the controller in accordance with the installation instructions in this manual. NOTE: The 610A is different than its predecessor the 610. The 610A calibration is automatic where the 610 must be manually calibrated. Please check the individual manuals for details about wiring, set up and operation of these two units. 3 Model 610A CAUTION: The Model 610A Controller is easy to install and operate. However, one should fully read and understand this manual before attempting to place the system in service. Figure 1: Model 610A Controller 1.3 Controller The Model 610A Controller is a four-channel system where the controller continuously monitors the inputs of four sensors. The sensors are monitored independently (i.e. they are not scanned, nor are the signals summed). Each channel has the following: • Constant current sensor drive circuit • LED indicators for High, Low, Fault, Calibration, and Setup • Mode Button, accessed by using a small screw driver • Digital Display in %LEL • High, Low and Fault relays 4 Model 610A NOTE: Standard configuration is common relays (Figure 4). Set points for High and Low alarms are adjustable from 5 to 60% LEL in the FM unit. NOTE: A service-loop is necessary between the Model 610A Controller’s rear panel terminals and field/power wiring. This service loop permits the controller to be removed or slid forward for various adjustments and/or servicing. This is a definite advantage when replacing or changing a controller. 1.4 Sensor Assembly Four sensor assemblies are normally supplied with the system. These assemblies are comprised of the sensor, the sensor housing, and an optional splashguard. NOTE: This sensor assembly is CSA approved for Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C & D hazardous areas. On some occasions, different sensor housings may be supplied. The appropriate sensor is provided if GMI is made aware of the gas or vapor that is to be monitored. Most combustible gases may be monitored, including most hydrocarbons and hydrogen. CAUTION: Sensors have a different sensitivity to each gas. GMI should be consulted if a sensor is expected to detect more than one gas. GMI can then recommend the best calibration gas. A variety of sensor covers may be purchased (Section 7.7.2). They provide extra protection from wind, weather and dust. NOTE: These sensor covers are not included in the Factory Mutual approval for this equipment. In the event the system is to have less than four active channels, Part Number 10102-1 (sensor simulator) must be substituted for each unused channel. Otherwise, the FAULT LED indicator for the unused channel will remain lit. 5 Model 610A 2.0 Installation 2.1 Location of the Controller The Model 610A Controller should be installed in a weather-protected, non-hazardous area. The following mounting hardware is available to facilitate installation: Part Description 98mm (4”) panel mount frame 483 mm (19”) rack frame (4 controllers) Blank panel (one for each unused position in 19” frame) 98mm (4”) wall mount bracket NEMA 7 Explosion-Proof Enclosure Desk Top Cabinet (up to 4 controllers) Part Number P/N 10199-1 P/N 10200-1 P/N 10191-1 P/N 10202-1 P/N 10099 P/N 914-006 Table 1: Model 610A Mounting Parts The following are guidelines for mounting the controller: • To minimize the possibility of electrical shock, mounting must be as free from shock and vibration as possible, in a grounded enclosure that requires a tool for instrument removal. • Even though the controller is RFI resistant, do not mount the controller in close proximity to radio transmitters or similar equipment. • It is recommended that a wiring service loop be used to facilitate gaining access to the alarm set points. • Care should be taken to assure adequate ventilation. • Do not mount the controller in a manner that restricts the natural convection airflow. • The controller operating temperature range is 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F). 2.2 Power Connections The system operates on nominal line power of 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Power must remain disconnected until all other wiring connections are made. NOTE: To eliminate accidental system shutdown, GMI does not provide a power on/off switch. The following are wiring guidelines for the 610A Controller: • If AC is to power the system, connect the line power supply to the terminals L, N, located on the rear of the controller. Use accepted commercial wiring practices. • Primary DC power may be used instead. Use any 24V nominal direct current supply with a minimum rating of 2 amperes. 6 Model 610A • AWG 14 wire should be used to prevent excessive voltage drop. • Wiring runs should be as short as possible. • Connect the positive supply to 24VDC (+) and the negative supply to 24VDC (-) on the terminal block. An internal diode protects the system in case of inadvertent supply reversal. 2.3 Battery Backup An emergency battery backup may be employed on a system normally powered by AC. The battery rating (ampere-hour capacity) is dictated by the length of time power outages may last. A Model 610A Controller requires approximately 2 ampere (peak) at 24 VDC. General Monitors recommends that a Lead-Acid type battery be used. This type of battery can be expected to last for several years with minimum maintenance. The customer-furnished battery may be connected as shown below. Manual or relay switching is not required. There is no provision for battery charging. A customer furnished battery charger must be used to keep the battery charged to the battery manufacturer’s recommended level. The cable length from battery to controller should be as short as possible. Should an AC power failure occur, the 24-Volt battery supplies current through the diode to the controller circuitry. DO NOT USE MORE THAN A 24-VOLT BATTERY. Figure 2: Schematic Battery Backup System 7 Model 610A Figure 3: Outline Drawing & Rear Terminal Connections (REF: 20659) 8 Model 610A Figure 4: Rear Terminal Common Relay Configuration 9 Model 610A Figure 5: Rear Terminal Discrete Relay Configuration 10 Model 610A 2.4 Analog Output Connection CAUTION: The analog output must be either used or jumpered. If not, the Model 610A indicates a fault in the normal mode with the display reading “AO” and the FAULT LED flashing. The two analog output terminals AO (+) and AO (-) are located on the rear panel. The analog output is 0 – 21.7mA into a maximum 300-Ohm load. 2.5 Remote Reset Connection Remote reset (of alarm circuits) connections are made to rear panel terminal board connections RESET and the 24VDC (-) terminal. If a remote reset switch is used, it must be a “normally open, momentary action” type. NOTE: If the system is to be powered from a primary DC power supply or if battery backup is provided, the 24VDC (-) terminal has two wires when remote reset is used. The diameter of the two wires cannot be larger than an AWG 14 wire. 2.6 Choosing Sensor Locations Several variables are involved in selecting locations to install sensors, to assure the detection of combustible gases. There are no hard and fast rules defining the optimum location. However, the following general suggestions should be considered with regard to particular conditions at the site where a Model 610A Controller is being installed. 2.6.1 Vapor Density Whether the gas/vapor to be monitored is lighter or heavier than air, it affects sensor placement. For lighter-than-air gases, sensors are generally placed close to the roof or ceiling in indoor installations. For gases much heavier than air, sensors are generally placed near the floor or ground where there are no air currents in the area. Gases with a density equal to air or slightly greater than air tend to rise, particularly when air currents are present. 2.6.2 Air Currents If there are winds, fans, or other sources of air movement, combustible gases tend to rise or to accumulate in certain sections of a facility. Local air currents should be studied to aid in selection of sensor locations. 2.6.3 Likely Sources of Gas Emission In general, at least one sensor should be located in close proximity to each point where a leak of a combustible gas is likely to occur. This is particularly important when a liquid having a high volatility is to be monitored. 11 Model 610A 2.6.4 Environmental Factors Avoid installing sensors where they are exposed to wind, dust, water, shock, or vibration. Observe the temperature range limitations of sensors (Section 7.4.2). 2.6.5 Catalytic Poisons Sensors are adversely affected by prolonged exposure to certain materials. Loss of sensitivity (i.e. reduced response to combustible gases), or corrosion, may be gradual if such materials are present in low concentrations, or it may be rapid at high concentrations. The more important materials adversely affecting sensors are: • Halides (compounds containing chlorine, fluorine, bromine, or iodine). • Sulfur compounds such as SO2 (Sulfur Dioxide), H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide), CS2 (Carbon Disulfide). • Heavy metals such as tetraethyl lead. • Silicones (often contained in greases and aerosols). Silicones do not chemically attack the sensor. They, instead, coat the beads and, therefore, reduce or stop the oxidation of the combustible gas at the catalytically active bead. • Acid vapors. • Caustic liquids or vapors. The presence of such materials in an area does not necessarily preclude the use of a catalytic bead sensor. The feasibility of using a sensor in such areas must be determined by an analysis of the specific factors in each application. However, sensors used in such areas usually require calibration checks on a more frequent basis and typically have a shorter life than normal. In many such applications, the normal two-year warranty does not apply. CAUTION: General Monitors discourages the painting of sensor assemblies for two reasons. First, if the sensor head is painted-over, gas will not be able to diffuse into the sensor. Second, many paints contain lead, which can poison a sensor. 2.7 Sensor Installation Various types (P/N’s) of sensors can be provided with the Model 610A Controller. However, the installation method is identical in all cases. Please refer to Section 7.6. The sensor assembly is used most often. It consists of P/N 10001-1 sensor plus GMI P/N 10252-1 Sensor Housing. This assembly (P/N 10001-1 + P/N 10252-1) is CSA approved for NEC Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C and D hazardous areas. Each sensor assembly is connected to the controller using 3-conductor stranded cable, and must be installed with conduit in hazardous areas. Total loop-resistance, excluding the sensor, must not exceed 40 Ohms. A separate cable is required for each sensor. 12 Model 610A General Monitors recommends the use of shielded cable generally, though in some cases it is not an absolute necessity. Due to the low levels of sensor signal voltages, shielded cable is required in some installations to guard against extraneous electrical noise. The shield must be enclosed in a suitable insulating outer jacket and must be grounded only at the rear-panel sensor-shield ground terminal. Care must be taken to assure that the shield does not contact the sensor housing or metal conduit. CAUTION: Avoid running sensor cables close to high power cables, radio transmission lines, or cables subject to pulses of high current. Sensor cable connections must be crimped and SOLDERED for stable operation. Use only continuous, un-spliced cable runs if possible. Improperly spliced cable can result in corrosion, resistance changes, and drift. To Connect the Cable at the Sensor: 1. Remove the P/N 10252-1 housing lid to reveal the terminal strip. The sensor is connected in the housing according to the color designations. (The green position is not used). 2. Sensor cables are connected at the controller to the terminal blocks located along the top of the rear of the controller. The channel numbers (1,2,3 & 4) read from right to left on these sets of terminals. 3. Connect the cable so that the terminal color at the sensor housing matches the terminal color at the controller as follows: WIRE COLOR Black Red White TERMINAL NUMBER CH4 CH3 CH2 B1 B1 B1 R2 R2 R2 W3 W3 W3 CH1 B1 R2 W3 Table 2: Terminal Colors 4. Cable runs should not exceed the following distances (maximum loop resistance of 40-Ohms): AWG 20 18 16 14 METERS 580 910 1460 2320 FEET 1900 3000 4800 7600 Table 3: Maximum Cable Run Distance 13 Model 610A Figure 6: Junction Box Assembly – Sensor 14 Model 610A SENSOR GUARDS PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1800822 DUST GUARD 10395-1 SPLASH GUARD 10110-1 DUST GUARD WITH DISPOSABLE SCREEN Table 4: Sensor Guards CAUTION: Always mount sensors pointing downward, so that water does not accumulate on the sensor head. Mounting must be as free from shock and vibration as possible, and convenient for calibration checks. The sensor housing must never be opened when the power is on; otherwise the explosion-proof integrity of the sensor assembly is compromised. The threads on the housing lid must be fully engaged. 2.8 Alarm Wiring Connections The low and high alarm contacts for customer use are DPDT (double pole, double throw) and are rated 4 amps at 115 VAC, resistive. The Fault alarm contact is SPDT (single pole, double throw), 4 amps at 115 VAC, resistive. These contacts are brought out to terminals on the rear of the controller as follows: ALARM RELAY Fault Low Alarm High Alarm CONTACT CONDITION OPEN COM CLOSED 2 C 1 2,3 C 1,4 2,3 C 1,4 Table 5: De-Energized Alarm Relay Contacts The above chart shows the high and low alarm contacts in the standard de-energized state (with power applied). These two alarm relays are normally de-energized unless specially ordered for normally energized operation. The fault relay is always supplied normally energized. If normally energized, the terminations are: ALARM RELAY Fault Low Alarm High Alarm CONTACT CONDITION OPEN COM CLOSED 2 C 1 1,4 C 2,3 1,4 C 2,3 Table 6: Energized Alarm Relay Terminations For more information, see Section 7.10. 15 Model 610A CAUTION: Inductive loads, such as bells, buzzers, relays, contactors, solenoid valves, etc., connected to the High alarm, Low alarm and Fault alarm relays must be clamped down as shown in the diagrams below. Unclamped inductive loads can generate voltage spikes in excess of 1000 Volts. Spikes of this magnitude will cause false alarms and possible damage. Figure 7: Protection Circuit for Relay Contacts 2.9 Special Voting Option If the special voting option has been ordered for eight channels or more, special interconnections must be made between the Model 610A Controllers. Terminals for these interconnections are on terminal block TB2, which is the set of terminal blocks located horizontally along the bottom of the controller (Figure 11). The terminals to be interconnected are identified as follows and are located within the area labeled “VOTING”: “-“ “H” “L” “M” “V” Use AWG 18 to AWG 20 cable and connect these terminals to the like terminals on the second Model 610A Controller. If 12 or 16 channels are to be in the zone, continue the same interconnection between the second and third controller and between the third and fourth. 16 Model 610A NOTE: The terminal blocks accept up to an AWG 14 wire. It is recommended that AWG 18 or AWG 20 wire be used where two leads are to be connected to the same terminal. When a voting system is in operation, all LED’s and Digital Readouts on the front of each channel function normally. When one channel reaches a HIGH alarm condition, LOW and HIGH LED’s for that channel display and the digital readout shows the gas concentration. The HIGH alarm relay does not actuate until a second channel reaches the HIGH alarm set point. 17 Model 610A 3.0 Start-Up and Operation 3.1 Types of User Interfaces User interfaces are provided so that the operator may interpret and direct the Model 610A in the performance of its various functions. User interfaces consist of a digital display, status indicators, a mode button and a reset button. • The digital display provides the user with the gas concentration at the sensor site, fault diagnostic codes, calibration prompts, and setup parameters. • The status indicators provide the user with an indication of the current mode of operation: HIGH (high alarm), LOW (low alarm), FAULT (fault alarm), SETUP (setup and setup check modes), and CAL (calibration or calibration check modes). • Mode button provides the user access to the Calibration, Calibration Check, Setup and Setup Check modes. The Mode button is located behind the front panel and is accessed using a small screwdriver in the front of the unit. • The Reset button allows the user to reset latched alarms. Figure 8: Front Panel Display 18 Model 610A 3.2 Initial Application of Power Before applying power for the first time, double-check all wiring components. The system has a time delay feature. The High and Low alarm circuits are disabled for approximately 45 seconds after power is applied. This feature prevents false alarms while the sensor circuits are stabilizing. At the initial application of power, the unit will enter a 45-second start-up mode. During this time, the display will read “SU”. The unit will then enter operational mode and the current gas concentration of the sensor will display. If a channel fault occurs, the FAULT LED will flash, the fault relay will become active and the unit will display the appropriate error code. This fault indication is independent of the abovementioned time delay feature. NOTE: A defect in one sensor circuit does not affect the operation of the other channels. 3.3 Resetting Latched Alarms The user may select a latching or non-latching alarm output for High and/or Low alarms. If an alarm output activates and the condition that caused that activation is no longer present, a non-latching alarm output resets automatically. A latched alarm output needs to be reset manually. Resetting latched alarm outputs is done with the Reset button located on the channel 1 (CH1) board. Pressing the Reset button resets any latched conditions that are no longer valid. EXAMPLE: The sensor detects a gas concentration in excess of an alarm set point. The associated alarm outputs activate. After a few moments, the gas concentration drops below the alarm set point. If the alarm outputs are latched, the operator can press the Reset button and the latched alarm outputs return to the normal (safe) state. 3.4 Analog Output The Analog Output is a 0 to 21.7mA current signal with 4 to 20mA being proportional to 0 to 100% of full scale. Analog Output Values Signal Range 4-22mA Fault <1.0mA Start-up 4mA Calibration 1.5mA Detection Range 4-20mA Over-Range 20 - 21.7mA 19 Model 610A When a channel is in the Calibration, Calibration Check, Setup or Setup Check modes, a 1.5mA signal is generated by this output. During Calibration mode, the digital display shows prompts associated with the calibration procedure. During Calibration Check mode, the digital display shows the gas concentration as a flashing digit, or pair of digits. When a channel enters into a fault condition a 0mA signal is generated by this output. During a fault, the display shows a fault code. If the sensor attached to the channel is seeing gas in excess of 100% of full scale, the output generates a signal between 20 and 21.7mA (not proportional). 3.5 Calibration Check Mode To perform a calibration check, use the following procedure: 1. Place the cup from the portable purge calibrator over the sensor. Figure 9: Portable Purge Calibrator NOTE: The Calibration Check mode cannot be entered if the channel is in alarm. 2. Enter the Calibration Check mode by pressing and holding the Mode button until the CAL LED begins to flash (about ten seconds). The channel displays the calibration level. When the CAL LED begins to flash, release the Mode button. The channel is now in the Calibration Check mode. 3. When the Mode button is released, the display indicates a flashing pair of bars (--) for about ten seconds. 4. When the display indicates flashing digits, for example “0”, apply the test gas to the sensor by opening the valve on the cylinder and the ON/OFF valve and wait for a few seconds. The display begins to go up scale as the sensor sees the gas. If no gas is applied, the channel returns to the normal operating mode after 6 minutes. 20 Model 610A 5. The reading stabilizes after 30 to 60 seconds of exposure to the test gas. This response time may increase due to the presence of the Dust Guard, Splash Guard or other sensor accessories. 6. If the sensor does see the gas, the read-out on the display flashes for as long as the unit remains in the Calibration Check mode. 7. The operator should compare the reading with the gas concentration applied and determine if it is necessary to calibrate the sensor. 8. Remove the gas and expose the sensor to clean air. If the gas is not removed within 6 minutes, the channel reverts to a fault condition. 9. Press the Mode button. Calibration level is displayed for a short time, and the channel exits out of Calibration Check mode. NOTE: Low and High alarms are disabled during Calibration Check mode. 3.6 Calibration Mode NOTE: For better results power up the sensor at least an hour before the calibration. To calibrate the Model 610A: 1. Make sure the calibration gas is the same concentration as the user specified calibration level. 2. Make sure the sensor is seeing clean air. 3. Enter Calibration mode by following the same procedure for entering Calibration Check mode (see 3.5). Continue to press and hold the Mode button until the CAL LED becomes steady, approximately fifteen seconds. When the CAL LED is steady, release the Mode button. The display shows flashing bars (--) for approximately 30 to 90 seconds. When the display changes from (--) to AC, clean air calibration is complete. The channel t is now being calibrated at clean air. 4. When the channel displays AC, apply gas to the sensor. Watch the display change from AC to CP as the sensor detects gas. If the display does not change from AC to CP after six minutes, the channel returns to normal operation. 5. When the calibration routine is complete the display changes from CP to CC. If the display indicates F2 (failure to calibrate), remove the gas, wait 5 minutes then recalibrate. 6. Remove the gas and watch the display return to normal operation. 7. Repeat the previous steps (1-6) for the other channels. NOTE: Low and High alarms are disabled during Calibration mode. 3.6.1 Aborting Calibration Calibration can be aborted before the calibration gas has been applied. To Abort Calibration: 21 Model 610A 1. Wait until AC displays. Calibration cannot be aborted when (--) is flashing. 2. Press the Mode button and hold it for approximately 5 seconds. Release the button when the calibration level displays. 3. The channel returns to normal operation. 3.7 Setup and Setup Check Modes The Setup Check mode allows the operator to view the selected options for the module without allowing any changes to be made. Once this mode has been entered, the module automatically displays each of the selected options for a short period of time and then it returns to normal operation. The Setup mode allows the operator to change the operating parameters by making choices for selected options. The Setup Check & Setup modes display identical information with the following exceptions: • The Setup Check mode allows the user to view the operating parameters of the channel, whereas the Setup mode allows the user to change these parameters. • Entering the optional password is only available in the Setup mode. NOTE: The Setup and Setup Check modes cannot be entered if the unit is in alarm or fault. During the Setup mode the operator is allowed to select options. The selection procedure is the same for most of the options. Pressing the Mode button toggles the available choices. When the display has indicated a choice for five consecutive seconds, without the operator pressing the Mode button, the setup routine accepts that selection and moves on to the next option available. NOTE: Before entering the Setup mode to make changes, the user should fill out the Setup Mode Selection Table (Section 3.8). This aids the user during the selection process in the Setup mode. The Password, the High & Low Alarm set points, and the Calibration Level options offer the operator more than two choices. While these options are being selected, pressing the Mode button repeatedly sequences the display to the next available choice for that option. To enter the Setup Check mode: 1. Press and hold the Mode button until the SETUP LED begins flashing (about twenty seconds). 2. When the SETUP LED is flashing, release the Mode button to enter the Setup Check mode. To enter the Setup mode: 1. Press and hold the Mode button until the SETUP LED begins flashing (about twenty seconds). 22 Model 610A 2. Continuing to press and hold the Mode switch until the SETUP LED stops flashing (about five seconds more). 3. When the SETUP LED stops flashing and stays on, release the Mode button and the unit enters the Setup mode. 3.7.1 Entering the Password This option applies to the Setup mode only: • If the Password option is enabled, the right digit of the display is blank and a 0 appears in the left digit on the display. Press the Mode button until the first number of your password displays, and then wait about five seconds. • The left digit of the display blanks out and a “0” appears in the right digit on the display. Press the Mode button until your correct password number displays, then wait about five seconds. If the password is correct, the unit proceeds to the Password Enabled/Disabled option. If the password is incorrect, the user cannot proceed and the unit returns to the normal operating mode. Once in the operating mode, the user may re-enter the Setup mode. The factory default password is 00. 3.7.2 High Alarm Options Next, the High LED is flashing while the energized/de-energized option displays. This option is available for discrete relay configurations only. The display indicates the current selection, (En or dE). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. De-Energized (dE) is the factory default for this selection. The High LED on the front panel flashes while the latching/non-latching option displays. The display indicates the current selection, (nL or LA). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. Latching (LA) is the factory default for this selection. The last High alarm option to appear on the display is the alarm set point (trip level). If this level is reached or exceeded, the High alarm outputs activate. The display indicates the current High alarm set point (5 to 60 in increments of 5). Press the Mode button repeatedly, until the desired High alarm set point appears on the display. The factory default for this selection is 60. In case of common alarms, this option is available at the master board only. NOTE: The High set point cannot be set lower than the current Low set point. To accomplish this, you need to go through set-up twice. The Low set point should be set lower than the desired High set point, then re-enter the Setup mode and set the High set point. 3.7.3 Low Alarm Options Next, the Low LED flashes while the energized/de-energized option displays. This option is available only for discrete alarm configurations. The display indicates the current selection, (En or dE). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. De-Energized (dE) is the factory default for this selection. 23 Model 610A The Low LED on the front panel flashes while the latching/non-latching option is displayed. The display will indicate the current selection, (nL or LA). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. Non-Latching (nL) is the factory default for this selection. The last Low alarm option to appear on the display is the alarm set point (trip level). If this level is reached or exceeded, the Low alarm outputs activate. The display indicates the current Low alarm set point. Press the Mode button repeatedly, until the desired Low alarm set point appears on the display (5 to the High set point in increments of 5). The Low set point cannot be set higher than the High set point. The factory default for this selection is 30. In case of common alarms, this option is available at the master board only. 3.7.4 Calibration Level Option After the Low alarm options have been selected, the user chooses the Calibration Level. The panel displays CL for 5 seconds, then the current calibration level. The acceptable range of calibration level, in % LEL (lower explosive limit), is between 25 and 90, inclusive. The factory default for this selection is 50. 3.7.5 Password Enabled/Disabled Option After the calibration level option has been selected the Password Enabled/Disabled option displays. The display indicates the current selection, (PE or Pd). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. Password Disabled (Pd) is the factory default for this selection. If the Password Disabled is selected, the unit returns to normal operation. If this setting is changed from Password Disabled to Password Enabled, the user enters a new password. The unit displays the left digit of the existing password (flashing on the display). The right digit is blank until the left digit has been selected. Press the Mode button repeatedly until the desired value displays. Once the left digit is correct, wait for five seconds and the right digit of the display begins flashing and the left digit is blank. Press the Mode button repeatedly, until the desired value displays then returns to normal operation. 3.7.6 LED Test Press and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds. All LEDs and display segments will flash for as long as the Reset button is pressed. When the button is released, the LEDs will return to their normal state reflecting the current status condition of each channel. 24 Model 610A 3.8 Setup Mode Selection Table This section helps the operator make selections during the Setup mode. It is recommended that the operator fill-in the selections in the proper blanks and then use this page as a reference while programming the Model 610A. The table shown below indicates the order of options in the Setup mode. To the right of the option entry is a description of the choices that are available for that option. ENTER SELECTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Password Enter the Password, if the Password is enabled Set the Energized (En) / De-Energized (dE) Option High Alarm Options Set the Latching (LA) / Non-Latching (nL) Option Set the High alarm set point (from Low alarm set point to 60, in increments of 5) Set the Energized (En) / De-Energized (dE) Option Low Alarm Options Set the Latching (LA) / Non-Latching (nL) Option Set the Low alarm set point (from 10 to the High alarm set point Calibration Level Set the calibration level, LEL (from 25 to 90, in increments of 1) Set the Password to be Disabled (Pd) or Enabled (PE) Password Options If the Password option to be changed from Disabled to Enabled: Set the password digits Table 7: Setup Display Options 25 Left__________ Right__________ Model 610A 3.9 Check Points for Calibration and Operation 3.9.1 Frequency of Calibration GMI recommends that the calibration be checked on each sensor at least every ninety (90) days. If a sensor is installed where it may be subjected to splashing water, mud or dirt accumulation, or adverse gases, more frequent calibration is recommended. The exact frequency can vary with the severity of conditions and must be established in the field. 3.9.2 Background of Combustible Gases In some applications, there is an occasional or continuous presence of “background” combustible gases. Generally, this is a very small % LEL. Usually, it is advisable to zero out the background gas concentration during calibration. To Zero the Background Gas Concentration: 1. Isolate the sensor from the surrounding air by placing your hand tightly over the sensor. 2. Observe the reading on the “%” LEL display. A gradual drop in reading indicates the presence of background or combustible gases. Keeping the hand over the sensor, wait for the reading to stabilize and start the calibration without the calibration cap. 3. When “AC” displays, remove your hand from the sensor, place the cap over the sensor and continue the calibration. 3.9.3 Replacing a Sensor When a sensor is replaced, the new sensor must be calibrated. To avoid false alarms, General Monitors recommends disabling all the alarm circuits until the sensor is calibrated. For better results, the sensor should be powered up at least one hour before calibration. CAUTION: Extended exposure of a sensor to a high concentration of combustible gases can introduce stress in the sensing element, which may seriously affect performance. Re-calibration should therefore be performed after an alarm due to a high concentration of gas and the sensor should be replaced, if necessary. A display reading of “99”% LEL, or high off scale, may mean an explosive concentration of gas is present. NOTE: The previous warning is applicable to all catalytic bead sensors. 3.10 Special Options 3.10.1 Optional Model 610A Controller for Zone Control (Voting) The Model 610A Controller can be supplied with a special voting option, when specified on the original order for the equipment. A system supplied for voting use, must be the common alarm version and will require that two channels reach the High alarm set point 26 Model 610A before the High alarm relay will actuate. All other functions of the Model 610A Controller will be the same as for the non-voting system. If two four-channel units are to be employed to monitor one zone, the second Model 610A Controller can be interconnected to the first unit. The High alarm relays in both Model 610A Controllers will actuate when any two or more of the eight channels reach the alarm set point. The Low and Fault relays will function the same as they do in nonvoting systems (16 channel). A maximum of four (4) Model 610A Controllers can be employed in this voting option. (Please refer to Section 7.10, for typical interconnections). NOTE: When more than one Model 610A Controller is used in a zone, all of the controllers must be mounted adjacent to one another, to keep the interconnecting leads as short as possible. The Reset button for canceling latched alarm circuits is located on the front panel. The circuits will only reset if the gas concentration has fallen below the set point level. 3.10.2 Set Up Options There are purchasable configured options of the Model 610A. The following list and table outlines those options: • Common Relays: The Master Board contains a set of relays for all four channels. • Common Alarms: Alarm set points can be set on the Master Board and is common on all four boards. • Discrete Relays: Each board has its own set of relays. • Discrete Alarms: Alarm set points can be set on each channel separately. Set Up Option Energized / Deenergized High Alarm Setting Low Alarm Setting Common Relays / Common Alarms Disabled on all boards Enabled only on Master board Enabled only on Master board Discrete Relays / Common Alarms Enabled Discrete Relays / Discrete Alarms Enabled Enabled only on Master board Enabled only on Master board Enabled Table 8: Relay Alarm Options 27 Enabled Model 610A 4.0 Maintenance 4.1 General Maintenance Once installed, the Model 610A Controller requires little or no routine maintenance, other than periodic calibration checks. General Monitors recommends that a calibration schedule be established and adhered to. GMI also recommends that a logbook be kept, showing calibration dates and dates of sensor replacement. General Monitors recommends that a calibration check should be conducted at least every ninety (90) days. This is the only method of ensuring proper system operation and response to combustible gases. More frequent calibration checks are encouraged to detect problems, such as mud collecting on the sensor heads; accidental painting over of sensors, etc. A calibration check is defined as the procedure of applying a known concentration of gas to the system sensors, while observing the controller. The visual display will indicate the gas concentration, and alarm indicators/circuits will activate in direct relationship to gas concentration. Calibration adjustments must be made if results vary (Section 3.6). The removal of particulate matter from accessory sensor covers may be facilitated by the use of an appropriate halogen-free solvent. Water and ethanol are examples of suitable solvents. Dry the sensor cover thoroughly with compressed air, if necessary, before refitting to the sensor body. A calibration check must be made after the cleaned cover is re-installed, because the cleaning process may increase response due to removal of dirt, etc. 4.2 Periodic System Verification The following system verifications should be performed annually. Verify wiring, terminal connections and stability of mounting for all integral safety equipment including, but not limited to: • Power supplies • Control modules • Field detection devices • Signaling / output devices • Accessories connected to field and signaling devices Proper system operation should be verified by performing a full, functional test of all component devices of the safety system, ensuring that the proper levels of alarming occur. Fault/Malfunction circuit operation should be verified. Calibration intervals should be independently established through a documented procedure, including a calibration log maintained by plant personnel or third party testing services. 28 Model 610A 5.0 Troubleshooting 5.1 General It is highly recommended that a spare sensor be on hand at all times. General Monitors’ sensors are the most reliable, longest life, catalytic bead sensors available. Sensor failure tends to be one of the potential causes of real downtime. A full complement of other GMI recommended spare parts should also be on hand (Section 7.7). In the event the system is to have less than four active channels, Part Number 10102-1 (sensor simulator) must be substituted for each unused channel. Otherwise, the Fault LED indicator for the unused channel will remain lit. It is recommended that defective controllers be returned to the factory for repair, even if the warranty has expired. 5.2 Troubleshooting Table The information presented in the following table is designed to correct the more common problems, which appear during system startup and operation. Should the various actions suggested in the table fail to restore normal operation, we recommend that the factory be consulted and, if necessary, that the system be returned to the factory for repair. This section is intended to be a guide in correcting problems that may arise in the field. This section is not all-inclusive, and General Monitors should be contacted for assistance, if the corrective actions listed do not eliminate the problem. If equipment or qualified personnel required for various tests is not available, it is recommended that the defective unit be returned to General Monitors for repair. A complete written description of the problem should be included. Be sure to disconnect external alarm wiring before making any check that might send the unit into alarm, as an alarm condition will create problems. NOTE: If the equipment is under warranty, any repairs performed by persons other than General Monitors’ authorized personnel may void the warranty. Please read the warranty statement carefully. 29 Model 610A 5.3 Fault Codes In addition to the Fault LED on the front panel, the Model 610A provides a fault code on the digital display whenever a fault condition occurs. The Fault Codes that can appear on the digital display are: FAULT CODE AO DESCRIPTION SOLUTION Open Analog Output Signal HI High Supply Voltage LO Low Supply Voltage SE Sensor Failure Sensor connections are open or short circuited or there is excessive zero drift. F2 Failed to Complete Calibration F3 Software Checksum Error F5 Reset Button Malfunction F6 Mode Select Button Malfunction EEPROM Verification Error for Calibration Storage EEPROM Verification Error for Setup Storage F7 F8 F9 Check connections on rear terminal pins 5 & 6 and the analog output circuitry. If the problem is fixed, but “AO” is still displayed, restart the 610A unit. Make sure the supply voltage level is within specification limits. Make sure the supply voltage level is within specification limits. Calibration Check Period Exceeded Make sure the sensor wires are connected properly (in the field and at the rear of the unit) and recalibrate if necessary. If this fault continues to occur, replace the sensor. If this fault occurs, remove the gas and expose the sensor to clean air for at least five minutes. Then attempt another calibration. If the second attempt fails, replace the sensor. If this fault continues to occur after the sensor has been replaced, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. This fault occurs during initial power-up of the unit. If this fault occurs, remove and reapply power to the unit. If the fault continues to occur, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the calibration-check gas is left on the sensor for more than 6 minutes, this fault occurs. Remove the gas and expose the sensor to clean air. Table 9: Troubleshooting Table 30 Model 610A 6.0 Customer Support 6.1 General Monitors’ Offices Area UNITED STATES Corporate Office: 26776 Simpatica Circle Lake Forest, CA 92630 9776 Whithorn Drive Houston, TX 77095 UNITED KINGDOM Heather Close Lyme Green Business Park Macclesfield, Cheshire, United Kingdom, SK11 0LR IRELAND Ballybrit Business Park Galway, Republic of Ireland SINGAPORE No. 2 Kallang Pudding Rd. #09-16 Mactech Building Singapore 349307 MIDDLE EAST LOB12, #G20 P.O. Box 61209 Jebel Ali, Dubai United Arab Emirates 6.2 Phone/Fax/Email Toll Free: +1-800-446-4872 Phone: +1-949-581-4464 Fax: +1-949-581-1151 Email: [email protected] Phone: +1-281-855-6000 Fax: +1-281-855-3290 Email: [email protected] Phone: +44-1625-619-583 Fax: +44-1625-619-098 Email: [email protected] Phone: +353-91-751175 Fax: +353-91-751317 Email: [email protected] Phone: +65-6-748-3488 Fax: +65-6-748-1911 Email: [email protected] Phone: +971-4-8815751 Fax: +971-4-8817927 Email: [email protected] Other Sources of Help General Monitors provides extensive documentation, white papers and product literature for its complete selection of safety products. A selection of these documents are available online at the General Monitors website at http://www.generalmonitors.com. 31 Model 610A 7.0 Appendix 7.1 Warranty General Monitors warrants the Model 610A Controller to be free from defects in workmanship or material under normal use and service, within two (2) years from the date of shipment. General Monitors will repair or replace, without charge, any such defective equipment found to be defective during the warranty period. General Monitors’ personnel will make full determination of the nature of, and responsibility for defective equipment. Defective or damaged equipment must be shipped prepaid to General Monitors’ plant, or representative from which shipment was made. In all cases, this warranty is limited to the cost of the equipment supplied by General Monitors. The customer will assume all liability for the misuse of this equipment by its employees, or other personnel. All warranties are contingent upon proper use in the application for which the product was intended. They do not cover products which have been modified, or repaired, without General Monitors’ approval, or which have been subjected to neglect, accident, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been removed, or altered. Except for the express warranty stated above, General Monitors disclaims all warranties with regard to the products sold, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. The express warranty stated herein are in lieu of all obligations or liabilities, on the part of General Monitors for damages including, but not limited to, consequential damages arising out of/or in connection with, the use or performance of the product. NOTE: The Model 610A Four Channel Combustible Gas Monitor is easy to install; however, this manual should be read and understood before attempting to operate the system. 7.2 Sensor Operating Principle A high efficiency source supplies constant direct current to a Wheatstone Bridge circuit. One leg of the bridge is formed by two bead elements in series, contained within the sensor. These beads are heated by the direct current. The other leg, located on the printed circuit board in the controller, is a resistive divider. With the sensor exposed to clean air, any initial bridge imbalance is trimmed out with a zero potentiometer. When a combustible gas/air mixture diffuses into the sensor, it oxidizes on one of the beads (the “active” bead, which has been catalytically treated). The second (reference) bead, inert to combustible gases, compensates for ambient temperature, humidity, and pressure variations. The oxidation at the active bead causes a temperature increase, which produces an electrical resistance change and unbalances the Wheatstone Bridge. The difference in resistance between the two beads is proportional to the concentration of combustible gas. The signal from the bridge imbalance is amplified and conditioned by the circuitry. The conditioned signal is then displayed in % LEL by the individual digital readouts. 32 Model 610A This sensor relies on catalytic oxidation to sense and respond to combustible gases and vapors. As the term implies, oxygen plays a very crucial part in the operation. If there is a depletion of oxygen, there will be a loss of response from the sensor. If the combustible gas is in mixture with nitrogen or some other inert gas, there may be no response at all, depending on the level of oxygen present. Conversely, if the atmosphere is enriched with oxygen, the response will be enhanced and may even damage the sensor. Frequent checks should be made to determine sensor response and accuracy. These sensors are intended for area monitoring, in the work environment and if used in process control or other special situations, the factory should be consulted. 33 Model 610A 7.3 General Specifications - Controller 7.3.1 Mechanical Specifications Dimensions: Weight: Mounting Configuration: 4.0”W x 6.9”H x 11.5”D (102mm x 175mm x 292mm) 6.2 lbs. (2.86 kg) Rack, panel, wall 7.3.2 Environmental Specifications Temperature Range: Storage Temperature: Operating Humidity Range: 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C) -4°F to +149°F (-20°C to 65°C) 15% to 95% Non-Condensing 7.3.3 Electrical Specifications Power: Alarm Circuits: Output Signal: 105-130 VAC/50-60 Hz 205-255 VAC/50-60 Hz 22-30VDC. 9-Watts nominal per channel (117 VAC) 4 Amp relays @ 117 VAC, resistive. Discrete 0-21.7 mA, 300-Ohm maximum load Accuracy: ± 5%, 1.5-20mA 7.3.4 System Specifications Digital Readout: Accuracy: Electrical Classification: Warranty: Approvals: 7.4 Range 0-99% Lower Explosive Limit (% LEL) ± 3% LEL for < 50% LEL gas, and 5% for >50% LEL gas General purpose (non-hazardous, indoors) Two years CSA. FM General Specifications - Sensor 7.4.1 System Specifications Type: Response Time: Zero Drift: Typical Life: Electrical Classification: Warranty: Diffusion, low temperature catalytic bead Standard Industrial Types: Combustible Gas; High Temperature Combustible Gas Typically 6-second time constant when exposed to 50% LEL of methane gas. Less than 5% per year 3 years in normal service NEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D Two years. 7.4.2 Environmental Specifications Temperature Range: (operating and storage) Humidity: -65°F to 200°F (-55°C to +93°C) standard; high temperature special to 400°F (200°C). 15% to 95% R.H. 34 Model 610A 7.5 Cable Requirements 3-wire maximum cable length between controller and sensor assembly with one-way resistance of 20 Ohms (total 40 Ohms loop): AWG 20 18 16 14 METERS 580 910 1460 2320 FEET 1900 3000 4800 7600 Table 10: Maximum Cable Lengths 7.6 Sensors The following is a list of GMI sensors available for use with the Model 610A Controller: PART NUMBER 10001-1 10001-1R 10014-1 10058-1 10058-1R 10022-1 10059-1 10015-1 DESCRIPTION Standard Industrial Combustible Gas Sensor. Used for most hydrocarbons and hydrogen. Temperature range –65°F to +200°F (-55°C to +93°C). Same as Part Number 10001-1, except greatly improved resistance to poisons, such as HMDS (Hexamethyldisiloxane) and H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide). High Temperature Standard Industrial Combustible Gas Sensor. Same as Part Number 10001-1, except sensor body is stainless steel. Same as Part Number 10001-1, except sensor body is stainless steel. Same as Part Number 10058-1, except greatly improved resistance to poisons, such as HMDS (Hexamethyldisiloxane) and H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide). Similar to Part Number 10001-1, except PTB approved. Same as Part Number 10022-1, except body is constructed of stainless steel. High Temperature equivalent of Part Number 10022-1. It may be used in temperatures up to 400°F (200°C). Table 11: GMI Sensors Available for 610A System 35 Model 610A NOTE: Part Numbers 10001-1, 10058-1, 10022-1, and 10059-1 sensors are CSA C22.2 No. 152-1976 certified. Part Number 10252-1 sensor housing is normally used in the Western Hemisphere. Special ATEX approved housings are normally used in Europe. 7.7 Accessories 7.7.1 Calibration Equipment Calibration accessories may be purchased from General Monitors. Contact the factory, or your local representative, for technical or ordering information. The Portable Calibration Chamber is used to calibrate sensors for any specific combustible vapor, which has a flash point below ambient temperature. The customer must provide his own sample of the liquid to use with the chamber. GMI provides a microliter syringe for exact measurement of volumes to be used. Instructions for use are provided with the chamber. The portable purge calibrators are available for several common gases, including hydrogen, methane, ethane, propane and butane. The portable purge calibrator is a ready-for-use assembly, including a lecture bottle containing approximately 50% LEL of the gas ordered, plus regulator and an adapter, which fits over the sensor. Replacement cylinders are also available. 7.7.2 Sensor Covers The information below is of a general nature. GMI, or your local representative, should be contacted for specific recommendations: NOTE: If sensor covers are used, they should remain in place during calibration. If they are going to be cleaned, the sensor should be recalibrated after the sensor cover is re-installed. Although several of the available covers do not affect sensitivity or response-time themselves, accumulations of dust, dirt, water, etc., may do so. 7.7.2.1 Dust Guard Assembly (P/N 10110-1) The Dust Guard assembly is a simple, threaded stainless steel (type 303) cylinder with a disposable wire screen at one end. It is easily unscrewed for cleaning and/or replacement of the screen. The screen material is stainless steel (type 316) with a nominal 40-micron mesh. This accessory is specially designed to prevent dust and particulate matter from reaching the sensor flame arrestor. Such debris can plug the screen and limit the amount of gas reaching the active surface of the sensor. When the Dust Guard is installed, this problem is minimized and sensor response is virtually unchanged. The Dust Guard is also available in a kit with twelve replaceable screens. It can be used as an effective windscreen, and is recommended for corrosive, windy or high temperature environments. A typical application would be in the area surrounding a drying oven. 36 Model 610A 7.7.2.2 Sintered Stainless Steel Dust Guard (P/N 1800822) The construction of this accessory is similar to the Dust Guard assembly, above, but it has a 1/8” (3mm) thick sintered stainless steel disc at one end. The body material is stainless steel. It has an internal thread for installation on the sensor body. This Dust Guard provides protection from fine particulates and windy environments. It should be used only in dry locations because of the tendency of the sintered disc to absorb water, which would then act as a gas diffusion barrier until the disc dried-out again. This Dust Guard reduces sensor response, so it must never be removed for calibration. 7.7.2.3 Splash Guard (P/N 10395-1) The Splash Guard is a rugged VALOX plastic cylinder, which screws into place over the sensor body. It contains a series of internal baffles and a stainless steel mesh, which are designed to deflect water away from the sensor flame arrestor. The Splash Guard is recommended for areas where heavy rain or frequent equipment hose downs occur. NOTE: Sensor covers are not included in the Factory Mutual approval for this equipment. 7.7.2.4 Sensor Flow Chamber (P/N 10066) The General Monitors’ Sensor Flow Chamber is constructed of aluminum (optional stainless steel construction available). The chamber has an internal thread into which a sensor may be screwed, and two threaded ports, which accept ¼ inch tube fittings. The chamber is designed for insertion into a sampling system. 7.8 Recommended Spare Parts ITEM DESCRIPTION 1. 2. 3. FUSE, .8 amp, 250 VAC FUSE, 3.15 amps, 250 VAC Sensor PART NUMBER 951-012 951-213 10001-1 Table 12: Recommended Spare Parts 37 QTY. 2 2 1 Model 610A 7.9 Sample Calibration Schedule and Checklist To perform a Calibration Check or Calibration, refer to Sections 3.5 and 3.6. Sensor Serial Number Location ___________________ _____________________ 1. Installation and Preliminary calibration. Record date after preliminary calibration is done. Date: __________________ 2. 24-hour calibration. Record date after 24-hour calibration is done. Date: __________________ 3. 7-day calibration check Record date and reading of calibration check. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 4. 14-day calibration check Record date and reading of calibration check. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 5. 30-day calibration check. Record date and reading of calibration check. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 6. 60-day months calibration check. Record date and reading of calibration check. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 7. 90-day calibration check. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 38 Model 610A 7.10 Product Configuration Tables MODEL 610A FOUR CHANNEL COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROLLER A B C D E F G 1 1 1 01 1 2 4 A. CONTROLLER 610A 1 (Std) P1 2 P2 Model 610A Controller 110 VAC/24VDC 220 VAC/24 VDC 6.2 lbs. B. RELAY – ALARM 1 2 3 (STD) RA1 RA3 RA4 COMMON RELAYS/COMMON ALARMS DISCRETE RELAYS/COMMON ALARMS DISCRETE RELAYS/DISCRETE ALARMS C. RELAY – STATE 1 2 (STD) RS 1 RS 2 LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, DE-ENERGIZED LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED 3 RS 3 LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, DE-ENERGIZED 4 RS 4 LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED 5 RS 5 6 RS 6 NON-LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, DEENERGIZED NON-LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED 7 RS 7 NON-LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, DE-ENERGIZED 8 RS 8 NON-LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED D. COMBUSTIBLE – SENSOR 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 NONE (STD) 10001-1 10001-1R 10014-1 10014-1R 10022-1 10058-1 10058-1R 10164-1 10387-4 10015-1 11159-1 11159-1L 11159-2 11159-2L No Sensor Sensor Al Standard Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor Al Poison Resistant Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor Al Hi-Temp Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor Al Hi-Temp Poison Resistant Hydrocarbon Sensor Al PTB Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor SS Standard Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor SS Poison Resistant Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor AL Hydrogen Specific Sensor AL Super Poison Resistant Industrial Hydrocarbon Sensor Al Hi-Temp Industrial Hydrocarbon Export Sensor SS Standard Industrial HC CENELEC Sensor SS Standard Industrial HC CENELEC (W/Lugs) Sensor SS Hi-Temp HC CENELEC Sensor SS Hi-Temp HC CENELEC (W/Lugs) 39 .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. .05 Lbs. Model 610A E. VERSION 1 2 (STD) VER1 VER2 FM VERSION NON-FM VERSION F. ZONE CONTROLLER 1 2 (STD) ZC1 ZC2 ZONE CONTROLLER ON ZONE CONTROLLER OFF G. ACTIVE CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 (STD) Controller Only One Active Channel 1X Sensor Housing 3x Sensor Simulator Combustible G Two Active Channels 2X Sensor Housing 2X Sensor Simulator Combustible G Three Active Channels 3X Sensor Housing 1X Sensor Simulator Combustible G Four Active Channels 4X Sensor Housing Table 13: Product Configuration Tables 40 4.5 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 7.0 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 9.5 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 12.0 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. Model 610A 7.11 Engineering Documentation 7.11.1 Panel Assembly, Panel Mount – 98, Ref: 10199C Figure 10: Panel Assembly, Panel Mount –98, Ref: 10199C 41 Model 610A 7.11.2 Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 610A Controller Figure 11: Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 610A Controller 42 Model 610A ADDENDUM Product Disposal Considerations This product may contain hazardous and/or toxic substances. EU Member states shall dispose according to WEEE regulations. For further General Monitors’ product WEEE disposal information please visit: www.generalmonitors.com/customer_support/faq_general.html All other countries or states: please dispose of in accordance with existing federal, state and local environmental control regulations. 43 Model 610A Index on/off switch, 6 periodic calibration check, 3 periodic calibration checks, 28 portable calibration chamber, 37 portable purge calibrator, 20 portable purge calibrators, 37 quad channel system, 4 reference bead, 33 remote reset connection, 11 reset button, 19 sensor assemblies, 5 sensor covers, 5, 28 sensor covers, 37 sensor flow chamber, 38 sensor installation, 12 sensor locations, 11 sensor simulator, 30 sensor specifications, 35 service loop, 5 shielded cable, 13 sintered stainless steel dust guard, 38 spare parts, 38 spare sensors, 30 splash guard, 38 stable operation, 13 suitable solvents, 28 trouble-shooting table, 30 un-spliced cable, 13 vapor density, 11 voting system, 17 warning, 1 warranty, 33, 35 wheatstone bridge, 33 zone control option (voting), 16 accessories, 37 active bead, 33 air currents, 11 alarm wiring connections, 15 analog output connection, 11 battery backup, 7 cable requirements, 36 cable runs, 13 calibration equipment, 37 catalytic oxidation, 34 common alarms, 27 common relays, 27 controller, 35 controller operating temperature range, 6 detect more than one gas, 5 discrete alarms, 27 discrete relays, 27 dust guard assembly, 37 environmental factors, 12 explosion-proof housing, 3 fault, 5 hazardous areas, 3 inductive loads, 16 installation, 6 latched alarm circuits, 27 latching, 23 latching alarms, 19 lel, 3, 24 less than four active channels, 5 likely sources of gas emission, 12 list of available sensors, 36 model 610, 3 mounting, 6 non-latching, 24 non-latching alarms, 19 44 Technical Data Discrete Input and Output Modules (Catalog Numbers 1746-IA4, -IA8, -IA16, -IB8, -IB16, -IB32, -IC16, -IG16, -IH16, -IM4, -IM8, -IM16, -IN16, -ITB16, -ITV16, -IV8, -IV16, -IV32, -OA8, -OA16, -OAP12, -OB6EI, -OB8, -OB16, OB16E, -OB32, OB32E, -OBP8, -OBP16, -OG16, -OV8, -OV16, OV32, -OVP16, -OW4, -OW8, -OW16, -OX8, -IO4, -IO8, -IO12, -IO12DC) Inside ........................................... page Discrete I/O Module Summary .......... 2 Features and Benefits ........................ 3 I/O Module Operation ........................ 5 Enhanced Discrete I/O Modules ........ 7 Terms and Symbols Used in the Specification Tables and Wiring Diagrams ....................................... 12 Specifications, Wiring, and Circuit Diagrams ....................................... 15 Fixed I/O Chassis and Module Compatibility ................................. 47 Discrete I/O Power Dissipation ........ 49 Environmental Specifications .......... 50 Accessories ...................................... 50 Allen-Bradley Support ...................... 51 Our wide variety of input, output, and combination modules makes the SLC 500™ family the smart choice for all of your small PLC applications.,2 PRGXOHVDUHDYDLODEOHLQDZLGHYDULHW\RIGHQVLWLHVLQFOXGLQJDQG SRLQWDQGFDQLQWHUIDFHWR$&'&DQG77/YROWDJHOHYHOV2XWSXW PRGXOHVDUHDYDLODEOHZLWKVROLGVWDWH$&VROLGVWDWH'&DQGUHOD\FRQWDFWW\SH RXWSXWV)RUDGGHGIOH[LELOLW\FRPELQDWLRQPRGXOHVDUHDOVRDYDLODEOHLQ LQSXWRXWSXWLQSXWRXWSXWDQGLQSXWRXWSXWYHUVLRQV Designed and tested for industrial applications, our modules are of the highest quality.7KHPRGXOHVIHDWXUHLQSXWILOWHULQJRSWLFDOLVRODWLRQDQG EXLOWLQVXUJHSURWHFWLRQWRHQKDQFHWKHUHOLDELOLW\RIRSHUDWLRQLQQRLV\ LQGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQWV Class 1, Division 2 certified by UL and CSA. CE compliant.$OOPRGXOHVDUH 8/OLVWHGDQG&6$DSSURYHGDQGPHHW&ODVV'LYLVLRQ KD]DUGRXVORFDWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWVRIERWK8QGHUZULWHU·V/DERUDWRU\DQGWKH &DQDGLDQ6WDQGDUGV$VVRFLDWLRQH[FHSWIRUWKRVHQRWHGLQWKHPRGXOH VXPPDU\RQSDJH)RUXVHZLWKLQWKH(XURSHDQ8QLRQRU(($UHJLRQV PRVWPRGXOHVKDYHEHHQWHVWHGWRPHHW&RXQFLO'LUHFWLYH (OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\H[FHSWLRQVDUHOLVWHGRQSDJH 2 Discrete Input and Output Modules AC/DC Modules DC Modules AC Modules Discrete I/O Module Summary ID Code 100 300 500 101 301 501 2703 2903 2803 Voltage Category 100/120V ac 100/120V ac 100/120V ac 200/240V ac 200/240V ac 200/240V ac 100/120V ac 100/120V ac 120/240V ac 306 506 706 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 519 509 507 320 520 720 24V dc 48V dc 125V dc 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 518 515 24V dc 5V dc/TTL 2619 2713 2913 2920 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 3113 Input/Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output I/O Points 4 8 16 4 8 16 8 16 12 Module Description 120V ac Input 120V ac Input 120V ac Input 240V ac Input 240V ac Input 240V ac Input 120/240V ac Output 120/240V ac Output High Current 120/240V ac Output Page 15 15 15 15 15 15 17 17 17 Input Input Input 8 16 32 Current Sinking DC Input Current Sinking DC Input Current Sinking DC Input 19 19 19 Input Input Input Input Input Input 16 16 16 8 16 32 Fast Response DC Sinking Input Current Sinking DC Input Current Sinking DC Input Current Sourcing DC Input Current Sourcing DC Input Current Sourcing DC Input 19 22 22 22 22 22 Input Input 16 16 Fast Response DC Sourcing Input Current Sourcing TTL Input 22 27 1746-OB16E(1)(3) Output Output Output Output 6 8 16 16 Isolated Sourcing DC Output Current Sourcing DC Output Current Sourcing DC Output Current Sourcing DC Output 31 28 28 31 24V dc 1746-OB32(1) Output 32 Current Sourcing DC Output 28 3120 24V dc 1746-OB32E(1) Output 32 Current Sourcing DC Output 31 2721 24V dc 1746-OBP8(3) Output 8 High Current Sourcing DC Output 31 2921 24V dc Output 16 High Current Sourcing DC Output 35 2714 2914 3114 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 1746-OBP16(1) 1746-OV8 1746-OV16 1746-OV32(1) Output Output Output 8 16 32 Current Sinking DC Output Current Sinking DC Output Current Sinking DC Output 37 37 37 2922 24V dc 1746-OVP16(1) Output 16 High Current Sinking DC Output 40 2915 5V dc/TTL 1746-OG16(2) Output 16 Current Sinking TTL Output 41 510 2500 24V ac/dc AC/DC Relay 1746-IN16 1746-OW4(1) Input Output 16 4 24V ac/dc Input Relay (Hard Contact) Output 42 43 2700 AC/DC Relay 1746-OW8(1) Output 8 Relay (Hard Contact) Output 43 2900 AC/DC Relay 1746-OW16(1) Output 16 Relay (Hard Contact) Output 43 2701 AC/DC Relay 1746-OX8(1) Output 8 Isolated Relay Output 43 800 In - 120V ac, Out - Relay 1746-IO4 In - 120V ac, Out - Relay 1746-IO8(1) Input/Output 2 In, 2 Out Combination Input/Output 45 Input/Output 4 In, 4 Out Combination Input/Output 45 In - 120V ac, Out - Relay 1746-IO12(1) In - 24V dc, Out - Relay 1746-IO12DC(3) Input/Output 6 In, 6 Out Combination Input/Output 45 Input/Output 6 In, 6 Out Combination Input/Output 45 1100 1500 1512 Catalog Number 1746-IA4 1746-IA8 1746-IA16 1746-IM4 1746-IM8 1746-IM16 1746-OA8 1746-OA16 1746-OAP12(1) 1746-IB8 1746-IB16 1746-IB32(1) 1746-ITB16 1746-IC16 1746-IH16 1746-IV8 1746-IV16 1746-IV32(1) 1746-ITV16 1746-IG16(2) 1746-OB6EI 1746-OB8 1746-OB16 (1) (1) Certified for Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location by CSA only. (2) Not CE marked. (3) These modules carry the C-UL mark and are certified by UL per CSA only. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules Features and Benefits 3 Select I/O modules to exactly match your application.&RPELQDWLRQ PRGXOHVDOORZ\RXWRKDYHLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWVLQDVLQJOHVORWIRUHIILFLHQWXVH RI\RXUFKDVVLVVSDFH Expand the I/O capacity of your fixed controller system. 7ZRGLVFUHWH,2 PRGXOHVFDQEHDGGHGWRWKHIL[HGFRQWUROOHU·VVORWH[SDQVLRQFKDVVLV LQFUHDVLQJWKHIOH[LELOLW\RIWKHV\VWHP All relay contacts are Silver Cadmium with Gold overlay. *ROGSODWLQJ UHVLVWVR[LGDWLRQDQGWDUQLVKLQJUHVXOWLQJIURPQRQXVH6LOYHU&DGPLXPDFWVDV DQH[FHOOHQWFRQGXFWRU High-density 32-Point DC I/O and fast response DC inputs are available. 7KHVHPRGXOHVDOORZ\RXWRDSSO\WKH6/&SURFHVVRUVLQDEURDGHU VSHFWUXPRIFRQWURODSSOLFDWLRQV INPUT LEDs indicate the status of each I/O point. IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 AC COM AC COM Terminal identification diagrams on each module LEDs indicate the status of each I/O point./('VLOOXPLQDWHWRDVVLVW\RXLQ WURXEOHVKRRWLQJZKHQWKHSURSHUVLJQDOLVUHFHLYHGDWDQLQSXWWHUPLQDORU ZKHQWKHSURFHVVRUDSSOLHVSRZHUWRDQRXWSXWWHUPLQDO Terminal identification diagrams on each module. 7HUPLQDOLGHQWLILFDWLRQ GLDJUDPVDUHORFDWHGRQHDFKPRGXOHPDNLQJWHUPLQDOLGHQWLILFDWLRQHDVLHU Publication 1746-2.35 4 Discrete Input and Output Modules Digital and field circuits are optically isolated. Self-locking tabs secure the module in the chassis. Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates help reduce installation time. Barrier-type terminal blocks are provided on all modules. Digital and field circuits are optically isolated. $OOPRGXOHVIHDWXUHLVRODWLRQ EHWZHHQGLJLWDODQGILHOGFLUFXLWVUHVXOWLQJLQLQFUHDVHGQRLVHLPPXQLW\DQG OLPLWHGGDPDJHWR\RXUV\VWHPGXHWRDQHOHFWULFDOPDOIXQFWLRQRIWKHILHOG ZLULQJ Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates cut installation time.:LULQJWHUPLQDOV KDYHVHOIOLIWLQJSUHVVXUHSODWHVWRVHFXUHWZR$:*ILHOGZLUHV Removable terminal blocks help ease the wiring task. 5HPRYDEOHWHUPLQDO EORFNVDOORZ\RXWRUHSODFHWKHPRGXOHZLWKRXWUHZLULQJLWQRWDYDLODEOHRQDOO PRGXOHV Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. $ PDWFKLQJFRORUEDQGLVDOVRSURYLGHGRQWKHIURQWRIWKHPRGXOHWRDVVLVWLQ PDWFKLQJWKHWHUPLQDOEORFNWRWKHPRGXOH Barrier-type terminal blocks provided on all modules.(DFKWHUPLQDOEORFN IHDWXUHVDEDUULHURQWKUHHVLGHVRIHDFKWHUPLQDOWRKHOSSUHYHQWDFFLGHQWDO VKRUWLQJRIILHOGZLULQJ Self-locking tabs secure the module in the chassis. 1RWRROVDUHQHFHVVDU\ WRLQVWDOORUUHPRYHDPRGXOHIURPWKHFKDVVLV7RLQVWDOODPRGXOH\RXVOLGHLW LQWRWKHFKDVVLVXQWLOLWODWFKHVLQSODFH Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules I/O Module Operation 5 Power Supply Requirements 'LVFUHWHPRGXOHVUHFHLYHSRZHUWKURXJKWKH,2FKDVVLVEDFNSODQHIURP WKHDVVRFLDWHGFKDVVLVSRZHUVXSSO\5HIHUWRWKHLQGLYLGXDOPRGXOH VSHFLILFDWLRQVIRUWKHFXUUHQWUHTXLUHGIURPWKHSRZHUVXSSO\LQP$WR RSHUDWHWKHPRGXOH<RXVKRXOGWRWDOWKHFXUUHQWUHTXLUHPHQWVIRUDOOWKH PRGXOHVLQWKHFKDVVLVWRDYRLGRYHUORDGLQJWKHSRZHUVXSSO\RUWKH,2 FKDVVLVEDFNSODQH Input Modules $QLQSXWPRGXOHUHVSRQGVWRDQLQSXWVLJQDOLQWKHIROORZLQJPDQQHU ,QSXWILOWHULQJOLPLWVWKHHIIHFWRIYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWVFDXVHGE\FRQWDFW ERXQFHDQGRUHOHFWULFDOQRLVH,IQRWILOWHUHGYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWVFRXOG SURGXFHIDOVHGDWD$OOLQSXWPRGXOHVXVHLQSXWILOWHULQJ 2SWLFDOLVRODWLRQVKLHOGVEDFNSODQHFLUFXLWVDQGPRGXOHORJLFFLUFXLWVIURP SRVVLEOHGDPDJHGXHWRHOHFWULFDOWUDQVLHQWV /RJLFFLUFXLWVSURFHVVWKHVLJQDO $QLQSXW/('WXUQVRQRURIILQGLFDWLQJWKHVWDWXVRIWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ LQSXWGHYLFH Input Input Filtering Optical Isolation Logic Circuits Backplane LED Output Modules $QRXWSXWPRGXOHFRQWUROVWKHRXWSXWVLJQDOLQWKHIROORZLQJPDQQHU /RJLFFLUFXLWVGHWHUPLQHWKHRXWSXWVWDWXV $QRXWSXW/('LQGLFDWHVWKHVWDWXVRIWKHRXWSXWVLJQDO 2SWLFDOLVRODWLRQVHSDUDWHVPRGXOHORJLFDQGEDFNSODQHFLUFXLWVIURPWKH ILHOGVLJQDO 7KHRXWSXWGULYHUWXUQVWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJRXWSXWRQRURII Backplane Logic Circuits Optical Isolation Output Drivers Output LED Publication 1746-2.35 6 Discrete Input and Output Modules Surge Suppression 0RVWRXWSXWPRGXOHVKDYHEXLOWLQVXUJHVXSSUHVVLRQWRUHGXFHWKHHIIHFWVRI KLJKYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWV+RZHYHUZHUHFRPPHQGWKDW\RXXVHDQDGGLWLRQDO VXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFHLIDQRXWSXWPRGXOHLVEHLQJXVHGWRFRQWURODQLQGXFWLYH GHYLFHVXFKDV • • • • UHOD\V PRWRUVWDUWHUV VROHQRLGV PRWRUV $GGLWLRQDOVXSSUHVVLRQLVHVSHFLDOO\LPSRUWDQWLI\RXULQGXFWLYHGHYLFHLVLQ VHULHVZLWKRUSDUDOOHOWRDKDUGFRQWDFWVXFKDV • SXVKEXWWRQV • VHOHFWRUVZLWFKHV %\DGGLQJDVXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFHGLUHFWO\DFURVVWKHFRLORIDQLQGXFWLYHGHYLFH \RXZLOOUHGXFHWKHHIIHFWVRIYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWVFDXVHGE\LQWHUUXSWLQJWKH FXUUHQWWRWKDWLQGXFWLYHGHYLFHDQGSURORQJWKHOLIHRIWKHVZLWFKFRQWDFWV 7KHGLDJUDPEHORZVKRZVDQRXWSXWPRGXOHZLWKDVXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFH VAC/VDC OUT 0 +DC or L1 Surge Suppressor OUT 1 AC or DC Output Module OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 COM DC COM or L2 5HFRPPHQGHGVXUJHVXSSUHVVRUVDUHSURYLGHGLQWKHVSHFLILFDWLRQVWDEOHV Important: $GGLQJDVXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFHDFURVV\RXUORDGZLOOGHIHDWWKHIDVW WXUQRIIIHDWXUHRIWKH2%(,2%(6HULHV%DQGODWHU 2%(2%36HULHV%DQGODWHU2%3DQG293'& RXWSXWPRGXOHV5HIHUWRSDJHVDQGIRUPRUH LQIRUPDWLRQDERXWVXSSUHVVLRQZKHQXVLQJWKH2%(, 2%(2%(2%32%3DQG293UHVSHFWLYHO\ Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules Enhanced Discrete I/O Modules 7 32-Point Modules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xx Connects 32-point module to DIN rail mountable terminal block 32-Point I/O Module Male MIL-C-83503 Header 1492-IFM40xx DIN rail mountable terminal block Publication 1746-2.35 8 Discrete Input and Output Modules Fast Response Input Modules (1746-ITB16, -ITV16) 7KHIDVWUHVSRQVH'&LQSXWPRGXOHVSURYLGHLQSXWSRLQWVDQGDUHGHVLJQHG IRUKLJKVSHHGDSSOLFDWLRQVUHTXLULQJIDVWUHVSRQVHWRLQSXWVLJQDOVIURP'& VHQVLQJGHYLFHV:KHQXVHGZLWKDQ6/&RUKLJKHUSURFHVVRUDQGWKH 'LVFUHWH,QSXW,QWHUUXSW',,LQVWUXFWLRQVHFSROOLQJSXOVHVFDQEH UHDGXSWRDIUHTXHQF\RI.+],WLV.+]LIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOVDUHIURPD JUD\FRGHHQFRGHU5HFRPPHQGHGZLULQJWRDQ$OOHQ%UDGOH\'$EVROXWH *UD\&RGH(QFRGHULVSURYLGHGRQSDJH %RWKVLQNLQJDQGVRXUFLQJYHUVLRQVRIWKHIDVWUHVSRQVHLQSXWPRGXOHDUH DYDLODEOH High-Current Solid-State Output Modules (1746-OAP12, -OB6EI, -OBP8, -OBP16, -OVP16) +LJKFXUUHQWVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWPRGXOHVH[SDQGDSSOLFDWLRQFRYHUDJHIRUWKH 6/&E\SURYLGLQJWKHIROORZLQJHQKDQFHGIXQFWLRQDOLW\ • • • • LQFUHDVHGFXUUHQWUDWLQJ IXVHSURWHFWLRQDQGGLDJQRVWLFV KLJKVSHHGVZLWFKLQJ H[FHOOHQWUHOLDELOLW\ 7KHKLJKFXUUHQWVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWPRGXOHVH[SDQGDSSOLFDWLRQFRYHUDJHLQ DXWRPRWLYHSDFNDJLQJDQGPDWHULDOKDQGOLQJDSSOLFDWLRQVE\DOORZLQJWKH6/& SURFHVVRUWRGLUHFWO\FRQWUROVROHQRLGVFRQWDFWRUVPRWRUVDQGPRWRU VWDUWHUORDGVXSWRVL]HZLWKFRQWLQXRXVFXUUHQWUHTXLUHPHQWVRIXSWR$DW °&2$32%3293DQG$DW°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ublication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules Blown Fuse LED OUTPUT F U S E FAC OBP16 Replaceable Fuse (F1) 1 AMP TRIAC JP 1 OUTPUT VOLTAGE SA ® OBP16 and OVP16 20.4 - 26.4 -------- ® UL Jumper for CPU Notification SER 3 2 1 SLC 500 OUTPUT MODULE 12 13 14 15 CAT 8 9 10 11 SERIAL NO. 4 5 6 7 F1 0 1 2 3 9 Jumper Settings and Fuse Replacement Information: OUTPUT RATINGS 6.4 AMP/MODULE 1.5 AMP/OUTPUT @ 30C 1.0 AMP/OUTPUT @ 60C WHEN FUSE OPENS 2 1 <---- CPU CONTINUES 2 <------- 3 3 CPU FAULTS 2 1 CPU CONTINUES CPU FAULTS WHEN FUSE OPENS 2 F1 FUSE REPLACEMENT LITTLEFUSE 322010 A-B CAT. NO. 1746-F8 MADE IN U.S.A. FUSE REPLACEMENT LITTLEFUSE 322010 A-B CAT. NO. 1746-F8 OVP12 Replaceable Fuse (F1) Blown Fuse LED OUTPUT F U S E 1 AMP TRIAC SER JP 1 WHEN FUSE OPENS 2 3 3 WHEN FUSE OPENS CPU CONTINUES 2 2 FUSE REPLACEMENT SAN-O HQ 6.3A A-B CAT. NO. 1746-F9 MADE IN U.S.A. 1 CPU FAULTS F2 Jumper Settings and Fuse Replacement Information: OUTPUT RATINGS 2.0A MAX @ 30 5C 1.25A MAX @ 55 5C 1.0A MAX @ 60 5C 240V MAX / 480 VA MAX 4.5A MAX/COMMON (MAX V.A. PER MODULE) 1440 VA OAP12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 85-265 V AC 50/60 HZ 3 2 1 ® UL SA ® Replaceable Fuse (F1) Jumper for CPU Notification FAC F1 SLC 500 OUTPUT MODULE 8 9 10 11 CAT 4 5 6 7 SERIAL NO. 0 1 2 3 1 <---- CPU CONTINUES 2 <------- CPU FAULTS FUSE REPLACEMENT SAN-O HQ 6.3A A-B CAT. NO. 1746-F9 Replaceable Fuse (F2) Publication 1746-2.35 10 Discrete Input and Output Modules Electronically Protected Output Modules (1746-OB6EI, -OB16E, and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°&2%(DQG$DW &$DW&2%(PDNLQJWKHPWKHSHUIHFWVROXWLRQIRU FRQWUROOLQJ9GFDQG9GFVROHQRLGDQGODPSORDGV7KHPRGXOHVDUHDOVR HTXLSSHGZLWKDQ/('LQGLFDWRUWKDWLOOXPLQDWHVZKHQWKHVKRUWFLUFXLWRU RYHUORDGFRQGLWLRQRFFXUVWRH[SHGLWHWKHWURXEOHVKRRWLQJSURFHVV ,QGXFWLYHORDGWXUQRIIWLPHIRU2%(,DQG2%(6HULHV%DQGODWHU RXWSXWPRGXOHVLVUHGXFHGE\RYHUVWDQGDUG'&RXWSXWPRGXOHV DOORZLQJIDVWDSSOLFDWLRQF\FOHWLPHV OUTPUT Front View E F U S E EFUSE LED NOTE: There is no jumper setting on this module. Important: 7KHPRGXOHVGRQRWSURYLGHSURWHFWLRQDJDLQVWUHYHUVHSRODULW\ ZLULQJRUZLULQJWR$&SRZHUVRXUFHV(OHFWURQLFSURWHFWLRQLVQRW LQWHQGHGWRUHSODFHIXVHVFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVRURWKHUFRGHUHTXLUHG ZLULQJSURWHFWLRQGHYLFHV Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 11 Overload Protection (1746-OB6EI, -OB16E, and -OB32E) 7KHFKDUWDQGWDEOHEHORZGHVFULEHRYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQIRUWKH2%(, 2%(DQG2%(7KHHOHFWURQLFSURWHFWLRQLVEDVHGRQDWKHUPDOFXWRXW WHPSHUDWXUHZKLFKLVUHDFKHGPRUHTXLFNO\DWORZHURYHUORDGFXUUHQWZKHQ WZRWRIRXUDGMDFHQWFKDQQHOVDUHRSHUDWLQJ7KHDGMDFHQWFKDQQHOJURXSLQJV DUH • 2%(,7KHFKDQQHOVRQWKLVPRGXOHVDUHQRWJURXSHGLQVHWV +RZHYHUFKDQQHOVZKLFKDUHGLUHFWO\DGMDFHQWWRRQHDQRWKHUZLOODOVR DOORZWKHWKHUPDOFXWRXWWHPSHUDWXUHWREHUHDFKHGPRUHTXLFNO\ • 2%(DQG • 2%(DQG Output Current (Amps) Overload Protection (Single channel operating at maximum rated current.) C Overload Protection (Two to four adjacent channels operating at maximum rated current.) D Recommended Operating Current B A 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Operating Temperature (°C) Catalog Number Recommended Operating Current Overload Protection at 0°C (32°F) at 60°C (140°F) at 0°C (32°F) at 60°C (140°F) 1746-OB6EI A = 2A B = 2A C = 5.5A D = 4.5A 1746-OB16E A = 1A B = 0.5A C = 4A D = 3.5A 1746-OB32E A = 0.5A B = 0.25A C = 2A D = 1A Important: 7KH2%(,2%(DQG2%(SHUIRUPDXWRUHVHWXQGHURYHUORDGFRQGLWLRQV:KHQDQRXWSXW FKDQQHORYHUORDGRFFXUVDVGHVFULEHGDERYHWKDWFKDQQHOOLPLWVFXUUHQWZLWKLQPLOOLVHFRQGVDIWHULWV WKHUPDOFXWRXWWHPSHUDWXUHLVUHDFKHG:KLOHLQFXUUHQWOLPLWWKHRXWSXWFKDQQHOFDQFRROEHORZWKH WKHUPDOFXWRXWWHPSHUDWXUHDOORZLQJWKHPRGXOHWRDXWRUHVHWDQGUHVXPHFRQWURORIWKHRXWSXWFKDQQHO DVGLUHFWHGE\WKHSURFHVVRUXQWLOWKHWKHUPDOFXWRXWWHPSHUDWXUHLVDJDLQUHDFKHG 5HPRYLQJSRZHUIURPDQRYHUORDGHGRXWSXWFKDQQHODOVRDOORZVWKHRXWSXWFKDQQHOWRFRROEHORZWKH WKHUPDOFXWRXWWHPSHUDWXUHDOORZLQJDXWRUHVHWWRRFFXUZKHQSRZHULVUHVWRUHG7KHRXWSXWFKDQQHO RSHUDWHVDVGLUHFWHGE\WKHSURFHVVRUXQWLOWKHWKHUPDOFXWRXWWHPSHUDWXUHLVDJDLQUHDFKHG 7RDYRLGDXWRUHVHWRIDQRXWSXWFKDQQHOXQGHURYHUORDGFRQGLWLRQVXVHDQH[WHUQDOPHFKDQLFDOIXVHWR RSHQWKHFLUFXLWZKHQRYHUORDGHG Publication 1746-2.35 12 Terms and Symbols Used in the Specification Tables and Wiring Diagrams Discrete Input and Output Modules Terms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ublication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 13 6XUJH&XUUHQW3HU3RLQWWKHPD[LPXPDPSOLWXGHDQGGXUDWLRQSXOVHRI FXUUHQWDQRXWSXWFDQSURYLGHWRDQLQGXFWLYHRXWSXWGHYLFH 9ROWDJH&DWHJRU\WKHQRPLQDOYROWDJHXVHGWRGHVFULEHWKHPRGXOH I/O Wiring Symbols Symbol Device Name 2-wire Input Device 3-wire Input Device Solenoid Output CR L Contact Relay Output TTL Logic Output 5HODWHG3XEOLFDWLRQV'HWDLOHGZLULQJGLDJUDPVIRULQSXWPRGXOHVDQG $OOHQ%UDGOH\6HULHV3KRWRHOHFWULF6HQVRUVDUHSURYLGHGLQSXEOLFDWLRQ *5 Important: 7KHZLULQJGLDJUDPVLQWKLVGRFXPHQWDUHH[DPSOHVRQO\,WLVQRW QHFHVVDU\WRFRQQHFWDQ,2GHYLFHWRHYHU\WHUPLQDORQDQ,2 PRGXOH·VWHUPLQDOEORFN Publication 1746-2.35 14 Discrete Input and Output Modules Wiring Diagrams 7KHSRLQW,2PRGXOHZLULQJGLDJUDPVLQFOXGHERWKGHFLPDODQGRFWDO QXPEHUVIRU,2DGGUHVVLQJDQGZLUHLGHQWLILFDWLRQ6HHILJXUHEHORZ8VH WKHGHFLPDOQXPEHUVLQWKHXSSHUOHIWSRUWLRQRIHDFKER[WRZLUH\RXU SRLQW,2PRGXOHWRDQ6/&V\VWHP8VHWKHRFWDOQXPEHUVLQWKHORZHU ULJKWSRUWLRQRIWKHER[IRUD3/&V\VWHP$VVKLSSHGIURPWKHIDFWRU\WKH ,2PRGXOHKDVDGHFLPDODGGUHVVODEHORQWKHLQVLGHRILWVGRRU$QRFWDO ODEHONLWLVLQFOXGHGZLWK\RXUSRLQW,2PRGXOHVRU\RXFDQRUGHUD VHSDUDWHRFWDOFRQYHUVLRQNLWWRDOORZ\RXWRFRQYHUW\RXUPRGXOHWRWKHRFWDO V\VWHP Important: 3/&V\VWHPVXVHWKHRFWDOODEHOV6HHILJXUHEHORZ 'LUHFWLRQVRQKRZWRLQVWDOOWKHODEHOVDUHLQFOXGHGLQSXEOLFDWLRQQXPEHU 'LVFUHWH,20RGXOHV,QVWDOODWLRQ,QVWUXFWLRQV7KHVHLQVWUXFWLRQVDUH SURYLGHGLQDNLWWKDWLVVKLSSHGZLWKHDFKGLVFUHWH,2PRGXOH 1746-IA16 100/120V ac L1 IN 0 0 IN 1 2 IN 3 4 IN 5 6 IN 7 10 IN 9 12 IN 11 1 IN 2 3 IN 4 5 IN 6 100/120V ac 7 IN 8 11 IN 10 13 IN 12 14 IN 13 IN 14 15 16 IN 15 17 AC COM L2 AC COM Commons connected internally. SLC PLC For SLC (decimal) IN 14 16 For PLC (octal) Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 15 Specifications, Wiring, and Circuit Diagrams Specification AC Input Modules (1746-IA4, -IA8, -IA16, -IM4, -IM8, -IM16) Catalog Number 1746-IA4 1746-IA8 Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Inputs Points per Common Backplane 5V dc Current Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) 1746-IA16 (RTB) 100/120V ac 85 to 132V ac at 47 to 63 Hz 4 8 4 8 0.035A 0.050A 0.0A 0.0A on = 35 ms off = 45 ms 30V ac 2 mA 12 mA at 120V ac 0.8A Off-State Voltage (max.) Off-State Current (max.) Nominal Input Current Inrush Current(1) (max.) Inrush Current Time Duration(1) (max.) 1746-IM4 1746-IM8 1746-IM16 (RTB) 200/240V ac 170 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz 4 8 4 8 0.035A 0.050A 0.0A 0.0A on = 35 ms off = 45 ms 50V ac 2 mA 12 mA at 240V ac 1.6A 16 16 0.085A 0.0A 500 µsec. 16 16 0.085A 0.0A 500 µsec. (1) An ac input device must be compatible with SLC 500 input circuit inrush current. A current limiting resistor can be used to limit inrush current; however, the operating characteristics of the ac input circuit are affected. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN ± 0V ac 30V ac IA4, IA8, IA16 85V ac 132V ac 0V ac 50V ac IM4, IM8, IM16 170V ac 265V ac Off State Input State Not Guaranteed On State COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal. Circuit Diagrams 1746-IA4, IA8, IA16 AC COM 1746-IM4, IM8, IM16 270 1870 AC COM 261 1µF 261 1M 0.3µF 0.15µF IN 270 270 1870 1µF 0.3µF 1870 1µF 261 261 1M 1M IN 1870 1µF 1M IN 270 0.15µF IN Publication 1746-2.35 16 Discrete Input and Output Modules Wiring Diagrams 1746-IA4 100/120V ac 1746-IM4 200/240V ac 1746-IA8 100/120V ac NOT USED 1746-IM8 200/240V ac L1 IN 0 NOT USED IN 1 NOT USED L1 100/120V ac (IA4) 200/240V ac (IM4) IN 2 NOT USED 100/120V ac (IA8) IN 3 IN 0 200/240V ac (IM8) IN 4 IN 1 IN 5 IN 2 IN 6 IN 3 IN 7 AC COM L2 AC COM L2 Commons connected internally. 1746-IA16 100/120V ac 1746-IM16 200/240V ac L1 IN 0 0 IN 1 2 IN 3 1 IN 2 100/120V ac (IA16) 200/240V ac (IM16) 3 IN 4 4 IN 5 6 IN 7 10 IN 9 12 IN 11 5 IN 6 7 IN 8 11 IN 10 13 IN 12 14 IN 13 IN 14 15 16 IN 15 17 L2 AC COM AC COM Commons connected internally. SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 AC COM Discrete Input and Output Modules 17 AC Output Modules (1746-OA8, -OA16, -OAP12) Specification Catalog Number 1746-OA8(1) Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane 5V dc Current Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.)(Resistive Load) Off-State Leakage(3) (max.) Load Current (min.) Continuous Per Point(4) Current (max.) Per Module On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Surge Current per Point(5) (max.) 1746-OA16(1) (RTB) 1746-OAP12(1)(2) (RTB) 16 8 0.370A 0.0A 12 6 0.370A 0.0A 10 mA 1.0A at 30°C 0.50A at 60°C 0.50A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8.0A at 30°C 4.0A at 60°C 1.50V at 1A 10.0A for 25 ms 8.0A at 30°C 4.0A at 60°C 1.50V at 0.50A 10.0A for 25 ms 2.0A at 30°C 1.25A at 55°C 1.0A at 60°C 9.0A at 30°C 6.0A at 60°C 1.2V at 2.0A per point - 17.0A for 25 ms per common - 35.0A for 10 ms 120/240V ac 85 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz 8 4 0.185A 0.0A on = 1 ms off =11 ms 2 mA (1) Triac outputs turn on at any point in the ac line cycle and turn off at ac line zero cross. (2) A fused common and blown fuse LED are provided on this module. (Fuses are designed to protect the module.) For replacement fuse, use catalog number 1746-F9 or SAN-O HQ 6.3A. (3) To limit the effects of leakage current through triac outputs, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For typical 120V ac applications, use a 15k ohm, 2W resistor. For typical 240V ac applications, use a 15k ohm, 5W resistor. (4) Recommended surge suppression for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads is Harris MOV part number V220MA2A. See page 6 for more information on surge suppression. (5) Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 85V ac 0V ac Operation Not Guaranteed 265V ac Recommended Operating Range (Voltage is applied between L1 and L2.) Important: ,I\RXPHDVXUHWKHYROWDJHDWDQRXWSXWWHUPLQDOWKDWLVQRW FRQQHFWHGWRDORDGRULVFRQQHFWHGWRDKLJKLPSHGDQFHORDG \RXPD\PHDVXUHDVPXFKDV9DFHYHQWKRXJKWKHRXWSXWLV RII Publication 1746-2.35 18 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagrams 1746-OA8, OA16 1746-OAP12 L1 VAC OUT OUT OUT OUT Wiring Diagrams 1746-OA8 100-240V ac TRIAC OUTPUT 1746-OA16 100-240V ac TRIAC OUTPUT L1 VAC 1 VAC 1 L1 OUT 3 2 OUT 3 3 OUT 4 100-240V ac CR CR CR L2 CR 4 OUT 5 CR OUT 1 OUT 2 0 1 OUT 2 100-240V ac OUT 0 OUT0 OUT 1 5 OUT 6 CR 6 OUT 7 7 L2 VAC 2 L1 VAC 2 OUT 9 13 OUT 10 100-240V ac OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 10 OUT 11 OUT 4 CR CR CR CR L2 L1 11 OUT 8 100-240V ac 12 OUT 13 15 OUT 12 OUT 15 CR 14 17 OUT 14 CR 16 SLC L2 PLC 1746-OAP12 100-240V ac HIGH CURRENT TRIAC OUTPUT Commons connected internally. VAC 1 L1 VAC 1 OUT 1 1 CR 100-240V ac CR OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 0 0 3 OUT 2 2 5 OUT 4 NOT USED 4 CR NOT USED L2 L2 OUT 7 CR CR SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 7 OUT 6 6 11 OUT 8 10 OUT 11 13 OUT 10 12 VAC 2 VAC 2 OUT 9 100-240V ac CR Commons connected internally. L1 Discrete Input and Output Modules 19 Sinking DC Input Modules (1746-IB8, -IB16, -ITB16, -IB32) Specification Catalog Number 1746-IB8 1746-IB16 (RTB) Voltage Category Operating Voltage 24V dc sink 10 to 30V dc sink Number of Inputs Points per Common Backplane 5V dc Current Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) 8 8 0.050A 0.0A on = 8 ms off = 8 ms 16 16 0.085A 0.0A on = 8 ms off = 8 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) Off-State Current (max.) Nominal Input Current 5V dc 1 mA 8 mA at 24V dc 5V dc 1 mA 1746-ITB16 (RTB) (Fast Response) 1746-IB32(1) 15 to 30V dc at 50°C sink 15 to 26.4V dc at 60°C sink 32 8 0.050A 0.0A on = 3 ms off = 3 ms 16 16 0.085A 0.0A on = 0.3 ms(2) off = 0.5 ms 5V dc 1.5 mA 5V dc 1.6 mA (1) Series A, B, and C 32-point input modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. Series D 32-point input modules are not fused. (2) Typical signal delay for these modules: on = 0.10 ms, off = 0.25 ms at 24V dc. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN ± 0V dc 5V dc 10V dc IB8, IB16, ITB16 0V dc 0V dc 5V dc 5V dc 15V dc 15V dc IB32 30V dc 30V dc at 50°C 26.4V dc at 60°C On State Off State COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Input State Not Guaranteed Publication 1746-2.35 20 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagrams 1746-ITB16 1746-IB8, IB16 2.8K IN 560 0.1µF 2.8K IN 3K IN 560 DC COM 560 0.1µF 560 3K IN 0.1µF 0.1µF DC COM 1746-IB32 4.3K IN 0.1µF 560 0.1µF 560 4.3K IN COM Wiring Diagrams 1746-IB16, ITB16 24V dc SINKING 1746-IB8 24V dc SINKING +DC IN 0 IN 2 IN 4 +DC 1 IN 1 2 IN 3 3 IN 2 4 IN 5 5 IN 6 24V dc IN 3 6 IN 7 7 6 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 24V dc IN 8 12 IN 11 IN 12 IN 4 IN 5 13 IN 6 14 IN 13 IN 14 –DC IN 0 0 IN 1 15 IN 7 16 IN 15 17 DC COM DC COM –DC DC COM DC COM Commons connected internally. Publication 1746-2.35 SLC PLC Commons connected internally. Discrete Input and Output Modules 21 1746-IB32 24V dc SINKING DC Com1 Wire Group 3 Wire Group 1 DC Com1 COM 1 COM 3 COM 1 COM 3 IN0 +VDC 1 IN1 IN2 0 1 IN18 2 IN3 2 IN19 3 IN4 3 IN20 4 IN5 4 IN21 5 IN6 5 IN22 6 IN7 6 IN23 7 IN8 7 IN24 10 IN9 10 IN25 11 IN10 11 IN26 12 IN11 12 IN27 13 IN12 13 IN28 14 IN13 14 IN29 15 IN14 15 IN30 16 IN15 DC Com2 Wire Group 2 16 IN31 17 DC Com2 +VDC 3 IN17 1 +VDC 2 DC Com3 IN16 0 Connector Key DC Com3 +VDC 4 17 COM 2 COM 4 COM 2 COM 4 DC Com4 Wire Group 4 DC Com4 SLC PLC Important: 7KHGFFRPSLQVRQWKH,%LQSXWPRGXOHDUHLVRODWHG EHWZHHQWKHIRXUJURXSVDQGWKHWZRFRPSLQVLQHDFKJURXSDUH FRQQHFWHGLQWHUQDOO\8VHDWHUPLQDOEORFNWRPDLQWDLQJURXS LVRODWLRQSURYLGHGE\SRLQW,2PRGXOHV&RQVXOW GRFXPHQWDWLRQRU\RXU$OOHQ%UDGOH\6DOHV2IILFHIRUDGGLWLRQDO LQIRUPDWLRQ 7KHSRLQWPRGXOHVLQFOXGHDNH\HGSLQIHPDOH FRQQHFWRUDQGFULPSW\SHSLQVIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR,2ZLULQJ,Q DGGLWLRQSUHZLUHGFDEOHVDQGLQWHUIDFHPRGXOHVFDQEHXVHG IRUFRQQHFWLQJH[WHUQDO,26HHSDJHVDQG 7KHPD[LPXPXVHUFDEOHOHQJWKLVGHSHQGHQWRQKRZPXFK YROWDJHGURS>FXUUHQW[RKPVIW[IHHW@WKHXVHU·VV\VWHPFDQ WROHUDWH7KHXVHU·VV\VWHPVKRXOGWDNHLQWRDFFRXQWWKHPLQLPXP WXUQRQYROWDJHUHTXLUHGE\H[WHUQDOORDGVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH SRLQWRXWSXWPRGXOHVDQGDOORIWKHYROWDJHGURSVDVVRFLDWHG ZLWKZLULQJWRDQGIURPWKHORDGWHUPLQDOEORFNVSRZHUVRXUFHV DQGWKHPRGXOHLWVHOI Publication 1746-2.35 22 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sinking DC Input Modules (1746-IC16, -IH16) Specification Catalog Number 1746-IC16 (RTB) Catalog Number 1746-IH16(1) (RTB) Voltage Category 48V dc sink 125V dc sink Operating Voltage 30 to 60V dc at 55°C sink 30 to 55V dc at 60°C sink 90 to 146V dc sink Max. Points on Simultaneously: 16 at 146V dc and 30°C 12 at 146V dc and 50°C 14 at 132V dc and 55°C 16 at 125V dc and 60°C Number of Inputs 16 16 Points per Common 16 16 5V dc 0.085A 0.085A 24V dc 0.0A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) on = 4 ms / off = 4 ms on = 9 ms / off = 9 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 10V dc 20V dc Off-State Current (max.) 1.5 mA 0.8 mA Nominal Input Current 4.1 mA at 48V dc 2.15 mA at 125V dc / 2.25 mA at 132V dc Backplane Current Draw (1) If the input module is connected in parallel with an inductive load, use surge suppression across the load to protect the input module from damage caused by reverse voltage. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) 0V dc 0V dc 10V dc 10V dc 30V dc 30V dc IC16 0V dc 20V dc 90V dc IH16 Input State Not Guaranteed ± Off State COM 55V dc at 60°C 60V dc at 55°C 146V dc On State (See table for max. number of points allowed on simultaneously.) Circuit and Wiring Diagrams 110K IN 51K 0.22µF 4.7K 1746-IC16 48V dc SINKING 1746-IH16 1746-IH16 125V dc SINKING +DC ZD CRD IN 0 IN 2 IN 4 110K IN 48V dc (IC16) 51K 0.22µF 4.7K 125V dc (IH16) 0 IN 1 1 2 IN 3 3 4 IN 5 5 6 IN 7 7 6 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 IN 6 IN 8 12 IN 11 ZD IN 12 CRD 13 14 IN 13 15 16 IN 15 17 DC COM DC COM IN 14 DC COM –DC IN 1746-IC16 11.2K Commons connected internally. 0.1µF DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 560 SLC PLC Discrete Input and Output Modules 23 Sourcing DC Input Modules (1746-IV8, -IV16, -ITV16, -IV32) Specification Catalog Number 1746-IV8 1746-IV16 (RTB) 1746-ITV16 (Fast Response) (RTB) Voltage Category Operating Voltage 24V dc source 10 to 30V dc source Number of Inputs Points per Common Backplane 5V dc Current Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) 8 8 0.050A 0.0A on = 8 ms / off = 8 ms 16 16 0.085A 0.0A 16 16 0.085A 0.0A Off-State Voltage (max.) Off-State Current (max.) Nominal Input Current 5.0V dc 1 mA 8 mA at 24V dc 5.0V dc 1 mA on = 0.3 ms / off = 0.5 ms(2) 5.0V dc 1.5 mA 1746-IV32(1) 15 to 30V dc at 50°C source 15 to 26.4V dc at 60°C source 32 8 0.050A 0.0A on = 3 ms / off = 3 ms 5.0V dc 1.6 mA (1) Series A, B, and C 32-point input modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. Series D 32-point input modules are not fused. (2) Typical signal delay for these modules: on = 0.100 ms, off = 0.25 ms for 24V dc. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN ± 0V dc 5V dc 10V dc 0V dc 0V dc 5V dc 5V dc 15V dc 15V dc Off State COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) IV8, IV16, ITV16 IV32 30V dc 30V dc at 50°C 26.4V dc at 60°C On State Input State Not Guaranteed Publication 1746-2.35 24 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagrams 1746-IV8, IV16 1746-ITV16 VDC VDC 560 0.1µF 560 0.1µF 2.8K 3K IN IN 560 0.1µF 560 0.1µF 2.8K 3K IN IN 1746-IV32 VDC 0.1µF 560 0.1µF 560 4.3K IN 4.3K IN Wiring Diagrams 1746-IV8 24V dc SOURCING 1746-IV16, ITV16 24V dc SOURCING –DC –DC IN 0 IN 0 IN 3 IN 3 1 3 IN 6 6 IN 7 10 IN 9 24V dc IN 8 IN 10 IN 5 IN 12 IN 6 +DC 5 7 11 12 IN 11 13 14 IN 13 IN 14 IN 7 VDC 2 4 IN 5 IN 4 +DC IN 1 IN 4 IN 2 24V dc 0 IN 2 IN 1 15 16 IN 15 17 VDC VDC VDC connected internally. VDC VDC connected internally. SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 25 1746-IV32 24V dc SOURCING +VDC 1 Wire Group 3 Wire Group 1 VDC 1 +VDC 1 VDC 1 IN16 0 1 1 IN18 IN2 2 2 IN19 IN3 3 3 IN20 IN4 4 4 IN21 IN5 5 5 IN22 IN6 6 6 IN23 IN7 7 7 IN24 IN8 10 10 IN25 IN9 11 11 IN26 IN10 12 12 IN27 IN11 13 13 IN28 IN12 14 14 IN29 IN13 15 15 IN30 IN14 16 IN15 DC Com2 16 IN31 17 +VDC 2 DC Com3 0 IN17 IN1 Connector Key +VDC 3 VDC 3 IN0 DC Com1 +VDC 3 VDC 3 DC Com4 17 VDC 2 VDC 4 VDC 2 VDC 4 +VDC 4 +VDC 2 +VDC 4 Wire Group 2 Wire Group 4 SLC PLC Important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·VV\VWHPFDQ WROHUDWH7KHXVHU·VV\VWHPVKRXOGWDNHLQWRDFFRXQWWKHPLQLPXP WXUQRQYROWDJHUHTXLUHGE\H[WHUQDOORDGVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH SRLQWRXWSXWPRGXOHVDQGDOORIWKHYROWDJHGURSVDVVRFLDWHG ZLWKZLULQJWRDQGIURPWKHORDGWHUPLQDOEORFNVSRZHUVRXUFHV DQGWKHPRGXOHLWVHOI Publication 1746-2.35 26 Discrete Input and Output Modules 845D Absolute Gray Code Encoder to 1746-ITV16 0 2 Function Connector Pin Catalog Number 845D-NXC7914-2 Absolute Gray Code Encoder 0-359 (excess 76) Open Collector Output, 24V dc OUTPUTS A B C D E F G H J MSB9 Not Used 24V dc Filtered B+ Return, Signal Common Not Used L U V T S 1RWH Publication 1746-2.35 XSG0 LSB XSG1 XSG2 XSG3 XSG4 XSG5 XSG6 XSG7 XSG8 MSB 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 VDC VDC 1746-ITV16 +VDC –DC COM External Power Supply 7HUPLQDOVDQGFDQEHLQWHUFKDQJHGWRVHOHFW&:YV&&: GLUHFWLRQ5HIHUWR\RXUHQFRGHULQVWDOODWLRQPDQXDOIRUUHFRPPHQGHG FDEOHW\SHDQGOHQJWK Discrete Input and Output Modules 27 Sourcing TTL Input Module (1746-IG16) Specification Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Inputs Points per Common Backplane Current Draw 5V dc 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) Catalog Number 1746-IG16 (RTB) 5V dc TTL source 4.5 to 5.5V dc source 50 mV peak-to-peak ripple max. 16 16 0.140A 0.0A on = 0.25 ms off = 0.50 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 2.0V dc(1) 4.1 mA 3.7 mA at 5V dc Off-State Current (max.) Nominal Input Current (1) TTL inputs are inverted (-0.2 to +0.8 = low voltage = True = on). Use a NOT instruction in your program to convert to traditional True = High logic. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + –0.2V dc IN On State – 2V dc 0.8V dc 5.5V dc Input State Not Guaranteed Off State TTL inputs are inverted (-0.2 to +0.8 = low voltage = True = On.) COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Circuit and Wiring Diagrams +5DC 1746-IG16 TTL INPUT (Low = True) 1.5K 1K 74HCT14 IN 560 +DC +5 DC IN 0 0 IN 1 1 IN 2 2 IN 3 3 IN 4 5 IN 6 7 IN 8 IN 5 4 6 IN 7 +5V dc IN 9 11 IN 11 13 IN 13 1.5K 1K IN 74HCT14 15 IN 15 560 10 IN 10 12 IN 12 14 IN 14 16 17 DC COM ±DC DC COM SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 28 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sourcing DC Output Modules (1746-OB8, -OB16, -OB32) Specification Catalog Number 1746-OB8 Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane Current 5V dc Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) Off-State Leakage(2) (max.) Load Current (min.) Continuous Current (max.) Per Point(3) Per Module On-State Voltage Drop (max.) (5) Surge Current (max.) 24V dc 10 to 50V dc source 8 8 0.135A 0.0A on = 0.1 ms off = 1.0 ms 1 mA 1746-OB16 (RTB) 1746-OB32 Series D(1) 16 16 0.280A 0.0A on = 0.1 ms off = 1.0 ms 5 to 50V dc source 32 16 0.190A 0.0A on = 0.1 ms off = 1.0 ms 1 mA 1A at 30°C 0.50A at 60°C 8A at 30°C 4A at 60°C 0.50A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8A at 30°C 4A at 60°C 1.2V at 1.0A 3A for 10 ms 1.2V at 0.5A 3A for 10 ms 0.5A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8A at 0 to 60°C 4A at 0 to 60°C per common(4) 2A at 0 to 60°C per common pin 1.2V at 0.5A 1A for 10 ms (1) Series A, B, and C 32-point output modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. Series D modules are not fused and have a higher current rating than Series A, B, and C. (2) To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, ½W resistor. (3) Recommended surge suppression for switching 24V dc inductive loads is a 1N4004 diode that is reverse wired across the load. See page 6 for more information on surge suppression. (4) To attain the maximum Continuous Current per common rating of 4A for an OB32 Series D module, both V dc connections in a wire group must be connected to your DC source. (5) Repeatability is once every second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 0V dc 10V dc OB8, OB16 50V dc 0V dc 5V dc OB32 50V dc Operation Not Guaranteed (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Publication 1746-2.35 Recommended Operating Range Discrete Input and Output Modules 29 Circuit Diagrams 1746-OB8, OB16 1746-OB32 VDC VDC 18K OUT OUT 8.2K 1K OUT 18K OUT DC COM 8.2K COM Wiring Diagrams 1746-OB8 10-50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT SOURCING 1746-OB16 10-50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SOURCING +DC VDC VDC +DC OUT 0 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 1 OUT 0 2 OUT 3 OUT 1 CR OUT 2 10–50V dc OUT 3 OUT 4 CR 10–50V dc 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 4 OUT 5 6 OUT 7 OUT 9 CR 10 11 OUT 10 CR 12 OUT 11 13 OUT 12 OUT 5 CR CR OUT 6 CR DC COM 14 OUT 13 15 OUT 14 16 OUT 15 CR OUT 7 CR CR CR CR 17 DC COM –DC –DC SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 30 Discrete Input and Output Modules 1746-OB32 5-50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SOURCING Wire Group 2 Wire Group 1 +VDC 1 +VDC 1 VDC 1 VDC 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 OUT0 CR +VDC 2 OUT16 0 0 1 1 OUT18 OUT2 CR 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 OUT6 5 OUT22 6 OUT7 CR CR 6 OUT23 7 OUT8 7 OUT24 10 OUT9 10 OUT25 11 OUT10 11 OUT26 12 OUT11 CR 12 13 CR CR 13 CR OUT28 14 OUT13 14 OUT29 15 OUT14 15 OUT30 16 OUT15 16 OUT31 17 DC Com1 CR OUT27 OUT12 DC Com1 CR OUT21 OUT5 Connector Key CR OUT20 OUT4 CR CR OUT19 OUT3 CR CR OUT17 OUT1 CR +VDC 2 17 COM 1 COM 2 COM 1 COM 2 DC Com2 DC Com2 SLC PLC Important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·VV\VWHPFDQWROHUDWH7KHXVHU·VV\VWHPVKRXOGWDNHLQWR DFFRXQWWKHPLQLPXPWXUQRQYROWDJHUHTXLUHGE\H[WHUQDOORDGVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH SRLQWRXWSXWPRGXOHVDQGDOORIWKHYROWDJHGURSVDVVRFLDWHGZLWKZLULQJWRDQG IURPWKHORDGWHUPLQDOEORFNVSRZHUVRXUFHVDQGWKHPRGXOHLWVHOI Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 31 Electronically Protected Sourcing DC Output Modules (1746-OB6EI, -OB16E, -OB32E) Specification Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane Current Draw 5V dc 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load)(1) Off-State Leakage(2) (max.) Load Current (min.) Continuous Current (max.) Per Point Catalog Number 1746-OB6EI (RTB) 24V dc 10 to 30V dc source 6 Individually Isolated 0.046A 0.0A on = 1.0 ms off = 2.0 ms 1 mA 1 mA 2.0A at 0 to 60°C 1746-OB16E (RTB) 1746-OB32E 16 16 0.135A 0.0A on = 1.0 ms off = 1.0 ms 32 16 0.190A 0.0A on = 1.0 ms off = 2.0 ms 1.00A at 30°C 0.50A at 60°C 8A at 0 to 60°C 0.50A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C Per Module 12.0A at 0 to 60°C 8A at 0 to 60°C 4A at 0 to 60°C per common(3) 2A at 0 to 60°C per common pin On-State Voltage Drop (max.) 1.0V at 2A 1.0V at 0.5A 1.2V at 0.5A (4) Per Point 4.0A for 10 ms 2A for 10 ms 1.0A for 10 ms Surge Current (max.) Per Module 24.0A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms Electronic Protection yes - See page 10 for more information on the electronically protected modules. (1) Fast turn-off modules (1746-OB6EI, -OBP8 Series B and later, -OB16E Series B and later, -OBP16, and -OVP16) provide fast OFF delay for inductive loads. Fast turn-off delay for inductive loads is accomplished with surge suppressors on this module. A suppressor at the load is not needed unless another contact is connected in series. If this is the case, a 1N4004 diode should be reverse wired across the load. This defeats the fast turn-off feature. Comparative OFF delay times for 1746-OB8/-OV8 and fast turn-off modules, when switching Bulletin 100-B110 (24W sealed) contactor, are: 1746-OB8/-OV8 OFF delay = 152 ms; fast turn-off modules OFF delay = 47 ms. (2) To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, ½W resistor. (3) To attain the maximum Continuous Current per common rating of 4A for an OB32 Series D module, both V dc connections in a wire group must be connected to your DC source. (4) Repeatability is once every second at 30°C. Repeatability in once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) 0V dc 10V dc Operation Not Guaranteed 1746-OB6EI 1746-OB16E 1746-OB32E 30V dc Recommended Operating Range Publication 1746-2.35 32 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagrams 1746-OB6EI VDC IN OUT OUT COM 1746-OB16E VDC 0.1µF 6.2KΩ 2.4KΩ 0.1µF 0.1µF 100PF 0.1µF Logic and Protection Circuit 2.4KΩ OUT IN1 100pF IN2 6.2KΩ ST 1/2 6.2KΩ OUT 150µF DC COM 0.22µF 1KΩ 2.4KΩ Publication 1746-2.35 0.1µF Discrete Input and Output Modules 33 1746-OB32E 4.3K VDC IN1 OUT1 OUT IN2 OUT2 OUT IN3 OUT3 OUT IN4 OUT4 OUT 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K DC COM Wiring Diagrams 1746-OB6EI 10-30V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SOURCING CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ISOLATED 1746-OB16E 10-30V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SOURCING +DC 10-30V dc CR VDC 3 +DC CR DC COM 3 +DC VDC 5 10-30V dc -DC +DC OUT 0 10-30V dc DC COM 0 -DC VDC 2 +DC OUT 2 DC COM 2 VDC 4 CR OUT 5 DC COM 5 0 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 2 OUT 3 CR 10–30V dc CR 10-30V dc -DC CR CR CR 12 14 OUT 13 15 OUT 14 16 OUT 15 +DC 10-30V dc 10 11 OUT 10 13 OUT 12 CR DC COM 4 6 OUT 7 OUT 11 -DC OUT 4 4 OUT 5 OUT 9 OUT 3 -DC OUT 0 OUT 1 VDC 0 OUT 1 DC COM 1 -DC 10-30V dc VDC VDC 1 +DC CR CR 17 DC COM –DC SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 34 Discrete Input and Output Modules 1746-OB32E 10-30V dc ELECTRONICALLY PROTECTED, SOURCING Wire Group 2 Wire Group 1 +VDC 1 +VDC 1 VDC 1 VDC 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 OUT0 CR +VDC 2 OUT16 0 0 1 1 OUT18 OUT2 CR 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 OUT6 5 OUT22 6 OUT7 CR CR 6 OUT23 7 OUT8 7 OUT24 10 OUT9 10 OUT25 11 OUT10 11 OUT26 12 OUT11 CR 12 13 CR CR 13 CR OUT28 14 OUT13 14 OUT29 15 OUT14 15 OUT30 16 OUT15 16 OUT31 17 DC Com1 CR OUT27 OUT12 DC Com1 CR OUT21 OUT5 Connector Key CR OUT20 OUT4 CR CR OUT19 OUT3 CR CR OUT17 OUT1 CR +VDC 2 17 COM 1 COM 2 COM 1 COM 2 DC Com2 DC Com2 SLC PLC Important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·VV\VWHPFDQWROHUDWH7KHXVHU·VV\VWHPVKRXOGWDNHLQWR DFFRXQWWKHPLQLPXPWXUQRQYROWDJHUHTXLUHGE\H[WHUQDOORDGVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH SRLQWRXWSXWPRGXOHVDQGDOORIWKHYROWDJHGURSVDVVRFLDWHGZLWKZLULQJWRDQG IURPWKHORDGWHUPLQDOEORFNVSRZHUVRXUFHVDQGWKHPRGXOHLWVHOI Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 35 High Current Sourcing DC Output Modules (1746-OBP8, -OBP16) Specification Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane Current Draw Catalog Number 1746-OBP8 (RTB) 5V dc 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load)(2) 1746-OBP16 (RTB)(1) 24V dc 20.4 to 26.4V dc source 8 16 4 16 0.135A 0.250A 0.0A 0.0A on = 1.0 ms / off = 2.0 ms Off-State Leakage(3) (max.) Load Current (min.) Continuous Current (max.) Per Point 1 mA Per Module On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Per Point Surge Current(4) (max.) Per Module 8.0A at 0° to 60°C 1V at 2A 4A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms 1 mA 2.0A at 60°C 1.5A at 30°C 1.0A at 60°C 6.4A at 0° to 60°C 1V at 2A 4A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms (1) A fused common and blown fuse LED are provided on this module. For replacement fuse, use catalog number 1746-F8 of Littlefuse 322010. See page 8 for additional information. (2) Fast turn-off modules (1746-OB6EI, -OBP8 Series B and later, -OB16E Series B and later, -OBP16, and -OVP16) provide fast OFF delay for inductive loads. Fast turn-off delay for inductive loads is accomplished with surge suppressors on this module. A suppressor at the load is not needed unless another contact is connected in series. If this is the case, a 1N4004 diode should be reverse wired across the load. This defeats the fast turn-off feature. Comparative OFF delay times for 1746-OB8/ -OV8 and fast turn-off modules, when switching Bulletin 100-B110 (24W sealed) contactor, are: 1746-OB8/-OV8 OFF delay = 152 ms; fast turn-off modules OFF delay = 47 ms. (3) To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, ½W resistor. (4) Repeatability is once every second at 30°C. Repeatability in once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 0V dc (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) 20.4V dc Operation Not Guaranteed OBP8, OBP16 26.4V dc Recommended Operating Range Publication 1746-2.35 36 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit and Wiring Diagrams VDC 1746-OBP8 20.4-26.4V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SOURCING 6.19K +DC VDC1 S 8.87K OUT 0 G CR OUT 1 CR OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT X D 20.4–26.4 V dc DC COM1 NC NC NC -DC NC NC S NC VDC2 +DC G OUT 4 OUT Y D 20.4–26.4 V dc CR OUT 5 CR OUT 7 OUT 6 DC COM2 –DC COM VDC 6.19K 1746-OBP16 20.4-26.4V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SOURCING S G OUT D 8.87K +DC VDC OUT 0 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 1 2 OUT 3 CR 20.4–26.4V dc CR OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 4 6 OUT 7 OUT 9 6.19K 3 OUT 5 10 11 OUT 10 CR 12 OUT 11 S 13 OUT 12 G D CR OUT 14 OUT 13 15 OUT 14 16 OUT 15 8.87K CR CR CR CR 17 DC COM –DC SLC PLC FLASH Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 37 Sinking DC Output Modules (1746-OV8, -OV16, -OV32) Specification Catalog Number 1746-OV8 Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane 5V dc Current Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) 24V dc 10 to 50V dc sink 8 8 0.135A 0.0A on = 0.1 ms / off = 1.0 ms Off-State Leakage(2) (max.) Load Current (min.) Continuous Per Point(4) (3) (max.) Current Per Module 1 mA On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Surge Current Per Point (6) (max.) 1746-OV16 (RTB) 1746-OV32 Series D(1) 5 to 50V dc sink 32 16 0.190A 0.0A 16 16 0.270A 0.0A 1 mA 1A at 30°C 0.5A at 60°C 8A at 30°C 4A at 60°C 0.5A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8A at 30°C 4A at 60°C 1.2V at 1A 3A for 10 ms 1.2V at 0.5A 3A for 10 ms 0.5A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8.0A at 0°C to 60°C 4A at 0 to 60°C per common(5) 2A at 0 to 60°C per common pin 1.2V at 0.5A 1A for 10 ms (1) Series A, B, and C 32-point output modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. Series D modules are not fused and have a higher current rating than Series A, B, and C. (2) To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, ½W resistor. (3) To attain the maximum Continuous Current per common of 4A for an OV32 Series D module, both dc com connections in a wire group must be connected to your DC source. (4) Recommended surge suppression for switching 24V dc inductive loads is a 1N4004 diode that is reverse wired across the load. See page 6 for more information on surge suppression. (5) To attain the maximum Continuous Current per common rating of 4A for an OV32 Series D module, both V dc connections in a wire group must be connected to your DC source. (6) Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 0V dc 10V dc OV8, OV16 50V dc 0V dc 5V dc OV32 50V dc Operation Not Guaranteed Recommended Operating Range (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Publication 1746-2.35 38 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagrams 1746-OV8, OV16 1746-OV32 VDC VDC 8.2K OUT OUT 18K OUT DC COM 8.2K OUT COM 18K Wiring Diagrams 1746-OV8 10-50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT SINKING VDC 1746-OV16 10-50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SINKING +DC VDC +DC OUT 0 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 3 CR OUT 2 OUT 3 10–50V dc 10–50V dc OUT 4 CR OUT 5 CR OUT 6 OUT 7 DC COM 0 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 2 4 OUT 5 OUT 7 CR 6 CR 10 OUT 9 11 OUT 10 12 OUT 11 13 OUT 12 15 OUT 14 14 OUT 13 CR CR CR CR –DC –DC OUT 15 17 16 CR CR CR DC COM SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 39 1746-OV32 5-50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SINKING Wire Group 2 Wire Group 1 +VDC 1 VDC 1 VDC 1 +VDC 1 CR +VDC 2 VDC 2 OUT0 OUT16 0 0 OUT17 OUT1 CR 1 1 2 2 OUT19 OUT3 CR 3 OUT4 3 4 5 OUT22 6 6 OUT23 OUT7 7 7 OUT24 OUT8 10 OUT9 10 OUT25 11 CR CR OUT10 11 CR CR OUT26 12 OUT11 12 OUT27 13 13 CR CR OUT28 OUT12 14 OUT13 14 OUT29 15 OUT14 15 OUT30 16 OUT15 16 OUT31 17 DC Com1 CR 4 5 CR CR OUT21 OUT6 Connector Key CR OUT20 OUT5 CR CR OUT18 OUT2 CR +VDC 2 VDC 2 17 COM 1 COM 2 COM 1 COM 2 DC Com2 DC Com2 DC Com1 SLC PLC Important: 7KH9GFDQGGF&RPSLQVRQWKH29RXWSXWPRGXOHDUHLVRODWHG EHWZHHQWKHWZRJURXSVDQGWKHWZR9GFDQGWZRGF&RPSLQVLQHDFKJURXS DUHFRQQHFWHGLQWHUQDOO\%RWKGFFRPSLQVRQWKH29PXVWEH FRQQHFWHGWRWKHGFSRZHUVRXUFHLIFXUUHQWIRUDFRPPRQJURXSLVH[SHFWHG WRH[FHHG$PSV8VHDWHUPLQDOEORFNWRPDLQWDLQJURXSLVRODWLRQ SURYLGHGE\SRLQW,2PRGXOHV&RQVXOWGRFXPHQWDWLRQRU\RXU $OOHQ%UDGOH\6DOHV2IILFHIRUDGGLWLRQDOLQIRUPDWLRQ 7KHSRLQWPRGXOHVLQFOXGHDNH\HGSLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUDQG FULPSW\SHSLQVIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR,2ZLULQJ,QDGGLWLRQSUHZLUHG FDEOHVDQGLQWHUIDFHPRGXOHVFDQEHXVHGIRUFRQQHFWLQJH[WHUQDO,26HH SDJHVDQG 7KHPD[LPXPXVHUFDEOHOHQJWKLVGHSHQGHQWRQKRZPXFKYROWDJHGURS >FXUUHQW[RKPVIW[IHHW@WKHXVHU·VV\VWHPFDQWROHUDWH7KHXVHU·VV\VWHP VKRXOGWDNHLQWRDFFRXQWWKHPLQLPXPWXUQRQYROWDJHUHTXLUHGE\H[WHUQDO ORDGVFRQQHFWHGWRWKHSRLQWRXWSXWPRGXOHVDQGDOORIWKHYROWDJHGURSV DVVRFLDWHGZLWKZLULQJWRDQGIURPWKHORDGWHUPLQDOEORFNVSRZHUVRXUFHV DQGWKHPRGXOHLWVHOI Publication 1746-2.35 40 Discrete Input and Output Modules High Current Sinking DC Output Module (1746-OVP16) Specification Catalog Number Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane Current Draw 1746-OVP16 (1) (2)(RTB) 24V dc 20.4 to 26.4V dc sink 16 16 0.25A 0.0A on = 0.1 ms / off = 1 ms 1 mA 5V dc 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) Off-State Leakage(3) (max.) Load Current (min.) 1 mA 1.5A at 30°C / 1A at 60°C 6.4A at 0°C to 60°C 1V at 1A 4A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms Per Point Per Module Continuous Current (max.) On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Per Point Per Module Surge Current(4) (max.) (1) A fused common and blown fuse LED are provided on this module. (2) Fast turn-off modules (1746-OB6EI, -OBP8 Series B and later, -OB16E Series B and later, -OBP16, and -OVP16) provide fast OFF delay for inductive loads. Fast turn-off delay for inductive loads is accomplished with surge suppressors on this module. A suppressor at the load is not needed unless another contact is connected in series. If this is the case, a 1N4004 diode should be reverse wired across the load. This defeats the fast turn-off feature. Comparative OFF delay times for 1746-OB8/-OV8 and fast turn-off modules, when switching Bulletin 100-B110 (24W sealed) contactor, are: 1746-OB8/-OV8 OFF delay = 152 ms; fast turn-off modules OFF delay = 47 ms. (3) To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, ½W resistor. (4) Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 0V dc (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) 20.4V dc Recommended 26.4V dc Operating Range Operation Not Guaranteed Circuit and Wiring Diagrams 1746-OVP16 20.4-26.4V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT, SINKING VDC +DC VDC OUT 0 8.87K D G 6.19K 0 OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 2 OUT 3 S CR 20.4-26.4V dc 4 OUT 5 OUT 7 CR 6 CR 10 OUT 9 11 OUT 10 12 OUT 11 13 OUT 12 15 OUT 14 14 OUT 13 CR 8.87K D G OUT CR ±DC 6.19K S 17 16 CR CR DC COM SLC PLC DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 OUT 15 CR Discrete Input and Output Modules 41 Sinking TTL Output Module (1746-OG16) Specification Catalog Number 1746-OG16 (RTB) Voltage Category 5V dc TTL(1) Operating Voltage Range 4.5 to 5.5V dc 50 mV peak-to-peak ripple maximum 495 mA maximum at 5V dc Number of Outputs 16 Points per Common 16 Backplane Current 5V dc 0.180A Draw 24V dc 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) on = 0.25 ms / off = 0.5 ms Off-State Leakage (max.) 0.1 mA Load Current (min.) 0.15 mA 24 mA Continuous Current (max.) (1) TTL outputs are inverted (0-0.4V dc = low voltage = True = On). Use a NOT instruction in your ladder program to convert to traditional True = High logic. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) OUT 0V dc 4.5V dc 0.4V dc On State 5.5V dc Operation Not Guaranteed – Off State TTL inputs are inverted (0-0.4 V dc = low voltage = true = On). COM Circuit and Wiring Diagrams +5DC 1746-OG16 TTL OUTPUT (Low = True) 74AC14 +DC VDC OUT L OUT 0 +5V dc L OUT 1 L OUT 3 L OUT 5 L OUT 7 L OUT 9 L OUT 11 L OUT 13 74AC14 L OUT –DC 0 1 OUT 2 L 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 L 4 L 6 L 10 11 OUT 10 12 13 OUT 12 14 15 OUT 14 OUT 15 16 L L L 17 DC COM SLC PLC DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 42 Discrete Input and Output Modules AC/DC Input Module (1746-IN16) Specification Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Inputs Points per Common Backplane Current Draw 5V dc 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) Off-State Voltage (max.) Off-State Current (max.) Nominal Input Current Inrush Current (max.) Catalog Number 1746-IN16 (RTB) 24V ac/dc 10 to 30V dc sink 10 to 30V ac at 47 to 63 Hz 16 16 0.085A 0.0A dc: on = 15 ms / off = 15 ms ac: on = 25 ms / off = 25 ms 3V dc 3V ac 1 mA dc 1 mA ac 8 mA at 24V dc 8 mA at 24V ac 0.02A (ac only) RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range 0V ac 0V dc (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) 3V ac 3V dc 10V ac 10V dc 30V ac 30V dc + IN Off State – Input State Not Guaranteed On State COM Circuit and Wiring Diagrams L1 or +DC AC/DC COM 1746-IN16 24V ac/dc SINKING IN 0 1µF IN 270 261 0 IN 1 2 IN 3 4 IN 5 1 IN 2 1870 3 IN 4 V ac/dc 5 IN 6 6 IN 7 7 IN 8 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 12 IN 11 13 IN 12 14 IN 13 1µF IN 270 1870 15 IN 14 261 16 IN 15 L2 or –DC AC/DC COM 17 AC/DC COM Commons connected internally. Publication 1746-2.35 SLC PLC Discrete Input and Output Modules 43 AC/DC Relay Output Modules (1746-OW4, -OW8, -OW16, -OX8) Specification Catalog Number 1746-OW4 Voltage Category Operating Voltage Number of Outputs Points per Common Backplane Current 5V dc Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) Off-State Leakage (max.) Load Current (min.) Continuous Current per Point(1) (max.) Continuous Current per Module (max.) Current per Common (max.) 1746-OW8 1746-OW16 (RTB) ac/dc Relay 5 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz / 5 to 125V dc 4 8 16 4 4 8 0.045A 0.085A 0.170A 0.045A 0.090A 0.180A on = 10 ms / off = 10 ms 0 mA 10 mA at 5V dc See the Relay Contact Ratings tables shown below. 8.0A ac 8.0A 16.0A ac 8.0A 16.0A ac 8.0A 1746-OX8 (RTB) 8 Individually Isolated 0.085A 0.090A (2) Relay Contact Ratings for 1746-OW4, OW8, and OW16 Maximum Volts ac dc 240V ac 120V ac 125V dc 24V dc Amperes(1) Make 7.5A 15A Break 0.75A 1.5A Amperes Continuous(2) Volt-Amperes 2.5A Make 1800 VA 0.22A(3) 1.0A 28 VA 1.2A(3) 2.0A Break 180 VA Relay Contact Ratings for 1746-OX8 Maximum Volts ac dc 240V ac 120V ac 125V dc 24V dc Amperes(1) Make 15A 30A Break 1.5A 3.0A Amperes Continuous(2) Volt-Amperes 5.0A Make 3600 VA 0.22A(3) 1.0A 28 VA 1.2A(3) 2.0A Break 360 VA (1) Connecting surge suppressors across your external load extends the life of SLC 500 relay contacts. For recommended surge suppressors when switching ac inductive loads, consult the SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style Installation and Operation User Manual (Publication 1746-6.2) or the SLC 500 Fixed Hardware Style Installation and Operation User Manual (Publication 1747-6.21). Recommended surge suppression for switching 24V dc inductive loads is 1N4004 diode reverse wired across the load. (2) The continuous current per module must be limited so the module power does not exceed 1440 VA. (3) For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing the 28 VA by the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc = 0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Publication 1746-2.35 44 Discrete Input and Output Modules Operating Voltage Range (For ac operation: voltage is applied between L1 and L2.) (For dc operation: voltage applied is between +VDC and DC common.) 0 V 5V ac 0 V 5V dc 265V ac 125V dc Recommended Operating Range Operation Not Guaranteed Circuit Diagram VAC/VDC VAC/VDC OUT OUT 1746-OW4, OW8, OW16 1746-OX8 VDC/VAC OUT OUT Wiring Diagrams 1746-OW4 RELAY OUTPUT 1746-OW8 RELAY OUTPUT L1 or VAC–VDC L1 or VAC–VDC 1 +DC OUT 0 +DC OUT 0 V ac/dc V ac/dc OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 2 CR OUT 3 CR L2 or –DC V ac/dc CR CR VAC–VDC 1 OUT 1 1 OUT 3 3 OUT 5 5 OUT 7 7 OUT 4 NOT USED OUT 5 CR PLC Publication 1746-2.35 L2 or –DC L1 or +DC V ac/dc OUT 6 CR OUT 7 CR L2 or –DC 1746-OX8 ISOLATED RELAY OUTPUT OUT0 0 OUT 2 VS0 L1 VAC–VDC 0 VS1 L1 VAC–VDC 1 2 OUT 4 4 OUT 6 6 CR CR VAC–VDC 2 11 OUT 8 10 OUT 11 OUT 10 13 OUT 13 12 15 OUT 12 OUT 15 14 17 OUT 14 16 VS2 VDC VAC–VDC 2 VS3 VDC VAC–VDC 3 L1 or +DC OUT 9 SLC CR NOT USED L2 or –DC CR OUT 3 VAC–VDC 2 1746-OW16 RELAY OUTPUT L1 or CR NOT USED NOT USED OUT NOT7 USED +DC OUT 2 NOT USED VS4 L1 VAC–VDC 4 VS5 L1 VAC–VDC 5 OUT 0 CR CR L2 or –DC VS6 VDC VAC–VDC 6 VS7 VDC VAC–VDC 7 VS0 L2 OUT 1 VS1 L2 OUT 2 VS2 DC COM OUT 3 CR VS3 DC COM CR VS4 L2 NOT USED OUT 4 V ac/dc CR OUT 5 VS5 L2 OUT 6 VS6 DC COM OUT 7 CR VS7 DC COM Discrete Input and Output Modules 45 Combination Modules (1746-IO4, -IO8, -IO12, -IO12DC) Specification Catalog Number 1746-IO4 1746-IO8 inputs: 120V ac outputs: ac/dc Relay Operating Voltage inputs: 85 to 132V ac at 47 to 63 Hz outputs: 5 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz / 5 to 125V dc Points per Common 2 4 Points per Module 2 inputs / 2 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs Backplane 5V dc 0.030A 0.060A Current Draw 24V dc 0.025A 0.045A Continuous Current per 4.0A 8.0A Module Specification input same as 1746-IA4 Reference output same as 1746-OW4 1746-IO12 (RTB) 1746-IO12DC (RTB) inputs: 24V dc outputs: ac/dc Relay inputs: 10 to 30V dc sinking 6 6 inputs / 6 outputs 0.090A 0.070A 8.0A 6 6 inputs / 6 outputs 0.080A 0.060A 8.0A Voltage Category input same as 1746-IA16 output same as 1746-OW16 RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range (AC Inputs) 0V ac + IN 85V ac 30V ac Off State Input State Not Guaranteed 132V ac On State – COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) On/Off-State Voltage Range (DC Inputs) 5V dc 0V dc + IN Off State 30V dc On State Input State Not Guaranteed – COM 10V dc (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Operating Voltage Range (AC/DC Relay Outputs) (For ac operation: voltage is applied between L1 and L2.) (For dc operation: voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) 0 V 5V ac 0 V 5V dc 265V ac 125V dc Recommended Operating Range Operation Not Guaranteed Publication 1746-2.35 46 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit and Wiring Diagrams 270 1870 VAC/VDC AC COM 261 1µF V ac Input 1M OUT Relay Output 0.3µF IN 270 1870 1µF OUT 261 1M 3K IN 0.3µF 0.1µF IN 560 V dc Input 3K IN 0.1µF 560 DC COM 1746-IO4 100/120V ac INPUT – RELAY OUTPUT L1 or +DC VAC–VDC OUT 0 OUT 1 1746-IO8 100/120V ac INPUT – RELAY OUTPUT L1 or V ac/dc OUT 0 V ac/dc L2 or –DC CR OUT 1 NOT USED NOT USED L1 L1 IN 0 NOT USED OUT 7 AC COM OUT 3 CR IN 3 OUT 7 AC COM L2 1746-IO12DC 24V dc INPUT – RELAY OUTPUT L1 or +DC VAC–VDC VAC–VDC OUT 0 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 2 V ac OUT 2 V ac/dc OUT 3 OUT 4 CR OUT 5 L2 or –DC NOT USED L1 OUT 3 OUT 4 CR CR OUT 5 L2 or –DC NOT USED IN 0 IN 1 IN 3 IN 4 IN 2 10–30V dc IN 5 NOT USED Publication 1746-2.35 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 L2 NOT USED +DC NOT USED 100/120 V ac L2 or –DC IN 2 1746-IO12 100/120V ac INPUT – RELAY OUTPUT L1 or +DC CR IN 1 100/120 V ac NOT USED L2 OUT 2 IN 0 IN 1 100/120 V ac +DC VAC–VDC IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 NOT USED AC COM NOT USED –DC NOT USED DC COM CR Discrete Input and Output Modules 47 Fixed I/O Chassis and Module Compatibility 7KHIROORZLQJFKDUWGHSLFWVWKHUDQJHRIFXUUHQWFRPELQDWLRQVVXSSRUWHGE\ WKHIL[HG,2H[SDQVLRQFKDVVLV7RXVHLW\RXPXVWILUVWGHWHUPLQHWKH EDFNSODQHFXUUHQWGUDZDQGRSHUDWLQJYROWDJHIRUERWKRIWKHPRGXOHV\RX SODQWRXVHLQWKHFKDVVLV<RXFDQJHWWKHVHVSHFLILFDWLRQVIURPWKH3RZHU 6XSSO\/RDGLQJWDEOHRQSDJH 1H[WSORWHDFKRIWKHFXUUHQWVRQWKHFKDUWEHORZ,IWKHSRLQWRILQWHUVHFWLRQ IDOOVZLWKLQWKHRSHUDWLQJUHJLRQ\RXUFRPELQDWLRQLVYDOLG,IQRW\RXU FRPELQDWLRQFDQQRWEHXVHGLQDVORWIL[HG,2FKDVVLV Example: Plot IN16 and NIO4V IN16 = 0.085A at 5V dc and 0A at 24V dc. NIO4V = 0.055A at 5V dc and 0.115A at 24V dc OA16 and IA16 (0, 455) 450 400 350 Current (mA) at 5V dc 1. Add current draws of both modules at 5V dc to get 0.14A (140 mA). 2. Plot this point on the chart at the right. (140 mA at 5V dc). 3. Add current draws of both modules at 24V dc to get 0.115A (115 mA). 4. Plot current draw at 24V dc (115 mA at 24V dc). 5. Note the point of intersection on the chart (marked x). This combination falls within the valid operating region for your fixed I/O chassis. 300 OW16 and IA16 (180, 255) 250 200 150 Plotted from the Example shown at the left. x 100 50 50 100 150 200 Current (mA) at 24V dc Important: 7KH12,DQG129DQDORJRXWSXWPRGXOHVPD\ UHTXLUHDQH[WHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\5HIHUWR\RXUDQDORJPRGXOH XVHU·VPDQXDO Important: 7KHUHDUHFHUWDLQFRQGLWLRQVWKDWDIIHFWWKHFRPSDWLELOLW\ FKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIWKH%$6,&PRGXOH%$6DQGWKH '+56&PRGXOH.( :KHQ\RXXVHWKH%$6PRGXOHRUWKH.(PRGXOHWRVXSSO\ SRZHUWRD$,&/LQN&RXSOHUWKH/LQN&RXSOHUGUDZVLWV SRZHUWKURXJKWKHPRGXOH7KHKLJKHUFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKH$,& DW9GFLVFDOFXODWHGDQGUHFRUGHGLQWKHWDEOHVIRUWKHPRGXOHV LGHQWLILHGDV%$6Q%$6QHWZRUNHGRU.(Q.(QHWZRUNHG 0DNHVXUHWRFKHFNWKHFXUUHQWGUDZYDOXHVIRUWKHVHPRGXOHVLI \RXUDSSOLFDWLRQXVHVWKH%$6RU.(PRGXOHLQWKLVZD\ Publication 1746-2.35 48 Discrete Input and Output Modules Power Supply Loading Hardware Components Catalog Number Maximum Current at 5V dc (Amps) Discrete Input 1746-IA4 0.035 Modules 1746-IA8 0.050 1746-IA16 0.085 1746-IB8 0.050 1746-IB16 0.085 1746-IB32 0.050 1746-IC16 0.085 1746-IG16 0.140 1746-IH16 0.085 1746-IM4 0.035 1746-IM8 0.050 1746-IM16 0.085 1746-IN16 0.085 1746-ITB16 0.085 1746-ITV16 0.085 1746-IV8 0.050 1746-IV16 0.085 1746-IV32 0.050 Discrete Input and 1746-IO4 0.030 Output Modules 1746-IO8 0.060 1746-IO12 0.090 1746-IO12DC 0.080 Publication 1746-2.35 Maximum Current at 24V dc (Amps) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.025 0.045 0.070 0.060 Hardware Component Discrete Output Modules Catalog Number Maximum Current at 5V dc (Amps) 1746-OA8 0.185 1746-OA16 0.370 1746-OAP12 0.370 1746-OB6EI 0.046 1746-OB8 0.135 1746-OB16 0.280 1746-OB16E 0.135 1746-OB32 0.190 1746-OB32E 0.190 1746-OBP8 0.135 1746-OBP16 0.250 1746-OG16 0.180 1746-OV8 0.135 1746-OV16 0.270 1746-OV32 0.190 1746-OVP16 0.250 1746-OW4 0.045 1746-OW8 0.085 1746-OW16 0.170 1746-OX8 0.085 Maximum Current at 24V dc (Amps) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.045 0.090 0.180 0.090 Discrete Input and Output Modules 49 7KHWDEOHEHORZOLVWVWKHSRZHUGLVVLSDWLRQIRUWKHGLVFUHWH,2PRGXOHV RSHUDWLQJDWQRPLQDOYROWDJH7KHIROORZLQJWHUPVDUHXVHGLQWKH3RZHU 'LVVLSDWLRQWDEOH Discrete I/O Power Dissipation Watts per Point The heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring point when energized at nominal voltage. Minimum Watts The amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field power present. Total Watts The watts per point plus the minimum watts (with all points energized). )RUH[DPSOHVRQFDOFXODWLQJV\VWHPKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQUHIHUWRWKH6/& 0RGXODU+DUGZDUH6W\OH,QVWDOODWLRQDQG2SHUDWLRQ8VHU0DQXDO3XEOLFDWLRQ RUWKH6/&)L[HG+DUGZDUH6W\OH,QVWDOODWLRQDQG2SHUDWLRQ8VHU 0DQXDO3XEOLFDWLRQ Power Dissipation Catalog Number 1746-IA4 1746-IA8 1746-IA16 1746-IB8 1746-IB16 1746-IB32 1746-IC16 1746-IG16 1746-IH16 1746-IM4 1746-IM8 1746-IM16 1746-IN16 1746-ITB16 1746-ITV16 1746-IV8 1746-IV16 1746-IV32 Watts per Point 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.22 0.02 0.32 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 Minimum Watts 0.175 0.250 0.425 0.250 0.425 0.250 0.425 0.700 0.217 0.175 0.250 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.250 0.425 0.250 Total Watts Catalog Numbers 1.30 1746-OB6EI 2.40 1746-OB8 4.80 1746-OB16 1.90 1746-OB16E 3.60 1746-OB32 6.65 1746-OB32E 3.95 1746-OBP8 1.00 1746-OBP16 5.17 1746-OG16 1.60 1746-OV8 3.10 1746-OV16 6.00 1746-OV32 6.00 1746-OVP16 3.60 1746-OW4 3.60 1746-OW8 1.90 1746-OW16 3.60 1746-OX8 6.65 1746-IO4 1746-OA8 1.000 0.925 9.00 1746-IO8 1746-OA16 0.462 1.850 9.30 1746-IO12 1746-OAP12 1.000 1.850 10.85 1746-IO12DC Watts per Point 0.440 0.775 0.338 0.150 0.172 0.250 0.300 0.310 0.033 0.775 0.388 0.172 0.310 0.133 0.138 0.033 0.825 0.27 per input point 0.133 per output point 0.27 per input point 0.133 per output point 0.27 per input point 0.133 per output point 0.20 per input point 0.133 per output point Minimum Watts 0.230 0.675 1.40 0.675 0.950 0.95 0.675 1.250 0.900 0.675 1.400 0.950 1.250 1.310 2.590 5.170 2.590 0.75 Total Watts 2.90 6.90 7.60 3.07 6.45 8.95 3.08 6.26 1.50 6.90 7.60 6.45 6.26 1.90 3.70 5.70 8.60 1.60 1.38 3.00 2.13 4.60 1.84 3.90 Publication 1746-2.35 50 Environmental Specifications Discrete Input and Output Modules Operating Temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)(1) Storage Temperature -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing) Noise Immunity NEMA standard ICS 2-230 Vibration (Operating) Displacement 0.015 inch peak at 5 to 57 Hz. Acceleration 2.5Gs at 57 to 2000 Hz Shock (Operating) 30Gs (all modules except relay contact) 10Gs (relay contact modules, 1746-OW, -OX, I/O Combo) 1500 Volts Isolation(2) UL listed. CSA or C-UL approved as indicated by product markings. CE compliant for all applicable directives when product or packaging is marked. Hazardous Environment Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Hazardous Environment Class(4) Certification(3)(4) (1) Exceptions are indicated with certain modules. (2) Electro-optical isolation between I/O terminals and control logic. (3) Some modules are not CE marked. See page 2. (4) All modules meet Class 1, Division 2 requirements for hazardous location. Some modules are rated Class 1, Division 2 by CSA only. See page 2. Accessories 7KHIROORZLQJDFFHVVRULHVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUXVHZLWKGLVFUHWH,2PRGXOHV Catalog Number Item 1746-N2 Modular chassis slot filler Publication 1746-2.35 1492-IFMxx Feed-through interface modules 1492-CABLExxxx • xxxx = 010H • xxxx = 025H • xxxx = 050H 1746-N3 Cables: • 1 m (3.3 ft.) • 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) • 5 m (16.4 ft.) Connector kit Description Helps prevent debris from entering the SLC enclosure that can cause shorts or improper operation. Connects electronic wiring (discrete I/O modules, particularly 16- and 32-point) to electric wiring (factory devices). Available with either 20 or 40 terminals. Connects directly to the 1492-IFMxx interface module and is available with a removable terminal block or a ready-to-wire free end. This kit allows you to create your own cable. It contains one female connector and 45 crimp contacts. Note: 32-point modules are shipped with one connector kit. Discrete Input and Output Modules Allen-Bradley Support 51 ,QWRGD\·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• • • • VDOHVDQGRUGHUVXSSRUW SURGXFWWHFKQLFDOWUDLQLQJ ZDUUDQW\VXSSRUW VXSSRUWVHUYLFHDJUHHPHQWV Publication 1746-2.35 3/&3/&3/&DQG3/&DUHUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNVRI5RFNZHOO$XWRPDWLRQ 6/&6/&6/&6/&6/&6/&'DWD+LJKZD\3OXV3DQHO9LHZDQG56/RJL[DUHDWUDGHPDUNVRI5RFNZHOO$XWRPDWLRQ Publication 1746-2.35 - July 1999 Supersedes Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year PN XXXXXX-XX © 1999 Rockwell International Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Technical Data Discrete Input and Output Modules (Catalog Numbers 1746-IA4, -IA8, -IA16, -IB8, -IB16, -IB32, -IC16, -IG16, -IH16, -IM4, -IM8, -IM16, -IN16, -ITB16, -ITV16, -IV8, -IV16, -IV32, -OA8, -OA16, -OAP12, -OB6EI, -OB8, -OB16, OB16E, -OB32, OB32E, -OBP8, -OBP16, -OG16, -OV8, -OV16, OV32, -OVP16, -OW4, -OW8, -OW16, -OX8, -IO4, -IO8, -IO12, -IO12DC) Inside ........................................... page Discrete I/O Module Summary .......... 2 Features and Benefits ........................ 3 I/O Module Operation ........................ 5 Enhanced Discrete I/O Modules ........ 7 Terms and Symbols Used in the Specification Tables and Wiring Diagrams ....................................... 12 Specifications, Wiring, and Circuit Diagrams ....................................... 15 Fixed I/O Chassis and Module Compatibility ................................. 47 Discrete I/O Power Dissipation ........ 49 Environmental Specifications .......... 50 Accessories ...................................... 50 Allen-Bradley Support ...................... 51 Our wide variety of input, output, and combination modules makes the SLC 500™ family the smart choice for all of your small PLC applications.,2 PRGXOHVDUHDYDLODEOHLQDZLGHYDULHW\RIGHQVLWLHVLQFOXGLQJDQG SRLQWDQGFDQLQWHUIDFHWR$&'&DQG77/YROWDJHOHYHOV2XWSXW PRGXOHVDUHDYDLODEOHZLWKVROLGVWDWH$&VROLGVWDWH'&DQGUHOD\FRQWDFWW\SH RXWSXWV)RUDGGHGIOH[LELOLW\FRPELQDWLRQPRGXOHVDUHDOVRDYDLODEOHLQ LQSXWRXWSXWLQSXWRXWSXWDQGLQSXWRXWSXWYHUVLRQV Designed and tested for industrial applications, our modules are of the highest quality.7KHPRGXOHVIHDWXUHLQSXWILOWHULQJRSWLFDOLVRODWLRQDQG EXLOWLQVXUJHSURWHFWLRQWRHQKDQFHWKHUHOLDELOLW\RIRSHUDWLRQLQQRLV\ LQGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQWV Class 1, Division 2 certified by UL and CSA. CE compliant.$OOPRGXOHVDUH 8/OLVWHGDQG&6$DSSURYHGDQGPHHW&ODVV'LYLVLRQ KD]DUGRXVORFDWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWVRIERWK8QGHUZULWHU·V/DERUDWRU\DQGWKH &DQDGLDQ6WDQGDUGV$VVRFLDWLRQH[FHSWIRUWKRVHQRWHGLQWKHPRGXOH VXPPDU\RQSDJH)RUXVHZLWKLQWKH(XURSHDQ8QLRQRU(($UHJLRQV PRVWPRGXOHVKDYHEHHQWHVWHGWRPHHW&RXQFLO'LUHFWLYH (OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\H[FHSWLRQVDUHOLVWHGRQSDJH 2 Discrete Input and Output Modules AC/DC Modules DC Modules AC Modules Discrete I/O Module Summary ID Code 100 300 500 101 301 501 2703 2903 2803 Voltage Category 100/120V ac 100/120V ac 100/120V ac 200/240V ac 200/240V ac 200/240V ac 100/120V ac 100/120V ac 120/240V ac 306 506 706 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 519 509 507 320 520 720 24V dc 48V dc 125V dc 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 518 515 24V dc 5V dc/TTL 2619 2713 2913 2920 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 3113 Input/Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output I/O Points 4 8 16 4 8 16 8 16 12 Module Description 120V ac Input 120V ac Input 120V ac Input 240V ac Input 240V ac Input 240V ac Input 120/240V ac Output 120/240V ac Output High Current 120/240V ac Output Page 15 15 15 15 15 15 17 17 17 Input Input Input 8 16 32 Current Sinking DC Input Current Sinking DC Input Current Sinking DC Input 19 19 19 Input Input Input Input Input Input 16 16 16 8 16 32 Fast Response DC Sinking Input Current Sinking DC Input Current Sinking DC Input Current Sourcing DC Input Current Sourcing DC Input Current Sourcing DC Input 19 22 22 22 22 22 Input Input 16 16 Fast Response DC Sourcing Input Current Sourcing TTL Input 22 27 1746-OB16E(1)(3) Output Output Output Output 6 8 16 16 Isolated Sourcing DC Output Current Sourcing DC Output Current Sourcing DC Output Current Sourcing DC Output 31 28 28 31 24V dc 1746-OB32(1) Output 32 Current Sourcing DC Output 28 3120 24V dc 1746-OB32E(1) Output 32 Current Sourcing DC Output 31 2721 24V dc 1746-OBP8(3) Output 8 High Current Sourcing DC Output 31 2921 24V dc Output 16 High Current Sourcing DC Output 35 2714 2914 3114 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc 1746-OBP16(1) 1746-OV8 1746-OV16 1746-OV32(1) Output Output Output 8 16 32 Current Sinking DC Output Current Sinking DC Output Current Sinking DC Output 37 37 37 2922 24V dc 1746-OVP16(1) Output 16 High Current Sinking DC Output 40 2915 5V dc/TTL 1746-OG16(2) Output 16 Current Sinking TTL Output 41 510 2500 24V ac/dc AC/DC Relay 1746-IN16 1746-OW4(1) Input Output 16 4 24V ac/dc Input Relay (Hard Contact) Output 42 43 2700 AC/DC Relay 1746-OW8(1) Output 8 Relay (Hard Contact) Output 43 2900 AC/DC Relay 1746-OW16(1) Output 16 Relay (Hard Contact) Output 43 2701 AC/DC Relay 1746-OX8(1) Output 8 Isolated Relay Output 43 800 In - 120V ac, Out - Relay 1746-IO4 In - 120V ac, Out - Relay 1746-IO8(1) Input/Output 2 In, 2 Out Combination Input/Output 45 Input/Output 4 In, 4 Out Combination Input/Output 45 In - 120V ac, Out - Relay 1746-IO12(1) In - 24V dc, Out - Relay 1746-IO12DC(3) Input/Output 6 In, 6 Out Combination Input/Output 45 Input/Output 6 In, 6 Out Combination Input/Output 45 1100 1500 1512 Catalog Number 1746-IA4 1746-IA8 1746-IA16 1746-IM4 1746-IM8 1746-IM16 1746-OA8 1746-OA16 1746-OAP12(1) 1746-IB8 1746-IB16 1746-IB32(1) 1746-ITB16 1746-IC16 1746-IH16 1746-IV8 1746-IV16 1746-IV32(1) 1746-ITV16 1746-IG16(2) 1746-OB6EI 1746-OB8 1746-OB16 (1) (1) Certified for Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location by CSA only. (2) Not CE marked. (3) These modules carry the C-UL mark and are certified by UL per CSA only. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules Features and Benefits 3 Select I/O modules to exactly match your application.&RPELQDWLRQ PRGXOHVDOORZ\RXWRKDYHLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWVLQDVLQJOHVORWIRUHIILFLHQWXVH RI\RXUFKDVVLVVSDFH Expand the I/O capacity of your fixed controller system. 7ZRGLVFUHWH,2 PRGXOHVFDQEHDGGHGWRWKHIL[HGFRQWUROOHU·VVORWH[SDQVLRQFKDVVLV LQFUHDVLQJWKHIOH[LELOLW\RIWKHV\VWHP All relay contacts are Silver Cadmium with Gold overlay. *ROGSODWLQJ UHVLVWVR[LGDWLRQDQGWDUQLVKLQJUHVXOWLQJIURPQRQXVH6LOYHU&DGPLXPDFWVDV DQH[FHOOHQWFRQGXFWRU High-density 32-Point DC I/O and fast response DC inputs are available. 7KHVHPRGXOHVDOORZ\RXWRDSSO\WKH6/&SURFHVVRUVLQDEURDGHU VSHFWUXPRIFRQWURODSSOLFDWLRQV INPUT LEDs indicate the status of each I/O point. IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 AC COM AC COM Terminal identification diagrams on each module LEDs indicate the status of each I/O point./('VLOOXPLQDWHWRDVVLVW\RXLQ WURXEOHVKRRWLQJZKHQWKHSURSHUVLJQDOLVUHFHLYHGDWDQLQSXWWHUPLQDORU ZKHQWKHSURFHVVRUDSSOLHVSRZHUWRDQRXWSXWWHUPLQDO Terminal identification diagrams on each module. 7HUPLQDOLGHQWLILFDWLRQ GLDJUDPVDUHORFDWHGRQHDFKPRGXOHPDNLQJWHUPLQDOLGHQWLILFDWLRQHDVLHU Publication 1746-2.35 4 Discrete Input and Output Modules Digital and field circuits are optically isolated. Self-locking tabs secure the module in the chassis. Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates help reduce installation time. Barrier-type terminal blocks are provided on all modules. Digital and field circuits are optically isolated. $OOPRGXOHVIHDWXUHLVRODWLRQ EHWZHHQGLJLWDODQGILHOGFLUFXLWVUHVXOWLQJLQLQFUHDVHGQRLVHLPPXQLW\DQG OLPLWHGGDPDJHWR\RXUV\VWHPGXHWRDQHOHFWULFDOPDOIXQFWLRQRIWKHILHOG ZLULQJ Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates cut installation time.:LULQJWHUPLQDOV KDYHVHOIOLIWLQJSUHVVXUHSODWHVWRVHFXUHWZR$:*ILHOGZLUHV Removable terminal blocks help ease the wiring task. 5HPRYDEOHWHUPLQDO EORFNVDOORZ\RXWRUHSODFHWKHPRGXOHZLWKRXWUHZLULQJLWQRWDYDLODEOHRQDOO PRGXOHV Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. $ PDWFKLQJFRORUEDQGLVDOVRSURYLGHGRQWKHIURQWRIWKHPRGXOHWRDVVLVWLQ PDWFKLQJWKHWHUPLQDOEORFNWRWKHPRGXOH Barrier-type terminal blocks provided on all modules.(DFKWHUPLQDOEORFN IHDWXUHVDEDUULHURQWKUHHVLGHVRIHDFKWHUPLQDOWRKHOSSUHYHQWDFFLGHQWDO VKRUWLQJRIILHOGZLULQJ Self-locking tabs secure the module in the chassis. 1RWRROVDUHQHFHVVDU\ WRLQVWDOORUUHPRYHDPRGXOHIURPWKHFKDVVLV7RLQVWDOODPRGXOH\RXVOLGHLW LQWRWKHFKDVVLVXQWLOLWODWFKHVLQSODFH Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules I/O Module Operation 5 Power Supply Requirements 'LVFUHWHPRGXOHVUHFHLYHSRZHUWKURXJKWKH,2FKDVVLVEDFNSODQHIURP WKHDVVRFLDWHGFKDVVLVSRZHUVXSSO\5HIHUWRWKHLQGLYLGXDOPRGXOH VSHFLILFDWLRQVIRUWKHFXUUHQWUHTXLUHGIURPWKHSRZHUVXSSO\LQP$WR RSHUDWHWKHPRGXOH<RXVKRXOGWRWDOWKHFXUUHQWUHTXLUHPHQWVIRUDOOWKH PRGXOHVLQWKHFKDVVLVWRDYRLGRYHUORDGLQJWKHSRZHUVXSSO\RUWKH,2 FKDVVLVEDFNSODQH Input Modules $QLQSXWPRGXOHUHVSRQGVWRDQLQSXWVLJQDOLQWKHIROORZLQJPDQQHU ,QSXWILOWHULQJOLPLWVWKHHIIHFWRIYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWVFDXVHGE\FRQWDFW ERXQFHDQGRUHOHFWULFDOQRLVH,IQRWILOWHUHGYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWVFRXOG SURGXFHIDOVHGDWD$OOLQSXWPRGXOHVXVHLQSXWILOWHULQJ 2SWLFDOLVRODWLRQVKLHOGVEDFNSODQHFLUFXLWVDQGPRGXOHORJLFFLUFXLWVIURP SRVVLEOHGDPDJHGXHWRHOHFWULFDOWUDQVLHQWV /RJLFFLUFXLWVSURFHVVWKHVLJQDO $QLQSXW/('WXUQVRQRURIILQGLFDWLQJWKHVWDWXVRIWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ LQSXWGHYLFH Input Input Filtering Optical Isolation Logic Circuits Backplane LED Output Modules $QRXWSXWPRGXOHFRQWUROVWKHRXWSXWVLJQDOLQWKHIROORZLQJPDQQHU /RJLFFLUFXLWVGHWHUPLQHWKHRXWSXWVWDWXV $QRXWSXW/('LQGLFDWHVWKHVWDWXVRIWKHRXWSXWVLJQDO 2SWLFDOLVRODWLRQVHSDUDWHVPRGXOHORJLFDQGEDFNSODQHFLUFXLWVIURPWKH ILHOGVLJQDO 7KHRXWSXWGULYHUWXUQVWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJRXWSXWRQRURII Backplane Logic Circuits Optical Isolation Output Drivers Output LED Publication 1746-2.35 6 Discrete Input and Output Modules Surge Suppression 0RVWRXWSXWPRGXOHVKDYHEXLOWLQVXUJHVXSSUHVVLRQWRUHGXFHWKHHIIHFWVRI KLJKYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWV+RZHYHUZHUHFRPPHQGWKDW\RXXVHDQDGGLWLRQDO VXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFHLIDQRXWSXWPRGXOHLVEHLQJXVHGWRFRQWURODQLQGXFWLYH GHYLFHVXFKDV • • • • UHOD\V PRWRUVWDUWHUV VROHQRLGV PRWRUV $GGLWLRQDOVXSSUHVVLRQLVHVSHFLDOO\LPSRUWDQWLI\RXULQGXFWLYHGHYLFHLVLQ VHULHVZLWKRUSDUDOOHOWRDKDUGFRQWDFWVXFKDV • SXVKEXWWRQV • VHOHFWRUVZLWFKHV %\DGGLQJDVXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFHGLUHFWO\DFURVVWKHFRLORIDQLQGXFWLYHGHYLFH \RXZLOOUHGXFHWKHHIIHFWVRIYROWDJHWUDQVLHQWVFDXVHGE\LQWHUUXSWLQJWKH FXUUHQWWRWKDWLQGXFWLYHGHYLFHDQGSURORQJWKHOLIHRIWKHVZLWFKFRQWDFWV 7KHGLDJUDPEHORZVKRZVDQRXWSXWPRGXOHZLWKDVXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFH VAC/VDC OUT 0 +DC or L1 Surge Suppressor OUT 1 AC or DC Output Module OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 COM DC COM or L2 5HFRPPHQGHGVXUJHVXSSUHVVRUVDUHSURYLGHGLQWKHVSHFLILFDWLRQVWDEOHV Important: $GGLQJDVXSSUHVVLRQGHYLFHDFURVV\RXUORDGZLOOGHIHDWWKHIDVW WXUQRIIIHDWXUHRIWKH2%(,2%(6HULHV%DQGODWHU 2%(2%36HULHV%DQGODWHU2%3DQG293'& RXWSXWPRGXOHV5HIHUWRSDJHVDQGIRUPRUH LQIRUPDWLRQDERXWVXSSUHVVLRQZKHQXVLQJWKH2%(, 2%(2%(2%32%3DQG293UHVSHFWLYHO\ Publication 1746-2.35 12 Terms and Symbols Used in the Specification Tables and Wiring Diagrams Discrete Input and Output Modules Terms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ublication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 13 6XUJH&XUUHQW3HU3RLQWWKHPD[LPXPDPSOLWXGHDQGGXUDWLRQSXOVHRI FXUUHQWDQRXWSXWFDQSURYLGHWRDQLQGXFWLYHRXWSXWGHYLFH 9ROWDJH&DWHJRU\WKHQRPLQDOYROWDJHXVHGWRGHVFULEHWKHPRGXOH I/O Wiring Symbols Symbol Device Name 2-wire Input Device 3-wire Input Device Solenoid Output CR L Contact Relay Output TTL Logic Output 5HODWHG3XEOLFDWLRQV'HWDLOHGZLULQJGLDJUDPVIRULQSXWPRGXOHVDQG $OOHQ%UDGOH\6HULHV3KRWRHOHFWULF6HQVRUVDUHSURYLGHGLQSXEOLFDWLRQ *5 Important: 7KHZLULQJGLDJUDPVLQWKLVGRFXPHQWDUHH[DPSOHVRQO\,WLVQRW QHFHVVDU\WRFRQQHFWDQ,2GHYLFHWRHYHU\WHUPLQDORQDQ,2 PRGXOH·VWHUPLQDOEORFN Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 19 Sinking DC Input Modules (1746-IB8, -IB16, -ITB16, -IB32) Specification Catalog Number 1746-IB8 1746-IB16 (RTB) Voltage Category Operating Voltage 24V dc sink 10 to 30V dc sink Number of Inputs Points per Common Backplane 5V dc Current Draw 24V dc Signal Delay (max.) 8 8 0.050A 0.0A on = 8 ms off = 8 ms 16 16 0.085A 0.0A on = 8 ms off = 8 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) Off-State Current (max.) Nominal Input Current 5V dc 1 mA 8 mA at 24V dc 5V dc 1 mA 1746-ITB16 (RTB) (Fast Response) 1746-IB32(1) 15 to 30V dc at 50°C sink 15 to 26.4V dc at 60°C sink 32 8 0.050A 0.0A on = 3 ms off = 3 ms 16 16 0.085A 0.0A on = 0.3 ms(2) off = 0.5 ms 5V dc 1.5 mA 5V dc 1.6 mA (1) Series A, B, and C 32-point input modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. Series D 32-point input modules are not fused. (2) Typical signal delay for these modules: on = 0.10 ms, off = 0.25 ms at 24V dc. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN ± 0V dc 5V dc 10V dc IB8, IB16, ITB16 0V dc 0V dc 5V dc 5V dc 15V dc 15V dc IB32 30V dc 30V dc at 50°C 26.4V dc at 60°C On State Off State COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Input State Not Guaranteed Publication 1746-2.35 20 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagrams 1746-ITB16 1746-IB8, IB16 2.8K IN 560 0.1µF 2.8K IN 3K IN 560 DC COM 560 0.1µF 560 3K IN 0.1µF 0.1µF DC COM 1746-IB32 4.3K IN 0.1µF 560 0.1µF 560 4.3K IN COM Wiring Diagrams 1746-IB16, ITB16 24V dc SINKING 1746-IB8 24V dc SINKING +DC IN 0 IN 2 IN 4 +DC 1 IN 1 2 IN 3 3 IN 2 4 IN 5 5 IN 6 24V dc IN 3 6 IN 7 7 6 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 24V dc IN 8 12 IN 11 IN 12 IN 4 IN 5 13 IN 6 14 IN 13 IN 14 –DC IN 0 0 IN 1 15 IN 7 16 IN 15 17 DC COM DC COM –DC DC COM DC COM Commons connected internally. Publication 1746-2.35 SLC PLC Commons connected internally. Discrete Input and Output Modules (Catalog Numbers 1746-IA4, -IA8, -IA16, -IB8, -IB16, -IB32, -IC16, -IG16, -IH16, -IM4, -IM8, -IM16, -IN16, -ITB16, -ITV16, -IV8, -IV16, -IV32, -OA8, -OA16, -OAP12, -OB8, -OBP8, -OB16, -OB16E, -OBP16, -OB32, -OG16, -OV8, -OV16, -OVP16, -OV32, -OW4, -OW8, -OW16, -OX8, -IO4, -IO8, -IO12) Product Data 91-187-39 What’s Inside... 91-187-40 Page Discrete I/O Module Summary 2 Features and Benefits 4 I/O Module Operation 6 Enhanced Discrete I/O Modules 8 includes: 32-Point, Fast Response, High-Current Solid-State, and Electronically Protected Modules Terms and Symbols 13 Specifications, Wiring, and Circuit Diagrams Fixed I/O Chassis Module Compatibility Discrete I/O Power Dissipation 16 Environmental Specifications 47 Accessories 47 Allen-Bradley Support 48 44 46 91-187-41 Our wide variety of input, output, and combination modules makes the SLC 500t family the smart choice for all of your small PLC applications. I/O modules are available in a wide variety of densities including 4-, 8-, 16-, and 32-point and can interface to AC, DC, and TTL voltage levels. Output modules are available with solid state AC, solid state DC, and relay contact type outputs. For added flexibility, combination modules are also available in 2-input/2-output, 4-input/4-output, and 6-input/6-output versions. Designed and tested for industrial applications, our modules are of the highest quality. The modules feature input filtering, optical isolation, and built-in surge protection to enhance the reliability of operation in noisy industrial environments. Class I, Division 2 certified by UL and CSA. CE compliant. All modules are UL 508 listed and CSA 22.2 142 approved and meet Class I, Division 2 hazardous location requirements of both Underwriter’s Laboratory and the Canadian Standards Association (except for those noted in the module summary on page 2). For use within the European Union or EEA regions, most modules have been tested to meet Council Directive 89/336 Electromagnetic Compatibility (exceptions are listed on page 2). 2 Discrete Input and Output Modules Discrete I/O Module Summary ID Code .A Voltage Category Cat. No. Input/Output I/O Points Module Description Page 100 100/120V ac 1746-IA4 Input 4 120V ac Input Module 16 300 100/120V ac 1746-IA8 Input 8 120V ac Input Module 16 500 100/120V ac 1746-IA16 Input 16 120V ac Input Module 16 101 200/240V ac 1746-IM4 Input 4 240V ac Input Module 16 301 200/240V ac 1746-IM8 Input 8 240V ac Input Module 16 501 200/240V ac 1746-IM16 Input 16 240V ac Input Module 16 2703 100/120V ac 1746-OA8 Output 8 120/240V ac Output Module 18 2903 100/120V ac 1746-OA16 Output 16 120/240V ac Output Module 18 2803 120/240V ac 1746-OAP12 Output 12 High Current 120/240V ac Output Module 18 AC Modules ➀ DC Modules 306 24V dc 1746-IB8 Input 8 Current Sinking DC Input Module 20 506 24V dc 1746-IB16 Input 16 Current Sinking DC Input Module 20 706 24V dc 1746-IB32 ➀ Input 32 Current Sinking DC Input Module 20 519 24V dc 1746-ITB16 Input 16 Fast Response DC Sinking Input Module 20 509 48V dc 1746-IC16 Input 16 Current Sinking DC Input Module 20 507 125V dc 1746-IH16 Input 16 Current Sinking DC Input Module 20 320 24V dc 1746-IV8 Input 8 Current Sourcing DC Input Module 24 520 24V dc 1746-IV16 Input 16 Current Sourcing DC Input Module 24 720 24V dc ➀ 1746-IV32 Input 32 Current Sourcing DC Input Module 24 518 24V dc 1746-ITV16 Input 16 Fast Response DC Sourcing Input Module 24 515 5V dc/TTL ➁ 1746-IG16 Input 16 Current Sourcing TTL Input Module 28 2713 24V dc 1746-OB8 Output 8 Current Sourcing DC Output Module 29 2913 24V dc 1746-OB16 Output 16 Current Sourcing DC Output Module 29 2920 24V dc ➀➂ 1746-OB16E Output 16 Current Sourcing DC Output Module 29 3113 24V dc 1746-OB32 ➀ Output 32 Current Sourcing DC Output Module 29 2721 24V dc ➂ 1746-OBP8 Output 8 High Current Sourcing DC Output Module 32 2921 24V dc 1746-OBP16 ➀ Output 16 High Current Sourcing DC Output Module 32 2714 24V dc 1746-OV8 Output 8 Current Sinking DC Output Module 34 2914 24V dc 1746-OV16 Output 16 Current Sinking DC Output Module 34 24V dc ➀ 1746-OV32 Output 32 Current Sinking DC Output Module 34 2922 24V dc ➀ 1746-OVP16 Output 16 High Current Sinking DC Output Module 37 2915 5V dc/TTL ➁ Output 16 Current Sinking TTL Output Module 38 3114 Publication 1746-2.35 1746-OG16 Discrete Input and Output Modules ID Code Voltage Category 3 Cat. No. Input/Output I/O Points Module Description Page 24V ac/dc 1746-IN16 Input 16 24V ac/dc Input Module 39 AC/DC Relay ➀ 1746-OW4 Output 4 Relay (Hard Contact) Output Module 40 2700 AC/DC Relay ➀ 1746-OW8 Output 8 Relay (Hard Contact) Output Module 40 2900 AC/DC Relay 1746-OW16 ➀ Output 16 Relay (Hard Contact) Output Module 40 2701 AC/DC Relay 1746-OX8 ➀ Output 8 Isolated Relay Output Module 40 800 Inputs – 120V ac Outputs – AC/DC Relay 1746-IO4 ➀ Input/Output 2 Inputs 2 Outputs Combination Input/Output Module 42 1100 Inputs – 120V ac Outputs – AC/DC Relay 1746-IO8 ➀ Input/Output 4 Inputs 4 Outputs Combination Input/Output Module 42 1500 Inputs – 120V ac Outputs – AC/DC Relay 1746-IO12 ➀ Input/Output 6 Inputs 6 Outputs Combination Input/Output Module 42 AC/DC Modules 510 2500 ➀ Certified for Class I, Division 2 hazardous location by CSA only. ➁ Not CE marked. ➂ These modules carry the C-UL mark and are certified by UL per CSA requirements. Spectrum Controls, Inc. Modules ID Code These modules are sold and supported by Spectrum Controls Inc., Bellevue, Washington. For additional information, contact Spectrum at (206) 746–9481. Voltage Category Cat. No. Input/Output I/O Points Module Description 120/240V ac 1746sc-OAP8I Output 8 Isolated ac Output Module AC Modules 2705 DC Modules 324 24V dc 1746sc-IB8I Input 8 Isolated DC Input Module 324 48V dc 1746sc-IC8I Input 8 48V Isolated DC Input Module 303 120V ac/dc 1746sc-IA8I Input 8 Isolated ac/dc Input Module 304 220V ac/dc 1746sc-IM8I Input 8 Isolated ac/dc Input Module AC/DC Modules Publication 1746-2.35 4 Discrete Input and Output Modules Features and Benefits Select I/O modules to exactly match your application. Combination modules allow you to have inputs and outputs in a single slot for efficient use of your chassis space. Expand the I/O capacity of your fixed controller system. Two discrete I/O modules can be added to the fixed controller’s 2-slot expansion chassis increasing the flexibility of the system. All relay contacts are Silver Cadmium with Gold overlay. Gold plating resists oxidation and tarnishing resulting from non-use. Silver Cadmium acts as an excellent conductor. High-density 32-Point DC I/O and fast response DC inputs are available. These modules allow you to apply the SLC 500 processors in a broader spectrum of control applications. LEDs indicate the status of each I/O point. INPUT IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 AC COM AC COM Terminal identification diagrams on each module LEDs indicate the status of each I/O point. Assisting you in troubleshooting, LEDs illuminate when the proper signal is received at an input terminal, or when the processor applies power to an output terminal. Terminal identification diagrams on each module. Terminal identification diagrams are located on each module making terminal identification easier. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 5 Digital and field circuits are optically isolated. Self-locking tabs secure the module in the chassis. Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates help reduce installation time. Barrier type terminal blocks are provided on all modules. Digital and field circuits are optically isolated. All modules feature isolation between digital and field circuits, resulting in increased noise immunity and limited damage to your system due to an electrical malfunction of the field wiring. Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates cut installation time. Wiring terminals have self-lifting pressure plates to secure two #14 AWG field wires. Removable terminal blocks help ease the wiring task. Removable terminal blocks allow you to replace the module without rewiring it (not available on all modules). Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. A matching color band is also provided on the front of the module to assist in matching the terminal block to the module. Barrier-type terminal blocks provided on all modules. Each terminal block features a barrier on three sides of each terminal to help prevent accidental shorting of field wiring. Self-locking tabs secure the module in the chassis. No tools are necessary to install or remove a module from the chassis. To install a module, you slide it into the chassis until it latches in place. Publication 1746-2.35 6 Discrete Input and Output Modules I/O Module Operation Power Supply Requirements Discrete modules receive power through the 1746 I/O chassis backplane from the associated chassis power supply. Refer to the individual module specifications for the current required from the power supply (in mA) to operate the module. You should total the current requirements for all the modules in the chassis to avoid overloading the power supply or the I/O chassis backplane. Input Modules An input module responds to an input signal in the following manner: 1. Input filtering limits the effect of voltage transients caused by contact bounce and/or electrical noise. If not filtered, voltage transients could produce false data. All input modules use input filtering. 2. Optical isolation shields backplane circuits and module logic circuits from possible damage due to electrical transients. 3. Logic circuits process the signal. 4. An input LED turns on or off indicating the status of the corresponding input device. Input Filtering Input Optical Isolation Logic Circuits Backplane LED Output Modules An output module controls the output signal in the following manner: 1. Logic circuits determine the output status. 2. An output LED indicates the status of the output signal. 3. Optical isolation separates module logic and backplane circuits from the field signal. 4. The output driver turns the corresponding output on or off. Backplane Logic Circuits Optical Isolation LED Publication 1746-2.35 Output Drivers Output Discrete Input and Output Modules 7 Surge Suppression Most output modules have built-in surge suppression to reduce the effects of high-voltage transients. However, we recommend that you use an additional suppression device if an output module is being used to control an inductive device such as: • relays • motor starters • solenoids • motors Additional suppression is especially important if your inductive device is in series with or parallel to a hard contact such as: • pushbuttons • selector switches By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device, you will reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device and prolong the life of the switch contacts. The diagram below shows an output module with a suppression device. + DC or L1 VAC/VDC OUT 0 Snubber OUT 1 OUT 2 AC or DC Output Module OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 COM DC COM or L2 Recommended surge suppressors are provided in the specifications tables. Important: Adding a suppression device across your load will defeat the fast turn-off feature of the 1746-OB16E Series B and later, -OBP8 Series B and later, -OBP16, and -OVP16 DC output modules. Refer to pages 29, 32, and 37 for more information about suppression when using the 1746-OB16E, -OBP8, -OBP16, and -OVP16, respectively. Publication 1746-2.35 8 Discrete Input and Output Modules Enhanced Discrete I/O Modules 32-Point Modules (1746-IB32, -IV32, -OB32, -OV32) The 32-point I/O modules allow you to reduce panel space requirements by wiring 32 DC input or 32 DC output devices to a module residing in one slot. These modules can be used with both modular chassis systems or fixed controllers. The 32-point modules come equipped with a 40-pin male connector on the front instead of screw terminals. This connector is designed to accept your cable fitted with the 1746-N3 mating connector. One 1746-N3 connector and 45 crimp-type contacts are packaged with each module. The other end of the cable can be wired to a user-supplied terminal block. As an alternative, 1492 prewired cables, purchased separately, can be used to connect the 32-point modules to 1492 interface modules. For more information, refer to the Accessories section on page 47. 1492-CABLExx Connects 32-point module to DIN rail mountable terminal block 32-Point I/O Module Male MIL-C-83503 Header ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ 1492-IFM40xx DIN rail mountable terminal block Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 9 Fast Response Input Modules (1746-ITB16, -ITV16) The fast response DC input modules provide 16 input points and are designed for high-speed applications requiring fast response to input signals from DC sensing devices. When used with an SLC 5/03t or higher processor and the Discrete Input Interrupt (DII) instruction (100 msec polling), pulses can be read up to a frequency of 1K Hz. (It is 2K Hz if the input signals are from a gray code encoder.) Recommended wiring to an Allen-Bradley 845D Absolute Gray Code Encoder is provided on page 27. Both sinking and sourcing versions of the fast response input module are available. High-Current Solid-State Output Modules (1746-OBP8, -OAP12, -OBP16, -OVP16).B High-current solid-state output modules expand application coverage for the SLC 500 by providing the following enhanced functionality: • increased current rating • fuse protection and diagnostics • high-speed switching • excellent reliability The high current solid state output modules expand application coverage in automotive, packaging, and material handling applications by allowing the SLC 500 processor to directly control solenoids, contactors, motors, and motor starter loads (up to size 5) with continuous current requirements of up to 1A at 60_C (1746-OAP12, -OBP16, -OVP16) and 2.0A at 60_C (1746-OBP8). 1746-OAP12, -OBP16, and -OVP16 modules also provide fuse protection and blown fuse diagnostics for increased up-time. The ac output module includes two replaceable fuses (one per common), which protect the module in the event of short circuits. 1746-OBP16 and -OVP16 output modules include a replaceable fuse on the common providing short circuit protection for wiring (16 AWG or larger) to external loads. A jumper can be set on these modules to provide CPU notification and system shutdown if the module fuse blows. The modules also include a blown fuse LED to assist I/O troubleshooting. Inductive load turn-off time for 1746-OBP8 (Series B and later), -OBP16 and -OVP16 DC output modules is reduced by 70% over standard 1746 DC output modules allowing fast application cycle times. Publication 1746-2.35 10 Discrete Input and Output Modules Innovative heat sink design for the OAP12 allows heat to be dissipated through the chassis frame metal providing cool operation and excellent reliability. Blown Fuse LED OUTPUT F U S E 1 AMP TRIAC FAC OBP16 Replaceable Fuse (F1) JP 1 SER 3 2 1 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1.5 AMP/OUTPUT @ 30C 1.0 AMP/OUTPUT @ 60C OUTPUT RATINGS SA 20.4 – 26.4 –––––– ––– UL Jumper for CPU Notification Jumper Settings and Fuse Replacement Information: WHEN FUSE OPENS 2 1 <–––– CPU CONTINUES 2 <––––––– 3 3 Î Î 6.4 AMP/MODULE OBP16 & OVP16 SLC 500 OUTPUT MODULE 12 13 14 15 CAT 8 9 10 11 SERIAL NO. 4 5 6 7 F1 0 1 2 3 CPU FAULTS 2 1 CPU CONTINUES CPU FAULTS WHEN FUSE OPENS 2 F1 FUSE REPLACEMENT LITTLEFUSE 322010 A–B CAT. NO. 1746–F8 MADE IN U.S.A. FUSE REPLACEMENT LITTLEFUSE 322010 A–B CAT. NO. 1746–F8 OVP16 Replaceable Fuse (F1) Blown Fuse LED OUTPUT F U S E 1 AMP TRIAC SER 3 2 1 JP 1 2.0A MAX @ 30 °C 1.25A MAX @ 55 °C 1.0A MAX @ 60 °C 240V MAX / 480 VA MAX 4.5A MAX/COMMON (MAX V.A. PER MODULE) 1440 VA 2 1 CPU FAULTS Publication 1746-2.35 WHEN FUSE OPENS CPU CONTINUES 2 Replaceable Fuse (F2) WHEN FUSE OPENS 2 3 3 FUSE REPLACEMENT SAN–O HQ 6.3A A–B CAT. NO. 1746–F9 MADE IN U.S.A. F2 Jumper Settings and Fuse Replacement Information: OUTPUT RATINGS ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ OAP12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 85–265 VAC 50/60 HZ UL SA Replaceable Fuse (F1) Jumper for CPU Notification FAC F1 SLC 500 OUTPUT MODULE 8 9 10 11 CAT 4 5 6 7 SERIAL NO. 0 1 2 3 1 <–––– CPU CONTINUES 2 <––––––– CPU FAULTS FUSE REPLACEMENT SAN–O HQ 6.3A A–B CAT. NO. 1746–F9 Discrete Input and Output Modules 11 Electronically Protected Output Module (1746-OB16E) The 1746-OB16E is designed to electronically protect the module from a short circuit or overload condition. The protection is based on a thermal cut-out principle. In the event of a short circuit or overload on an output channel, that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out temperature has been reached. All other channels continue to operate as directed by the processor. The 1746-OB16E lowers maintenance costs by eliminating the need to replace damaged modules and blown fuses. After the short circuit or overload condition is corrected, restore power and the module automatically resets and resumes control of the output channel. The 1746-OB16E provides a broad voltage range of 10 to 30V dc and a current rating of 1A at 30_C and 0.5A at 60_C making it the perfect solution for controlling 12V dc and 24V dc solenoid and lamp loads. The module is also equipped with an LED indicator that illuminates when the short circuit or overload condition occurs to expedite the troubleshooting process. Inductive load turn-off time for 1746-OB16E (Series B and later), output module is reduced by 70% over standard 1746 DC output modules allowing fast application cycle times. OUTPUT E F U S E Front View Important: EFUSE LED NOTE: There is no jumper setting on this module. The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources. Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses, circuit breakers, or other code-required wiring protection devices. Publication 1746-2.35 12 Discrete Input and Output Modules 1746-OB16E Overload Protection The chart below describes overload protection for the 1746-OB16E. The electronic protection is based on a thermal cut-out temperature, which is reached more quickly (at lower overload current) when two to four adjacent channels are operating. The adjacent channel groupings are 0–3, 4–7, 8–11, and 12–15. ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ 6 Overload Protection (Single channel operating at maximum rated current.) Output Current (Amps) 5 4 3 Overload Protection (Two to four channels operating at maximum rated current.) 3.5A Recommended Operating Current 0.5A 2 1 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Operating Temperature (_C) Important: The 1746-OB16E performs auto-reset under overload conditions. The output channel limits current once its thermal cut-out temperature is reached. Once the overload condition occurs, the channel turns off and begins to cool. If the overload condition has not been be corrected, and the channel is turned back on, it will continue to drive the load for several seconds until the cut-out temperature is reached again. 1746-OB16E Short Circuit Protection The table below describes short circuit protection characteristics for the 1746-OB16E. Module turns on with existing short circuit condition Module is on, then short circuit condition occurs Turn Off Time ➀ (msec) Peak Current (A) Turn Off Time ➀ (msec) Peak Current (A) 30 volts, 10A 1.4 18 1.3 60 10 volts, 10A 5.9 16 1.4 16 External Power Supply Rating ➀ This determination was made at 10_C. Turn off times are estimated to be 10 to 20 percent faster at 60_C. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules Terms and Symbols Used in the Specification Tables and Wiring Diagrams 13 Terms Backplane Current Draw the amount of current the module requires from the backplane. The sum of the backplane current draw for all modules in a chassis is used to select the appropriate chassis power supply. Continuous Current Per Module the maximum current for each module. The sum of the output current for each point should not exceed this value. Continuous Current Per Point the maximum current each output is designed to continuously supply to a load. Inrush Current the temporary surge current drawn when an input is initially energized. Minimum Load Current the lowest amount of current the output is designed to operate at. Operating at or below this value is not recommended. Nominal Input Current the current drawn at nominal input voltage. Off-State Current for input circuits, the maximum amount of leakage current allowed from an input device that will keep the SLCt input circuits in their off-state. Off-State Leakage for output circuits, the maximum amount of current present at the output terminal when the output circuit is in its off-state. Off-State Voltage (max) the maximum input voltage level detected as an off condition by the input module. On-State Voltage Drop the voltage developed across the output driver circuit during the on state at maximum load current. Operating Voltage for inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the on-state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage. Points per Common the number of input or output points connected to a single return (common) or supply (vcc). Signal Delay for inputs, the response time required to transmit the circuit status from the field logic to the digital logic. For outputs, the time required to transmit the circuit status from digital logic to the output driver. Publication 1746-2.35 14 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sinking/Sourcing describes a current signal flow relationship between field input and output devices in a control system and their power supply. Sourcing I/O modules supply (or source) current to sinking field devices. Sinking I/O modules receive (or sink) current from sourcing field devices. Surge Current the temporarily large current drawn by an inductive output device when it is initially energized. Surge Current Per Point the maximum amplitude and duration (pulse) of current an output can provide to an inductive output device. Voltage Category the nominal voltage used to describe the module. I/O Wiring Symbols Symbol Device Name 2-wire Input Device 3-wire Input Device Solenoid Output CR L Contact Relay Output TTL Logic Output Related Publications: Detailed wiring diagrams for 1746 input modules and Allen-Bradley Series 9000 Photoelectric Sensors are provided in Publication 42GR-7.4. Important: Publication 1746-2.35 The wiring diagrams in this document are examples only. It is not necessary to connect an I/O device to every terminal on an I/O module’s terminal block. Discrete Input and Output Modules 15 Wiring Diagrams The 16-point I/O module wiring diagrams include both decimal and octal numbers for I/O addressing and wire identification. (See figure below.) The decimal numbers in the upper left portion of each box are used to wire your 16-point I/O module to an SLC system. The octal numbers in the lower right portion of the box are used for a PLCR system. (As shipped from the factory, the I/O module has a decimal address label on the inside of its door.) An octal label kit is included with your 16-point I/O modules or you can order a separate octal conversion kit to allow you to convert your module to the octal system. Important: PLC systems use the octal lables. (See figure below.) Directions on how to install the labels are included in publication number 1746-5.3, Discrete I/O Modules Installation Instructions. These instructions are provided in a kit that is shipped with each discrete I/O module. 1746-IA16 100/120V ac L1 IN 0 0 IN 1 2 IN 3 1 IN 2 3 IN 4 4 IN 5 6 IN 7 10 IN 9 5 IN 6 100/120V ac 7 IN 8 11 IN 10 12 IN 11 14 IN 13 13 IN 12 IN 14 15 16 IN 15 17 L2 AC COM AC COM COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY SLC PLC For SLC (decimal) IN 14 16 For PLC (octal) Publication 1746-2.35 16 Discrete Input and Output Modules Specifications, Wiring, and Circuit Diagrams AC Input Modules (1746-IA4, -IA8, -IA16, -IM4, -IM8, -IM16) Catalog Number Specification 1746-IA4 1746-IA16 (RTB) 1746-IA8 1746-IM4 1746-IM8 1746-IM16 (RTB) Voltage Category 100/120V ac Operating Voltage 85 to 132V ac at 47 to 63 Hz Number of Inputs 4 8 16 4 8 16 4 8 16 4 8 16 0.035A 0.0A 0.050A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A 0.035A 0.0A 0.050A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A Points per Common 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw 200/240V ac 170 to 265V acat 47 to 63 Hz Signal Delay (max.) on = 35 ms off = 45 ms on = 35 ms off = 45 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 30V ac 50V ac Off-State Current (max.) 2 mA 2 mA Nominal Input Current 12 mA at 120V ac 12 mA at 240V ac ➀ Inrush Current (max.) 0.8A 1.6A 500 msec 500 msec ➀ Inrush Current Time Duration (max.) ➀ An ac input device must be compatible with SLC 500 input circuit inrush current. A current limiting resistor can be used to limit inrush current; however, the operating characteristics of the ac input circuit will be affected. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN 0V ac 30V ac 0V ac 50V ac – Off-state COM IA4, IA8, IA16 85V ac IM4, IM8, IM16 170V ac 132V ac ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 265V ac Input State Not Guaranteed On-state (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Circuit Diagrams 1746-IA4, IA8, IA16 1746-IM4, IM8, IM16 270 1870 AC COM 261 1µF 270 AC COM 1870 261 1µF 1M 1M 0.3µF 0.15µF IN IN 270 270 1870 1µF 1µF 261 1M 1M 0.15µF 0.3µF IN Publication 1746-2.35 1870 IN 261 Discrete Input and Output Modules 17 Wiring Diagrams 1746-IA4 1746-IM4 100/120V ac 200/240V ac NOT USED 1746-IA8 1746-IM8 100/120V ac 200/240V ac L1 IN 0 NOT USED IN 1 NOT USED L1 100/120V ac (IA4) 200/240V ac (IM4) IN 2 NOT USED 100/120V ac (IA8) IN 3 IN 0 200/240V ac (IM8) IN 4 IN 1 IN 5 IN 2 IN 6 IN 3 IN 7 AC COM L2 AC COM L2 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY 1746-IA16 1746-IM16 100/120V ac 200/240V ac AC COM L1 IN 0 0 IN 1 2 IN 3 4 IN 5 1 IN 2 3 IN 4 100/120V ac (IA16) 5 IN 6 200/240V ac (IM16) 6 IN 7 10 IN 9 7 IN 8 11 IN 10 12 IN 11 14 IN 13 13 IN 12 15 IN 14 16 IN 15 17 AC COM L2 AC COM COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 18 Discrete Input and Output Modules AC Output Modules (1746-OA8, -OA16, -OAP12) Catalog Number Specification 1746-OA8 1746-OA16 ➀ ➀ 1746-OAP12 (RTB) (RTB) Voltage Category 120/240V ac Operating Voltage 85 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz Number of Outputs 8 16 12 Points per Common 4 8 6 0.185A 0.0A 0.370A 0.0A 0.370A 0.0A 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw on = 1 ms off =11 ms Signal Delay (max.)(Resistive Load) ➂ (max.) Off-State Leakage 2 mA Load Current (min.) 10 mA ➃ Per Point Continuous Current ➀➁ ( ) (max.) Per Module On-State Voltage Drop (max.) ➄ (max.) Surge Current per Point 1.0A at 30°C 0.50A at 60°C 0.50A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8.0A at 30°C 4.0A at 60°C 1.50V at 1A 8.0A at 30°C 4.0A at 60°C 1.50V at 0.50A 10.0A for 25 ms 10.0A for 25 ms 2.0A at 30°C 1.25A at 55°C 1.0A at 60°C 9.0A at 30°C 6.0A at 60°C 1.2V at 2.0A per point – 17.0A for 25 ms per common – 35.0A for 10 ms ➀ Triac outputs turn on at any point in the ac line cycle and turn off at ac line zero cross. ➁ A fused common and blown fuse LED are provided on this module. (Fuses are designed to protect the module.) For replacement fuse, use catalog number 1746-F9 or SAN-O HQ 6.3A. ➂ To limit the effects of leakage current through triac outputs, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For typical 120V ac applications, use a 15k ohm, 2W resistor. For typical 240V ac applications, use a 15k ohm, 5W resistor. ➃ Recommended surge suppression for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads is Harris MOV part number V220MA2A. See page 7 for more information on surge suppression. ➄ Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 85V ac 0V ac Operation Not Guaranteed 265V ac Recommended Operating Range (Voltage is applied between L1 and L2.) Important: Publication 1746-2.35 If you measure the voltage at an output terminal that is not connected to a load or is connected to a high-impedance load, you may measure as much as 100V ac even though the output is off. Discrete Input and Output Modules 19 Circuit Diagrams 1746-OA8, -OA16 1746-OAP12 L1 VAC OUT OUT OUT OUT Wiring Diagrams 1746-OA8 1746-OA16 100–240V ac TRIAC OUTPUT 100–240V ac TRIAC OUTPUT L1 VAC 1 VAC 1 L1 OUT 3 2 OUT 3 3 OUT 4 100–240V ac CR CR CR L2 CR 4 OUT 5 CR OUT 1 OUT 2 0 1 OUT 2 100–240V ac OUT 0 OUT0 OUT 1 5 OUT 6 CR 6 OUT 7 7 L2 VAC 2 L1 VAC 2 OUT 9 13 OUT 10 100–240V ac OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 10 OUT 11 OUT 4 CR CR CR CR L2 L1 11 OUT 8 100–240V ac 12 OUT 13 15 OUT 12 OUT 15 CR 14 17 OUT 14 CR 16 SLC L2 PLC 1746-OAP12 100–240V ac HIGH CURRENT TRIAC OUTPUT COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY VAC 1 L1 VAC 1 OUT 1 1 CR 100–240V ac CR OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 0 0 3 OUT 2 5 OUT 4 NOT USED 2 4 CR NOT USED L2 L2 OUT 7 CR CR SLC PLC 7 OUT 6 6 11 OUT 8 10 OUT 11 13 OUT 10 12 VAC 2 VAC 2 OUT 9 100–240V ac CR L1 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY Publication 1746-2.35 20 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sinking DC Input Modules (1746-IB8, -IB16, -ITB16, -IB32) Catalog Number Specification 1746-IB16 (RTB) 1746-IB8 1746-ITB16 (RTB) (Fast Response) 1746-IB32 ➀ Voltage Category 24V dc sink Operating Voltage 10 to 30V dc sink Number of Inputs 8 16 16 15 to 30V dc at 50°C sink 15 to 26.4V dc at 60°C sink 32 8 16 16 8 0.050A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A 0.106A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) on = 8 ms off = 8 ms on = 8 ms off = 8 ms on = 0.3 ms off = 0.5 ms on = 3 ms off = 3 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 5V dc 5V dc 5V dc 5V dc Off-State Current (max.) 1 mA 1 mA 1.5 mA 1.6 mA Nominal Input Current 8 mA at 24V dc Points per Common 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw ➁ ➀ The 32-point input modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. ➁ Typical signal delay for these modules: on=0.10 ms, off=0.25 ms at 24V dc. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN 0V dc 5V dc 10V dc IB8, IB16, ITB16 0V dc 0V dc 5V dc 5V dc 15V dc 15V dc IB32 – Off-state COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Publication 1746-2.35 ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ Input State Not Guaranteed On-state 30V dc 30V dc at 50°C 26.4V dc at 60°C Discrete Input and Output Modules 21 Circuit Diagrams 1746-ITB16 1746-IB8, IB16 2.8K IN IN 560 0.1µF 2.8K IN 3K 560 DC COM 560 0.1µF 560 3K IN 0.1µF 0.1µF DC COM 1746-IB32 2.2K 2.2K IN 2.2K 0.1µF 750 0.1µF 750 2.2K IN COM Wiring Diagrams 1746-IB16, -ITB16 1746-IB8 24V dc SINKING 24V dc SINKING +DC IN 0 IN 2 IN 4 +DC 1 IN 1 2 IN 3 3 IN 2 4 IN 5 5 IN 6 24V dc IN 0 0 IN 1 IN 3 6 IN 7 7 6 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 24V dc IN 8 12 IN 11 IN 12 IN 14 –DC COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY IN 4 IN 5 13 IN 6 14 IN 13 15 IN 7 16 IN 15 17 DC COM DC COM DC COM –DC COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY DC COM SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 22 Discrete Input and Output Modules 1746-IB32 24V dc SINKING Wire Group 1 Wire Group 3 DC Com1 COM 1 CONNECTED INTERNALLY COM 1 CONNECTED INTERNALLY COM 3 IN0 +VDC 1 IN16 0 IN1 1 1 IN18 2 IN3 2 IN19 3 IN4 3 IN20 4 IN5 4 IN21 5 IN6 5 IN22 6 IN7 6 IN23 7 IN8 7 IN24 10 IN9 10 IN25 11 IN10 11 IN26 12 IN11 12 IN27 13 IN12 13 IN28 14 IN13 14 IN29 15 IN14 15 IN30 16 IN15 +VDC 2 DC Com2 Wire Group 2 Important: 16 +VDC 4 IN31 17 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY +VDC 3 0 IN17 IN2 Connector Key DC Com3 COM 3 17 COM 2 COM 4 COM 2 COM 4 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY DC Com4 Wire Group 4 SLC PLC Each group has a separate DC common (COM). Common terminals for each wiring group are isolated from one another. You must use the common terminal associated with the respective wiring group. The 1746 32-point modules include a keyed 40-pin female connector and crimp-type pins for connection to I/O wiring. In addition, 1492 prewired cables and interface modules can be used for connecting external I/O. (See pages 8 and 47.) Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 23 Sinking DC Input Modules (1746-IC16, -IH16) Catalog Number Specification 1746-IC16 (RTB) Voltage Category 1746-IH16 (RTB) 48V dc sink ➀ 125V dc sink Operating Voltage 30 to 60V dc at 55°C sink 30 to 55V dc at 60°C sink Number of Inputs 16 90 to 146V dc sink Max. Points on Simultaneously: 16 @146V dc and 30°C 12 @146V dc and 50°C 14 @132V dc and 55°C 16 @125V dc and 60°C 16 Points per Common 16 16 0.085A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) on = 4 ms / off = 4 ms on = 9 ms / off = 9 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 10V dc 20V dc Off-State Current (max.) 1.5 mA 0.8 mA Nominal Input Current 4.1 mA at 48V dc 2.15 mA at 125V dc / 2.25 mA at 132V dc 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw ➀ If the input module is connected in parallel with an inductive load, use surge suppressiion across the load to protect the input module from damage caused by reverse voltage. RTB = Removable Terminal Block On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN 0V dc 0V dc 10V dc 10V dc 0V dc ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ 20V dc – Off-state COM 30V dc 30V dc 55V dc at 60°C 60V dc at 55°C IC16 IH16 90V dc 146V dc (See table for max. number of points allowed on simultaneously.) On-state Input State Not Guaranteed (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Circuit and Wiring Diagrams 110K IN 51K 0.22µF 4.7K (1746-IH16) 1746-IC16 1746-IH16 48V dc SINKING 125V dc SINKING +DC ZD CRD IN 0 0 IN 1 1 IN 2 IN 48V dc (IC16) 51K 2 IN 3 3 IN 4 110K 0.22µF 4.7K 125V dc (IH16) 4 IN 5 5 6 IN 7 7 6 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 IN 6 IN 8 12 IN 11 ZD IN 12 CRD IN 14 DC COM –DC IN (1746-IC16) COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY 11.2K 0.1µF 560 13 14 IN 13 15 16 IN 15 DC COM 17 DC COM SLC PLC DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 24 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sourcing DC Input Modules (1746-IV8, -IV16, -ITV16, -IV32) Catalog Number Specification 1746-ITV16 (Fast Response) (RTB) 1746-IV16 (RTB) 1746-IV8 1746-IV32 ➀ Voltage Category 24V dc source Operating Voltage 10 to 30V dc source Number of Inputs 8 16 16 15 to 30V dc at 50°C source 15 to 26.4V dc at 60°C source 32 8 16 16 8 0.050A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A 0.085A 0.0A 0.106A 0.0A Points per Common 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw Signal Delay (max.) on = 8 ms / off = 8 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 5.0V dc Off-State Current (max.) 1 mA Nominal Input Current 8 mA at 24V dc ➁ on = 0.3 ms / off = 0.5 ms on = 3 ms / off = 3 ms 5.0V dc 5.0V dc 5.0V dc 1 mA 1.5 mA 1.6 mA ➀ The 32-point input modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. ➁ Typical signal delay for these modules: on=0.100 ms, off=0.25 ms for 24V dc. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + IN 0V dc 5V dc 10V dc IV8, IV16, ITV16 0V dc 0V dc 5V dc 5V dc 15V dc 15V dc IV32 – Off-state COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Publication 1746-2.35 ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ Input State Not Guaranteed On-state 30V dc 30V dc at 50°C 26.4V dc at 60°C Discrete Input and Output Modules 25 Circuit Diagrams 1746-ITV16 1746-IV8, IV16 VDC VDC 560 0.1µF 0.1µF 560 0.1µF 560 2.8K 3K IN IN 0.1µF 560 2.8K 3K IN IN VDC 1746-IV32 2.2K 2.2K 2.2K 2.2K 0.1µF 750 0.1µF 750 IN IN Wiring Diagrams 1746-IV16, -ITV16 1746-IV8 24V dc SOURCING 24V dc SOURCING –DC –DC IN 0 IN 0 IN 3 IN 6 IN 8 IN 10 IN 12 IN 6 VDC 6 IN 7 10 IN 9 5 7 11 12 IN 11 13 14 IN 13 IN 14 IN 7 VDC 1 3 24V dc IN 5 VDC CONNECTED INTERNALLY IN 3 4 IN 5 IN 4 +DC IN 1 2 IN 4 IN 2 24V dc 0 IN 2 IN 1 15 16 IN 15 17 VDC +DC VDC VDC CONNECTED INTERNALLY SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 26 Discrete Input and Output Modules 1746-IV32 24V dc SOURCING +VDC 1 Wire Group 1 Wire Group 3 VDC 1 CONNECTED INTERNALLY VDC 1 IN16 0 IN1 1 1 IN18 2 IN3 2 IN19 3 IN4 3 IN20 4 IN5 4 IN21 5 IN6 5 IN22 6 IN7 6 IN23 7 Connector Key IN8 7 IN24 10 IN9 10 IN25 11 IN10 11 IN26 12 IN11 12 IN27 13 IN12 13 IN28 14 IN13 14 IN29 15 IN14 15 IN30 16 IN15 16 IN31 17 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY DC Com3 0 IN17 IN2 DC Com2 CONNECTED INTERNALLY VDC 3 IN0 DC Com1 +VDC 3 VDC 3 DC Com4 17 VDC 2 VDC 4 VDC 2 VDC 4 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY +VDC 2 +VDC 4 Wire Group 2 Important: Wire Group 4 SLC PLC Each group has a separate VDC and DC Common (COM). VDC terminals for each wiring group are isolated from one another. You must use the VDC terminal associated with the respective wiring group. The 1746 32-point modules include a keyed 40-pin female connector and crimp-type pins for connection to I/O wiring. In addition, 1492 prewired cables and interface modules can be used for connecting external I/O. (See pages 8 and 47.) Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 27 845D Absolute Gray Code Encoder to 1746-ITV16 0 2 4 Catalog Number 845D-NXC7914-2 Absolute Gray Code Encoder 0–359 (excess 76) Open Collector Output, 24V dc A B C D E F G H J L U V T S Function OUTPUTS Connector Pin XSG0 LSB XSG1 XSG2 XSG3 XSG4 XSG5 XSG6 XSG7 XSG8 MSB MSB9 Not Used 24V dc Filtered B+ Return, Signal Common Not Used 6 8➀ 1 3 5 7 9➀ 10 11 12 13 14 15 VDC VDC 1746-ITV16 +VDC –DC COM External Power Supply ➀ Terminals 8 and 9 can be interchanged to select CW vs. CCW direction. Refer to your encoder installation manual for recommended cable type and length. Publication 1746-2.35 28 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sourcing TTL Input Module (1746-IG16) Catalog Number Specification 1746-IG16 (RTB) Voltage Category 5V dc TTL source Operating Voltage 4.5 to 5.5V dc source 50 mV peak-to-peak ripple max. Number of Inputs 16 Points per Common 16 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw 0.140A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) on = 0.25 ms off = 0.50 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 2.0V dc Off-State Current (max.) 4.1 mA Nominal Input Current 3.7 mA at 5V dc ➀ ➀ TTL inputs are inverted (–0.2 to +0.8 = low voltage = True = on). Use a NOT instruction in your program to convert to traditional True = High logic. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range + –0.2V dc IN On-state – ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 2V dc 0.8V dc 5.5V dc Off-state Input State Not Guaranteed TTL inputs are inverted (*0.2 to +0.8 = low voltage = True = On). COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Circuit and Wiring Diagrams +5DC 1746-IG16 TTL INPUT (Low = True) 1.5K 1K 74HCT14 IN 560 +DC +5 DC IN 0 0 IN 1 1 IN 2 2 IN 3 3 IN 4 5 IN 6 7 IN 8 IN 5 4 6 IN 7 +5V dc IN 9 11 IN 11 13 IN 13 1.5K 1K IN 74HCT14 15 IN 15 560 10 IN 10 12 IN 12 14 IN 14 16 17 DC COM –DC DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 SLC PLC Discrete Input and Output Modules 29 Sourcing DC Output Modules (1746-OB8, -OB16, -OB16E, -OB32) Catalog Number Specification 1746-OB16 (RTB) 1746-OB8 1746-OB16E (RTB) ➀ 1746-OB32 ➁ Voltage Category 24V dc Operating Voltage 10 to 50V dc source 10 to 30V dc source 5 to 50V dc source Number of Outputs 8 16 16 32 8 16 16 16 0.135A 0.0A 0.280A 0.0A 0.135A 0.0A 0.452A 0.0A on = 0.1 ms off=1 ms on = 0.1 ms off=1 ms on = 1.0 ms off = 1.0 ms on = 0.1 ms off = 1.0 ms 1A at 30°C 0.50A at 60°C 8A at 30°C 4A at 60°C 1.2V at 1.0A 0.50A at 30°C 0.25A at 60°C 8A at 30°C 4A at 60°C 1.2V at 0.5A 1.00A at 30°C 0.50A at 60°C 0.1A at 60°C 8A at 0 to 60°C 3.2A at 60°C 1.0V at 0.5A 1.2V at 0.1A 3A for 10 ms 3A for 10 ms per point – 2A for 10 ms per module – 32A for 10 ms 1A for 10 ms Points per Common 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) ➂ (max.) Off-State Leakage 1 mA Load Current (min.) 1 mA ➃ Per Point Continuous Current (max.) Per Module On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Surge Current ➄ (max.) ➀ The 1746-OB16E, Series B and later, provides fast turn-off delay for inductive loads. Fast off delay for inductive loads is accomplished with surge suppressors on this module. A suppressor at the load is not needed unless another contact is connected in series. If this is the case, a 1N4004 diode should be reverse wired across the load. This defeats the fast turn-off feature. Comparative turn-off delay times for 1746-OB8/-OV8 and 1746-OB16E, Series B and later/-OBP8, Series B and later/-OBP16/-OVP16, when switching Bulletin 100-B110 (24W sealed) contactor, are: 1746-OB8/-OV8 off delay = 152 ms; 1746-OB16E, Series B and later/-OBP8, Series B and later/-OBP16/-OVP16 off delay = 47 ms. See page 11 for more information on the 1746-OB16E. ➁ The 32-point output modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. ➂ To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, 1/2W resistor. ➃ Recommended surge suppression for switching 24V dc inductive loads is a 1N4004 diode that is reverse wired across the load. See page 7 for more information on surge suppression. ➄ Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 0V dc 10V dc OB8, OB16 50V dc 0V dc 10V dc OB16E 30V dc 0V dc 5V dc OB32 50V dc ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ Operation Not Guaranteed Recommended Operating Range (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Publication 1746-2.35 30 Discrete Input and Output Modules Circuit Diagram VDC VDC OUT OUT 0.39µF 1746-OB8, OB16 1K 1746-OB32 OUT DC COM OUT 0.39µF 1K VDC COM OUT 1746-OB16E OUT DC COM Wiring Diagrams 1746-OB16, OB16E 1746-OB8 10–50V DC OUTPUT-SOURCING 10–50V DC TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SOURCING +DC VDC VDC +DC OUT 0 0 OUT 1 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 OUT 0 2 OUT 3 OUT 1 CR OUT 2 10–50V dc OUT 3 OUT 4 CR 10–50V dc 4 OUT 5 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 6 OUT 7 OUT 9 CR 10 11 OUT 10 CR 12 OUT 11 13 OUT 12 OUT 5 CR CR OUT 6 CR DC COM 14 OUT 13 15 OUT 14 16 OUT 15 CR OUT 7 CR CR CR CR 17 DC COM –DC –DC SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 31 1746-OB32 5–50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT SOURCING Wire Group 1 +VDC 1 CONNECTED INTERNALLY Wire Group 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 OUT0 CR CONNECTED INTERNALLY OUT16 0 OUT1 CR 1 2 3 4 4 OUT21 5 OUT6 5 OUT22 6 OUT7 6 OUT23 7 OUT8 7 OUT24 10 OUT9 CR 11 12 CR 12 OUT27 13 OUT12 CR 13 OUT28 14 OUT13 14 OUT29 15 OUT14 15 OUT30 16 OUT15 16 OUT31 17 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY CR 11 OUT26 OUT11 CR CR 10 OUT25 OUT10 CR CR 3 OUT20 OUT5 Connector Key CR 2 OUT19 OUT4 CR CR 1 OUT18 OUT3 CR CR 0 OUT17 OUT2 CR +VDC 2 17 COM 1 COM 2 COM 1 COM 2 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY DC Com1 DC Com2 SLC PLC Important: Each group has separate VDC and DC COM connections. The 1746 32-point modules include a keyed 40-pin female connector and crimp-type pins for connection to I/O wiring. In addition, 1492 prewired cables and interface modules can be used for connecting external I/O. (See pages 8 and 47.) Publication 1746-2.35 32 Discrete Input and Output Modules High Current Sourcing DC Output Modules (1746-OBP8, -OBP16).C Catalog Number Specification ➀ 1746-OBP8 (RTB) 1746-OBP16 (RTB) Voltage Category 24V dc Operating Voltage 20.4 to 26.4V dc source Number of Outputs 8 16 4 16 0.135A 0.0A 0.250A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) on = 1.0 ms / off = 2.0 ms on = 0.1 ms / off = 1 ms ➂ Off-State Leakage (max.) 1 mA Load Current (min.) 1 mA Points per Common 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw Continuous Current (max.) Per Point 2.0A at 60°C Per Module 8.0A at 0° to 60°C 1V at 2A 1.5A at 30°C 1.0A at 60°C 6.4A at 0° to 60°C 1V at 2A Per Point Per Module 4A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms 4A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Surge Current ➃ (max.) (max ) ➀➁ ➀ The 1746-OBP8, Series B and later, and 1746-OBP16 provide fast turn-off delay for inductive loads. Fast off delay for inductive loads is accomplished with surge suppressors on this module. A suppressor at the load is not needed unless another contact is connected in series. If this is the case, a 1N4004 diode should be reverse wired across the load. This defeats the fast turn-off feature. Comparative turn-off delay times for 1746-OB8/-OV8 and 1746-OB16E, Series B and later/-OBP8, Series B and later/-OBP16/-OVP16, when switching Bulletin 100-B110 (24W sealed) contactor, are: 1746-OB8/-OV8 off delay = 152 ms; 1746-OB16E, Series B and later/-OBP8, Series B and later/-OBP16/-OVP16 off delay = 47 ms. ➁ A fused common and blown fuse LED are provided on this module. For replacement fuse, use catalog number 1746-F8 or Littlefuse 322010. Refer to page 9 for additional information. ➂ To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, 1/2W resistor. ➃ Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30 °C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 0V dc 20.4V dc 26.4V dc Operation Not Guaranteed (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Publication 1746-2.35 Recommended Operating Range Discrete Input and Output Modules 33 Circuit and Wiring Diagrams VDC 1746-OBP8 20.4–26.4V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SOURCING 6.19K +DC VDC1 S 8.87K OUT 0 G CR OUT 1 CR OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT X D 20.4–26.4 V dc DC COM1 NC NC NC –DC NC NC S NC +DC G VDC2 OUT 4 OUT Y D 20.4–26.4 V dc CR OUT 5 CR OUT 7 OUT 6 DC COM2 –DC COM VDC 6.19K 1746-OBP16 S G 20.4–26.4V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SOURCING OUT D 8.87K +DC VDC OUT 0 0 OUT 1 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 2 OUT 3 CR 20.4–26.4V dc CR 6 OUT 7 OUT 9 6.19K 4 OUT 5 10 11 OUT 10 CR 12 OUT 11 S 13 OUT 12 G D CR OUT 14 OUT 13 15 OUT 14 16 OUT 15 8.87K CR CR CR CR 17 DC COM –DC SLC PLC FLASH Publication 1746-2.35 34 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sinking DC Output Modules (1746-OV8, -OV16, -OV32) Catalog Number Specification 1746-OV16 (RTB) 1746-OV8 1746-OV32 Voltage Category 24V dc Operating Voltage 10 to 50V dc sink Number of Outputs 8 16 32 Points per Common 8 16 16 0.135A 0.0A 0.270A 0.0A 0.452A 0.0A 1A at 30°C / 0.5A at 60°C 0.5A at 30°C / 0.25A at 60°C 0.1A at 60°C 8A at 30°C / 4A at 60°C 1.2V at 1A 8A at 30°C / 4A at 60°C 1.2V at 0.5A 3.2A at 60°C 1.2V at 0.1A 3A for 10 ms 3A for 10 ms 1A for 10 ms 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw 5 to 50V dc sink Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) on = 0.1 ms / off = 1 ms ➁ Off-State Leakage (max.) 1 mA Load Current (min.) 1 mA ➂ Per Point Continuous Current Per Module (max.) On-State Voltage Drop (max.) ➃ (max.) Surge Current Per Point ➀ ➀ The 32-point output modules are fused to protect external wiring, one fuse per common. These fuses are non-replaceable and are rated at 2.5A. ➁ To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, 1/2W resistor. ➂ Recommended surge suppression for switching 24V dc inductive loads is a 1N4004 diode that is reverse wired across the load. See page 7 for more information on surge suppression. ➃ Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60 °C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range 0V dc 10V dc ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 0V dc 5V dc Operation Not Guaranteed (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Publication 1746-2.35 OV8, OV16 50V dc OV32 50V dc Recommended Operating Range Discrete Input and Output Modules 35 Circuit Diagrams VDC VDC OUT OUT 1746-OV8, OV16 0.39µF OUT 1K 1746-OV32 DC COM OUT COM 0.39µF 1K Wiring Diagrams 1746-OV16 1746-OV8 10–50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SINKING 10–50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SINKING VDC +DC VDC +DC OUT 0 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 3 CR OUT 2 10–50V dc OUT 3 10–50V dc OUT 4 CR OUT 5 CR OUT 6 OUT 7 DC COM 0 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 2 4 OUT 5 6 OUT 7 CR CR 10 OUT 9 11 OUT 10 12 OUT 11 13 OUT 12 15 OUT 14 14 OUT 13 CR CR CR CR –DC –DC OUT 15 17 16 CR CR CR DC COM SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 36 Discrete Input and Output Modules 1746-OV32 5–50V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT SINKING Wire Group 1 Wire Group 2 +VDC 1 VDC 1 CONNECTED INTERNALLY VDC 1 VDC 2 OUT0 CR OUT16 0 OUT1 CR 1 CR 2 3 4 4 OUT21 5 OUT6 5 OUT22 6 OUT7 6 OUT23 7 OUT8 7 OUT24 10 OUT9 11 12 CR 12 OUT27 13 OUT12 CR 13 OUT28 14 OUT13 14 OUT29 15 OUT14 15 OUT30 16 OUT15 16 OUT31 17 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY CR 11 OUT26 OUT11 CR CR 10 OUT25 OUT10 CR CR 3 OUT20 OUT5 CR CR 2 OUT19 OUT4 Connector Key CR 1 OUT18 OUT3 CR CR 0 OUT17 OUT2 CR +VDC 2 VDC 2 CONNECTED INTERNALLY 17 COM 1 COM 2 COM 1 COM 2 COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY DC Com2 DC Com1 SLC PLC Important: Each group has separate VDC and DC COM connections. The 1746 32-point modules include a keyed 40-pin female connector and crimp-type pins for connection to I/O wiring. In addition, 1492 prewired cables and interface modules can be used for connecting external I/O. (See pages 8 and 47.) Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 37 High Current Sinking DC Output Module (1746-OVP16) Catalog Number Specification 1746-OVP16 Voltage Category 24V dc Operating Voltage 20.4 to 26.4V dc sink Number of Outputs 16 Points per Common 16 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw 0.25A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) on = 0.1 ms / off = 1 ms ➂ Off-State Leakage (max.) 1 mA Load Current (min.) 1 mA Continuous Current (max.) (max ) Per Point Per Module 1.5A at 30°C / 1A at 60°C 6.4A at 0°C to 60°C 1V at 1A Per Point Per Module 4A for 10 ms 32A for 10 ms On-State Voltage Drop (max.) Surge Current ➀➁ (RTB) ➃ (max.) (max ) ➀ A fused common and blown fuse LED are provided on this module. ➁ The 1746-OVP16 provides fast turn-off delay for inductive loads. Fast off delay for inductive loads is accomplished with surge suppressors on this module. A suppressor at the load is not needed unless another contact is connected in series. If this is the case, a 1N4004 diode should be reverse wired across the load. This defeats the fast turn-off feature. Comparative turn-off delay times for 1746-OB8/-OV8 and 1746-OB16E, Series B and later/-OBP8, Series B and later/-OBP16/-OVP16, when switching Bulletin 100-B110 (24W sealed) contactor, are: 1746-OB8/-OV8 off delay = 152 ms; 1746-OB16E, Series B and later/-OBP8, Series B and later/-OBP16/-OVP16 off delay = 47 ms. ➂ To limit the effects of leakage current, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. For 24V dc operation use a 5.6k ohm, 1/2W resistor. ➃ Repeatability is once every 1 second at 30°C. Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 60°C. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Operating Voltage Range ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 0V dc 20.4V dc 26.4V dc Operation Not Guaranteed Recommended Operating Range (Voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Circuit and Wiring Diagrams 1746-OVP16 VDC 20.4–26.4V dc TRANSISTOR OUTPUT-SINKING +DC VDC OUT 0 8.87K OUT D G 6.19K 0 OUT 1 1 OUT 2 3 OUT 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 2 OUT 3 S CR 20.4–26.4V dc 4 OUT 5 OUT 7 CR 6 CR 10 OUT 9 11 OUT 10 12 OUT 11 13 OUT 12 15 OUT 14 14 OUT 13 CR 8.87K D G OUT CR –DC 6.19K S OUT 15 17 16 CR CR CR DC COM SLC PLC DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 38 Discrete Input and Output Modules Sinking TTL Output Module (1746-OG16) Catalog Number Specification 1746-OG16 (RTB) Voltage Category ➀ 5V dc TTL Operating Voltage Range 4.5 to 5.5V dc 50 mV peak-to-peak ripple maximum 495 MA maximum at 5V dc Number of Outputs 16 Points per Common 16 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw 0.180A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) on = 0.25 ms / off = 0.5 ms Off-State Leakage (max.) 0.1 mA Load Current (min.) 0.15 mA Continuous Current (max.) 24 mA ➀ TTL outputs are inverted (0–0.4V dc = low voltage = True = On). Use a NOT instruction in your ladder program to convert to traditional True = High logic. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. NA = not applicable. On/Off-State Voltage Range (Measure voltage from common terminal to output terminal.) + OUT 0V dc ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 4.5V dc 0.4V dc On-state – 5.5V dc Off-state Operation Not Guaranteed TTL inputs are inverted (0–0.4V dc = low voltage = True = On). COM Circuit and Wiring Diagrams +5DC 1746-OG16 TTL OUTPUT (Low = True) 74AC14 +DC VDC OUT L OUT 0 L OUT 1 L OUT 3 0 1 OUT 2 +5V dc L OUT 5 L OUT 7 L OUT 9 L OUT 11 L OUT 13 74AC14 OUT L –DC L 2 3 OUT 4 L 4 5 OUT 6 7 OUT 8 L 6 L 10 11 OUT 10 12 13 OUT 12 14 15 OUT 14 OUT 15 16 L L L 17 DC COM SLC PLC DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 39 AC/DC Input Module (1746-IN16) Catalog Number Specification 1746-IN16 (RTB) Voltage Category 24V ac/dc Operating Voltage 10 to 30V dc sink 10 to 30V ac at 47 to 63 Hz Number of Inputs 16 Points per Common Backplane Current Draw 16 5V 24V 0.085A 0.0A Signal Delay (max.) dc – on = 15 ms / off = 15 ms ac – on = 25 ms / off = 25 ms Off-State Voltage (max.) 3V dc 3V ac Off-State Current (max.) 1 mA dc 1 mA ac Nominal Input Current 8 mA at 24V dc 8 mA at 24V ac Inrush Current (max.) 0.02A (ac only) RTB = Removable Terminal Block. On/Off-State Voltage Range 0V ac 0V dc + Off IN ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ 3V ac 3V dc 10V ac 10V dc 30V ac 30V dc On-state Input State Not Guaranteed – COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Circuit and Wiring Diagrams 1746-IN16 24V ac/dc SINKING AC/DC COM L1 or +DC 1µF IN 270 IN 0 261 0 IN 1 2 IN 3 4 IN 5 1 IN 2 1870 3 IN 4 V ac/dc 5 IN 6 6 IN 7 7 IN 8 10 IN 9 11 IN 10 12 IN 11 13 IN 12 14 IN 13 1µF IN 270 1870 15 IN 14 261 L2 or –DC COMMONS CONNECTED INTERNALLY 16 IN 15 AC/DC COM 17 AC/DC COM SLC PLC Publication 1746-2.35 40 Discrete Input and Output Modules AC/DC Relay Output Modules (1746-OW4, -OW8, -OW16, -OX8) Catalog Number Specification 1746-OW4 1746-OW16 (RTB) 1746-OW8 1746-OX8 (RTB) Voltage Category ac/dc Relay Operating Voltage 5 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz / 5 to 125V dc Number of Outputs 4 8 16 8 Points per Common 4 4 8 Individually Isolated 0.045A 0.045A 0.085A 0.090A 0.170A 0.180A 0.085A 0.090A 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw Signal Delay (max.) (Resistive Load) on = 10 ms / off = 10 ms Off-State Leakage (max.) 0 mA Load Current (min.) 10 mA at 5V dc ➀ Continuous Current per Point (max.) Refer to the Relay Contact Ratings tables shown below. Continuous Current per Module (max.) 8.0A ac 16.0A ac 16.0A ac Current per Common (max.) 8.0A 8.0A 8.0A ➁ Relay Contact Ratings for 1746-OW4, OW8, and OW16 Amperes ➀ ac Make Break 240V ac 7.5A 0.75A 120V ac 15A 1.5A ➁ Continuous Make Break 2 5A 2.5A 1800 VA 180 VA ➂ 1.0A ➂ 2.0A 125V dc 0.22A 24V dc 1.2A dc Volt-Amperes Amperes p Maximum Volts 28 VA Relay Contact Ratings for 1746-OX8 Amperes ➀ Amperes p Maximum Volts ac Make Break 240V ac 15A 1.5A 120V ac 30A 3.0A 5 0A 5.0A ➂ 1.0A ➂ 2.0A 125V dc 0.22A 24V dc 1.2A dc Continuous Volt-Amperes ➁ Make Break 3600 VA 360 VA 28 VA ➀ Connecting surge suppressors across your external load will extend the life of SLC 500 relay contacts. For recommended surge suppressors when switching ac inductive loads, consult the SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style Installation and Operation User Manual (Publication 1747-6.2) or the SLC 500 Fixed Hardware Style Installation and Operation User Manual (Publication 1747-6.21). Recommended surge suppression for switching 24V dc inductive loads is a 1N4004 diode reverse wired across the load. ➁ The continuous current per module must be limited so the module power does not exceed 1440 VA. ➂ For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing the 28 VA by the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc = 0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A. RTB = Removable Terminal Block. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 41 Operating Voltage Range (For ac operation: voltage is applied between L1 and L2.) (For dc operation: voltage applied is between +VDC and DC common.) ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ 0 V 5V ac 0 V 5V dc 265V ac 125V dc Recommended Operating Range Operation Not Guaranteed Circuit Diagram VAC/VDC VAC/VDC OUT OUT 1746-OX8 1746-OW4, OW8, OW16 VDC/VAC OUT OUT Wiring Diagrams 1746-OW4 1746-OW8 RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT . VAC–VDC L1 or +DC L1 or +DC VAC–VDC 1 OUT 0 OUT 0 V ac/dc V ac/dc OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 2 CR OUT 3 CR L2 or –DC OUT 3 CR VAC VDC 2 NOT USED OUT 4 NOT USED OUT 5 L2 or –DC L1 or +DC V ac/dc 1746-OW16 OUT 6 CR OUT 7 CR L2 or –DC 1746-OX8 RELAY OUTPUT ISOLATED RELAY OUTPUT L1 or +DC V ac/dc CR CR VAC–VDC 1 OUT 1 1 OUT 3 3 OUT 5 5 OUT 7 7 OUT0 0 OUT 2 OUT 4 4 OUT 6 6 CR CR VAC–VDC 2 11 OUT 8 10 OUT 11 OUT 10 13 OUT 13 12 15 OUT 12 OUT 15 14 17 OUT 14 16 CR VAC–VDC 0 VS1 L1 VAC–VDC 1 VS2 VDC VAC–VDC 2 VS3 VDC VAC–VDC 3 L1 or +DC OUT 9 CR VS0 L1 2 L2 or –DC PLC CR NOT USED NOT USED OUT NOT7 USED SLC OUT 2 NOT USED VS4 L1 VAC–VDC 4 VS5 L1 VAC–VDC 5 OUT 0 CR CR L2 or –DC VS6 VDC VAC–VDC 6 VS7 VDC VAC–VDC 7 VS0 L2 OUT 1 VS1 L2 OUT 2 VS2 DC COM OUT 3 CR VS3 DC COM CR VS4 L2 NOT USED OUT 4 V ac/dc CR OUT 5 VS5 L2 OUT 6 VS6 DC COM OUT 7 CR VS7 DC COM Publication 1746-2.35 42 Discrete Input and Output Modules Combination Modules (1746-IO4, -IO8, -IO12) Catalog Number Specification 1746-IO4 1746-IO12 (RTB) 1746-IO8 Voltage Category inputs – 120V ac outputs – ac/dc Relay Operating Voltage inputs – 85 to 132V ac at 47 to 63 Hz outputs – 5 to 265V ac at 47 to 63 Hz / 5 to 125V dc Points per Common 2 4 6 2 inputs / 2 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 6 inputs / 6 outputs 0.030A 0.025A 0.060A 0.045A 0.090A 0.70A Continuous Current per Module 4.0A 8.0A 8.0A Specification Reference input same as 1746-IA4 output same as 1746-OW4 input same as 1746-IA4 output same as 1746-OW4 input same as 1746-IA16 output same as 1746-OW16 Points per Module 5V 24V Backplane Current Draw RTB = Removable Terminal Block On/Off-State Voltage Range (AC Inputs) IN – ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 30V ac 0V ac + Off-state 85V ac Input State Not Guaranteed 132V ac On-state COM (Measure voltage from common terminal to input terminal.) Operating Voltage Range (AC/DC Relay Outputs) (For ac operation: voltage is applied between L1 and L2.) (For dc operation: voltage is applied between +VDC and DC common.) Publication 1746-2.35 0 V 5V ac 0 V 5V dc ÉÉ ÉÉ Operation Not Guaranteed 265V ac 125V dc Recommended Operating Range Discrete Input and Output Modules 43 Circuit Diagram V ac Input 270 Relay Output 1870 VAC/VDC AC COM 261 1µF 1M OUT 0.3µF IN 270 1870 1µF OUT 261 1M 0.3µF IN Wiring Diagrams 1746-IO4 100/120V AC INPUT 1746-IO8 RELAY OUTPUT 100/120V AC INPUT L1 or +DC VAC–VDC OUT 0 OUT 1 L1 OUT 0 V ac/dc L2 or –DC OUT 1 NOT USED OUT 2 CR NOT USED OUT 3 CR L1 IN 0 L2 L2 or –DC IN 0 IN 1 100/120 V ac L1 or +DC VAC–VDC V ac/dc CR RELAY OUTPUT IN 1 100/120 V ac NOT USED NOT USED OUT 7 AC COM IN 2 IN 3 OUT 7 AC COM L2 1746-IO12 100/120V AC INPUT L1 or +DC RELAY OUTPUT VAC–VDC OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 V ac OUT 3 OUT 4 CR OUT 5 L2 or –DC CR NOT USED L1 NOT USED IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 100/120 V ac IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 L2 NOT USED NOT USED AC COM Publication 1746-2.35 44 Discrete Input and Output Modules Fixed I/O Chassis Module Compatibility The following chart depicts the range of current combinations supported by the fixed I/O expansion chassis. To use it, you must first determine the backplane current draw and operating voltage for both of the modules you plan to use in the chassis. You can get these specifications from the Power Supply Loading table on page 45. Next, plot each of the currents on the chart below. If the point of intersection falls within the operating region, your combination is valid. If not, your combination cannot be used in a 2-slot, fixed I/O chassis. 450 Example: Plot IN16 and NIO4V IN16 = 0.085A at 5V dc and 0A at 24V dc. NIO4V = 0.055A at 5V dc and 0.115A at 24V dc 400 350 2. Plot this point on the chart above (140 mA at 5V dc). 300 4. Plot current draw at 24V dc (115mA at 24V dc). Current (mA) at 5V dc 1. Add current draws of both modules at 5V dc to get 0.14A (140 mA). 3. Add current draws of both modules at 24V dc to get 0.115A (115 mA). OA16 and IA16 (0, 455) 250 200 OW16 and IA16 (180, 255) Valid Operating Region 150 5. Note the point of intersection on the chart above (marked x). This combination falls within the valid operating region for your fixed I/O chassis. x Plotted from Example Shown Below 100 50 50 100 150 200 Current (mA) at 24V dc Important: The NO4I and NO4V analog output modules may require an external power supply. Refer to your analog user’s manual. Important: There are certain conditions that affect the compatibility characteristics of the BASIC module (BAS) and the DH-485/RS-232C module (KE). When you use the BAS module or the KE module to supply power to a 1747-AIC Link Coupler, the Link Coupler draws its power through the module. The higher current drawn by the AIC at 24V dc is calculated and recorded in the tables for the modules identified as BASn (BAS networked) or KEn (KE networked). Make sure to refer to these modules if your application uses the BAS or KE module in this way. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules 45 Power Supply Loading Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current at 5V (Amps) Maximum Current at 24V (Amps) 1746-IA4 0.035 1746-IA8 Maximum Current at 24V (Amps) 0 1746-OA8 0.185 0 0.050 0 1746-OA16 0.370 0 0.170 0 ➀ 1746sc-IA8I 0.110 0 ➀ 1746sc-OAP8I 1746-IA16 0.085 0 1746-OAP12 0.370 0 1746-IB8 0.050 0 1746-OB8 0.135 0 ➀ 1746sc-IB8I 0.110 0 1746-OB16 0.280 0 1746-IB16 0.085 0 1746-OB16E 0.135 0 1746-IB32 0.106 0 1746-OB32 0.452 0 0.110 0 1746-OBP8 0.135 0 1746-IC16 0.085 0 1746-OBP16 0.250 0 1746-IG16 0.140 0 1746-OG16 0.180 0 1746-IH16 0.085 0 1746-OV8 0.135 0 1746-IM4 0.035 0 1746-OV16 0.270 0 1746-IM8 0.050 0 1746-OV32 0.452 0 ➀ 1746sc-IM8I 0.110 0 1746-OVP16 0.250 0 1746-IM16 0.085 0 1746-OW4 0.045 0.045 1746-IN16 0.085 0 1746-OW8 0.085 0.090 1746-ITB16 0.085 0 1746-OW16 0.170 0.180 1746-ITV16 0.085 0 1746-OX8 0.085 0.090 1746-IV8 0.050 0 1746-IO4 0.030 0.025 1746-IO8 0.060 0.045 1746-IO12 0.090 0.070 1746sc-IC8I Discrete Input p M d l Modules Catalog Numbers Maximum Current at 5V (Amps) Hardware Component ➀ 1746-IV16 0.085 0 1746-IV32 0.106 0 Discrete Output Modules Discrete Input Inp t & Output Modules ➀ Sold and supported by Spectrum Controls, Inc., Bellevue, WA. For additional information contact Spectrum at (206)746-9481. Publication 1746-2.35 46 Discrete Input and Output Modules Discrete I/O Power Dissipation The table below lists the power dissipation for the discrete I/O modules operating at nominal voltage. The following terms are used in the Power Dissipation table: Watts per Point Minimum Watts The heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring point when energized at nominal voltage. The amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field power present. Total Watts The watts per point plus the minimum watts (with all points energized). For examples on calculating system heat dissipation, refer to the SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style Installation and Operation User Manual (Publication 1747-6.2) or the SLC 500 Fixed Hardware Style Installation and Operation User Manual (Publication 1747-6.21). Power Dissipation Catalog Numbers Watts per Point Minimum Watts Total Watts Catalog Numbers Watts per Point Minimum Watts Total Watts 1746-IA4 0.27 0.175 1.30 1746-OA8 1.000 0.925 9.00 1746-IA8 0.27 0.250 2.40 1746-OA16 0.462 1.850 9.30 0.43 0.550 4.00 1746sc-OAP8I 1.125 0.850 9.85 1746-IA16 0.27 0.425 4.80 1746-OAP12 1.000 1.850 10.85 1746-IB8 0.20 0.250 1.90 1746-OB8 0.775 0.675 6.90 0.31 0.550 3.00 1746-OB16 0.338 1.40 7.60 1746-IB16 0.20 0.425 3.60 1746-OB16E 0.150 0.675 3.07 1746-IB32 0.20 0.530 6.90 1746-OB32 0.078 2.26 4.80 0.49 0.550 4.50 1746-OBP8 0.300 0.675 3.08 1746-IC16 0.22 0.425 3.95 1746-OBP16 0.310 1.250 6.26 1746-IG16 0.02 0.700 1.00 1746-OG16 0.033 0.900 1.50 1746-IH16 0.32 0.217 5.17 1746-OV8 0.775 0.675 6.90 1746-IM4 0.35 0.175 1.60 1746-OV16 0.388 1.400 7.60 1746-IM8 0.35 0.250 3.10 1746-OV32 0.078 2.26 4.80 ➀ 1746sc-IM8I 0.76 0.550 6.60 1746-OVP16 0.310 1.250 6.26 1746-IM16 0.35 0.425 6.00 1746-OW4 0.133 1.310 1.90 1746-IN16 0.35 0.425 6.00 1746-OW8 0.138 2.590 3.70 1746-ITB16 0.20 0.425 3.60 1746-OW16 0.033 5.170 5.70 1746-ITV16 0.20 0.425 3.60 1746-OX8 0.825 2.590 8.60 0.75 1.60 1746sc-IA8I 1746sc-IB8I ➀ ➀ 1746sc-IC8I ➀ ➀ 1746-IV8 0.20 0.250 1.90 1746-IO4 0.27 per input point 0.133 per output point 1746-IV16 0.20 0.425 3.60 1746-IO8 0.27 per input point 0.133 per output point 1.38 3.00 1746-IV32 0.20 0.530 6.90 1746-IO12 0.27 per input point 0.133 per output point 2.13 4.60 ➀ Sold and supported by Spectrum Controls, Inc., Bellevue, WA. For additional information, contact Spectrum at (206) 746-9481. Publication 1746-2.35 Discrete Input and Output Modules Environmental Specifications 47 ➀ Operating Temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F) Storage Temperature –40°C to 85°C (–40°F to 185°F) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing) Noise Immunity NEMA standard ICS 2–230 Vibration (Operating) Displacement 0.015 inch peak at 5–57 Hz. Acceleration 2.5Gs at 57–2000 Hz Shock (Operating) 30Gs (all modules except relay contact). 10Gs (relay contact modules, 1746-OW, -OX, I/O Combo). Isolation ➁ Certification 1500 Volts ➂➃ UL listed. CSA or C-UL approved as indicated by product markings. CE compliant for all applicable directives when product or packaging is marked. Hazardous Environment Class ➃ Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Hazardous Environment ➀ Exceptions are indicated with certain modules. ➁ Electro-optical isolation between I/O terminals and control logic ➂ Some modules are not CE marked. See page 2. ➃ All modules meet Class I, Division 2 requirements for hazardous location. Some modules are rated Class I, Division 2 by CSA only. See page 2. Accessories The following accessories are available for use with discrete I/O modules: Catalog Number Item Description 1746-N2 Modular chassis slot filler Helps prevent debris from entering the SLC enclosure that can cause shorts or improper operation. 1492-IFMxx Feed-through interface modules Connects electronic wiring (discrete I/O modules, particularly 16- and 32-point) to electric wiring (factory devices). Available with either 20 or 40 terminals. 1492-CABLExx Cables: – 1 m. (3.3 ft.) – 2.5 m. (8.2 ft.) – 5 m. (16.4 ft.) Connects directly to the 1492-IFMxx interface module and is available with a removable terminal block or a ready-to-wire free end. Connector kit This kit allows you to create your own cable (3.2 meters max.) if the Catalog Number 1746-C15 cable is not long enough. It contains one female connector and 45 crimp contacts. Note: 32-point modules are shipped with one connector kit. 1746-N3 Publication 1746-2.35 Allen-Bradley Support In today’s competitive environment, when you buy any product, you expect that product to meet your needs. You also expect the manufacturer of that product to back it up with the kind of customer service and product support that will prove you made a wise purchase. As the people who design, engineer and manufacture your Industrial Automation Control equipment, Allen-Bradley has a vested interest in your complete satisfaction with our products and services. Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with 75 Sales/Support offices, 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States, plus Allen-Bradley representatives in every major country in the world. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for: • • • • sales and order support product technical training warranty support support service agreements PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation. SLC, SLC 500, SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, Data Highway Plus, and PanelView are trademarks of Rockwell Automation. A.I. Series and RSLogix 500 are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc. Allen-Bradley, a Rockwell Automation Business, has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years. We design, manufacture and support a broad range of automation products worldwide. They include logic processors, power and motion control devices, operator interfaces, sensors and a variety of software. Rockwell is one of the world’s leading technology companies. Worldwide representation. Argentina • Australia • Austria • Bahrain • Belgium • Brazil • Bulgaria • Canada • Chile • China, PRC • Colombia • Costa Rica • Croatia • Cyprus • Czech Republic • Denmark • Ecuador • Egypt • El Salvador • Finland • France • Germany • Greece • Guatemala • Honduras • Hong Kong • Hungary • Iceland • India • Indonesia • Ireland • Israel • Italy • Jamaica • Japan • Jordan • Korea • Kuwait • Lebanon • Malaysia • Mexico • Netherlands • New Zealand • Norway • Pakistan • Peru • Philippines • Poland • Portugal • Puerto Rico • Qatar • Romania • Russia–CIS • Saudi Arabia • Singapore • Slovakia • Slovenia • South Africa, Republic • Spain • Sweden • Switzerland • Taiwan • Thailand • Turkey • United Arab Emirates • United Kingdom • United States • Uruguay • Venezuela • Yugoslavia Allen-Bradley Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414 382-2000 Fax: (1) 414 382-4444 Publication 1746-2.35 – March 1998 Supersedes Publication 1746-2.35 – December 1996 Publication 1746-2.35 E 1998 Rockwell International Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors (Catalog Numbers 1747–L511, –L514, – L524, –L531, –L532, –L541, –L542, –L543, – L551, –L552, –L553) Product Data The SLC 500 product line allows you to build just the right control system to meet your needs. We offer four chassis sizes, five power supplies, eleven processors, and a wide variety of I/O modules. Additionally, we offer flexible communication options and programming and operator interface options. The SLC 500 family of programmable controllers have expanded to meet a broader range of applications. From high–speed packaging and material handling applications to advanced process control applications, Allen–Bradley offers the right processor for your job. The SLC 5/03™ , SLC 5/04™ and SLC 5/05™ processors offer features previously found only on high– level Plus. The SLC 500 processors provide a broad range of communication options, including DH–485, RS–232, DH+, and Ethernet. Increased instruction support with ASCII, floating point math, and indirect addressing allows you to expand your application’s capabilities. Publication 1747-2.39 2 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Features and Benefits Supports user memory sizes from 1K to 64K. By offering a wide range of user memory, SLC 500 modular processors can be used in a wide variety of applications. Supports a variety of input and output modules. The 1746 modular I/O system offers over 60 types of modules, allowing you to customize your control solution to meet your application needs. Supports I/O configurations of up to 3 chassis (30 local I/O slots). Provides you with the flexibility to expand I/O capacity as required. Supports remote I/O and DeviceNet. The SLC 5/02 and above processors support up to 4096 discrete inputs and 4096 discrete outputs which may be a mix of local or remote I/O as well as I/O on DeviceNet. Provides superior system throughput. SLC 500 modular processors deliver fast overall system throughput times, providing fast response in high–speed applications. Supports Ethernet communication. The SLC 5/05 processors support 10 Mbps Ethernet communication and use the TCP/IP protocol. The 10Base–T Ethernet channel provides an economical connection to your Ethernet network. Supports Data Highway Plus™ (DH+) communication. The SLC 5/04 processor provides communication and seamless integration into the larger Allen–Bradley PLC–5® network. Supports DH– 485 communication. Communication via the DH–485 network is available in every processor we ship, reducing your system cost for processor communication. Provides a second channel for RS– 232 communication for the SLC 5/ 03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors. This allows: • dial up for remote monitoring and programming • networking over modems for SCADA master/slave RTU applications • an alternate connection for operator interfaces freeing up peer–to–peer network • direct communication to ASCII devices such as bar code decoders and serial printers via a complete set of ASCII ladder instructions which simplify programming. Provides user– selectable program security. The wide range of system protection capabilities allow you to secure user data and program files from changes. Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 3 Supports a host of third– party products through the Allen– Bradley Encompass Program. The Encompass Program provides access to products and services that increase your application capabilities. Overview of the Processors The SLC 500 processor product line offers five types of chassis– based processors. SLC 5/01™ Processor (Catalog # 1747–L511 or 1747–L514) The SLC 5/01 processor offers the instruction set of the SLC 500 fixed controller in a modular hardware configuration. The SLC 5/ 01 processor provides: • two choices of program memory size - 1K or 4K instructions • control of up to 3840 input and output points • powerful ladder logic programming instruction set • subroutines • a DH–485 communication channel (peer–to–peer communication response to message commands only) • capacitor backup for the –L511; battery backup for the – L514 SLC 5/02™ Processor (Catalog # 1747–L524) The SLC 5/02 processor offers additional instructions, increased diagnostics, faster throughput, and additional peer–to–peer communication options; building on what the SLC 5/01 processors offer. The SLC 5/02 processor provides: • program memory size of 4K instructions • control of up to 4096 input and output points • PID - used to provide closed loop process control • indexed addressing • interrupt capability • user fault routines • ability to handle 32–bit signed math functions • built–in DH–485 communication channel (initiation of peer– to–peer communication) • battery–backed RAM Publication 1747-2.39 4 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors SLC 5/03™ Processor (Catalog # 1747–L531 and 1747–L532) The SLC 5/03 processor significantly increases performance by supplying system throughput times of 1 ms for a typical 1K user program. Now applications such as high–speed packaging, sorting, and material handling become more affordable. With the addition of online editing, the SLC 5/03 processor presents a positive solution for your continuous process application. A built–in RS–232 channel gives you the flexibility to connect to external intelligent devices without the need for additional modules. The SLC 5/03 processor provides: • program memory size of 8K or 16K • control of up to 4096 input and output points • online programming (includes runtime editing) • built–in DH–485 channel • built–in RS–232 channel, supporting: — DF1 Full–Duplex for point–to–point communication; remotely via a modem, or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices. (Use a 1747–CP3 cable for direct connection.) — DF1 Half–Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type (point–to–multipoint) communication — DH–485 (Serves as a second DH–485 channel. Use a 1761–NET–AIC with a 1747–CP3 cable to connect to the DH–485 network.) — ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales • remote I/O passthru • built–in real–time clock/calendar • 2 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) • 0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII) • advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential, floating point, and the compute instruction • indirect addressing • flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS • optional flash EPROM memory module available • keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults) • battery–backed RAM Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 5 SLC 5/04™ Processor (Catalog # 1747–L541, –L542, or –L543) The SLC 5/04 processor provides the baseline functionality of the SLC 5/03 processor plus DH+ communication. Communication via DH+ takes place 3 to 12 times faster than DH–485, providing you with increased performance levels. In addition, the SLC 5/04 processor runs approximately 15% faster than the SLC 5/03 processor. The SLC 5/04 processor provides: • program memory sizes of 16K, 32K, or 64K • high–speed performance - 0.90 ms/K typical • control of up to 4096 input and output points • online programming (includes runtime editing) • built–in DH+ channel, supporting: — high–speed communication (57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud) — messaging capabilities with SLC 500, PLC–2® , PLC– 5® , and PLC–5/250 processors • built–in RS–232 channel, supporting: — DF1 Full–Duplex for point–to–point communication; remotely via a modem, or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices. (Use a 1747–CP3 cable for direct connection.) — DF1 Half–Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type (point–to–multipoint) communication — DH–485 (Use a 1761–NET–AIC with a 1747–CP3 cable to connect to the DH–485 network.) — ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales • channel–to–channel (DH+ to DH–485) passthru capability to operator interface devices • channel–to–channel (DF1 Full–Duplex to DH+) passthru (OS401 and later only) • remote I/O passthru • built–in real–time clock/calendar • 1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) • 0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII) • advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential, floating point, and the compute instruction • indirect addressing • flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS • optional flash EPROM memory module available • keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults) • battery–backed RAM Publication 1747-2.39 6 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors SLC 5/05™ Processor (Catalog # 1747–L551, –L552, or –L553) The SLC 5/05 processor provides identical functionality as the SLC 5/04 processor using standard Ethernet communications. Ethernet communication takes place at 10 Mbps, providing you with a high performance network for program upload/download, on–line editing, and peer–to–peer messaging. The variety of memory sizes allows you to closely match your application needs. The SLC 5/05 provides: • program memory sizes of 16K, 32K, or 64K • high–speed performance - 0.90 ms/K typical • control of up to 4096 input and output points • online programming (includes runtime editing) • built–in 10Base–T Ethernet channel, supporting: — high–speed computer communication using TCP/IP — messaging capabilities with SLC 5/05, PLC–5, and PLC–5/250 processors, 1785–ENET Ethernet interface module, and 1756–ENET Ethernet bridge — SNMP for standard Ethernet network management — BOOTP for optional dynamic IP address assignment • built–in RS–232 channel, supporting: — DF1 Full–Duplex for point–to–point communication; remotely via a modem, or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices. (Use a 1747–CP3 cable for direct connection.) — DF1 Half–Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type (point–to–multipoint) communication — DH–485 (Use a 1761–NET–AIC with a 1747–CP3 cable to connect to the DH–485 network.) — ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales • remote I/O passthru • built–in real–time clock/calendar • 1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) • 0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII) • advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential, floating point, and the compute instruction • indirect addressing • logical ASCII addressing • flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS • optional flash EPROM memory module available • keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults) • battery–backed RAM Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors System Throughput 7 When your application requires high–speed processing it requires more than just fast instruction or program scan times. It requires speed from the time an input is read until the time an output is turned on. The SLC 500 processors improve performance in every phase of system throughput, from input and output scans, to program scans and housekeeping functions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ublication 1747-2.39 8 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Interrupt Subroutines The following interrupt subroutines allow you to provide predetermined responses to special events in an application. Selectable Timed Interrupt This function allows you to interrupt the scan of the processor automatically, on a periodic basis, in order to scan a specified subroutine file. When using an SLC 5/02 processor, the Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) timebase can be adjusted in 10 ms increments. The timebase for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can be adjusted in 1 ms increments. The SLC 5/03 processor begins at 2 ms STI, and the SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 processors begin at 1 ms STI. Discrete Input Interrupt Use the Discrete Input Interrupt (DII) for high–speed processing applications or any application that needs to respond to an event quickly. This function allows the processor to execute a ladder subroutine when the input bit pattern of a discrete I/O card matches a compare value that you programmed. The discrete input interrupt is examined every 100 µs asynchronous to the ladder program scan. You may also specify the number of counts (matches) to occur before subroutine execution. I/O Event Interrupt This function allows the 1746–BAS (BASIC) module to interrupt the normal processor operating cycle in order to scan a specified subroutine file. Use this interrupt with SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors. Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors Communication Options 9 The SLC 500 processors support different types of communication options. The following sections describe the physical connections and protocol options used by the processors. Physical Connection Options Ethernet (10Base–T) channel offers: • 10 Mbps communication rate • ISO/IEC 8802–3STD 802.3 (RJ45) connector for 10Base–T media • TCP/IP communication protocol • built–in isolation Data Highway Plus (DH+) channel offers: • communication rates of 57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud • maximum network length of 3,048 m (10,000 ft.) at 57.6K baud • Belden 9463 (blue hose) cable connection between nodes (daisy chain connection) • built–in isolation DH–485 channel offers: • configurable communication rates up to 19.2K baud • electrical isolation via the 1747–AIC or 1761–NET–AIC • maximum network length of 1219m (4,000 ft.) • RS–485 electrical specifications • Belden 9842 or Belden 3106A cable connection between nodes (daisy chain connection) RS–232 channel offers: • communication rates up to 19.2K baud (38.4K baud SLC 5/ 05) • maximum distance between devices is 15.24 m (50 ft.) • RS–232C (EIA–232) electrical specifications • modem support • built–in isolation Publication 1747-2.39 10 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors The table below summarizes the SLC 500 processor channel connections. Processor Physical Communication Channel RS-232a DH-485 SLC 5/01 DH-485 protocol SLC 5/02 DH-485 protocol Channel 0 Channel 0 SLC 5/04 DH-485 protocol DH-485, DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex Master/ Slave, and ASCII protocols DH+ protocol Channel 1 Channel 0 SLC 5/05 Ethernet DH-485, DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex Master/ Slave, and ASCII protocols SLC 5/03 Channel 1 DH+ DH-485, DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex Master/ Slave, and ASCII protocols Ethernet TCP/IP protocol Channel 1 a.A 1761-NET-AIC (or 1747-AIC) is required when connecting to a DH-485 network. Protocol Options Ethernet TCP/IP Protocol Standard Ethernet, utilizing the TCP/IP protocol, is used as the backbone network in many office and industrial buildings. Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps. This network provides the same capabilities as DH+ or DH–485 networks, plus: • SNMP support for Ethernet network management • optional dynamic configuration of IP addresses using a BOOTP utility • SLC 5/05 Ethernet data rate up to 40 times faster than SLC 5/04 DH+ messaging • ability to message entire SLC 5/05 data files • much greater number of nodes on a single network possible compared to DH–485 (32) and DH+ (64) Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 11 Data Highway Plus (DH+) Protocol The Data Highway Plus protocol is used by the PLC–5 family of processors and the SLC 5/04 processor. This protocol is similar to DH–485, except that it can support up to 64 devices (nodes) and runs at faster communication (baud) rates. DH–485 Protocol The SLC 500 processors have a DH–485 channel that supports the DH–485 communication network. This network is a multi– master, token–passing network protocol capable of supporting up to 32 devices (nodes). This protocol allows: • monitoring of data and processor status, along with program uploading and downloading of any device on the network from one location • SLC processors to pass data to each other (peer–to–peer communication) • operator interface devices on the network to access data from any SLC processor on the network DF1 Full–Duplex Protocol DF1 Full–Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point–to– point protocol) allows two devices to communicate with each other at the same time. This protocol allows: • transmission of information across modems (dial–up, leased line, radio, or direct cable connections) • communication to occur between Allen–Bradley products and third–party products DF1 Half–Duplex Protocol (Master and Slave) DF1 Half–Duplex protocol provides a multi–drop single master/ multiple slave network capable of supporting up to 255 devices (nodes). This protocol also provides modem support and is ideal for SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) applications because of the network capability. ASCII Protocol The ASCII protocol provides connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent devices. Publication 1747-2.39 12 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors System Protection Options The SLC 500 family of processors offer a number of hardware and software security features that allow you to protect your system from unauthorized changes to program or data files. The different types of protection are: SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 Password • • • Future Access (OEM Lock) • • • Program Owner • • • Types of Protection Program Files Data Table Files • • • Memory Module Data File Overwrite • Memory Module Program Compare • Memory Module Write Protection • Force Protection • Keyswitch • Communication Channel Protection Publication 1747-2.39 • SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors I/O Usages 13 The SLC 500 family of processors support a variety of I/O modules, allowing you to exactly match your application. The following table lists the various types of I/O modules and their compatibility with the SLC 500 processors. SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 1746– Discrete Input/Output AC/DC • • • 1746sc–Isolated Discrete Input/Output AC/DCa • • • 1746– Analog Modules • • • 1746sc–Isolated Analog Modules • • • 1746– NT4 and 1746– INT4 Thermocouple Modules and 1746sc– NT8 Isolated Thermocouple Module • • • 1746– NR4 RTD Input Module • • • 1747– SN Remote I/O Scanner Module • • 1746– SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module • • I/O Module 1746– BAS Basic Module • • • 1747– KE DH–485/RS232 KE Module • • • 1746– HSCE High– Speed Counter Encoder Module • • 1746– HSTP1 Stepper Controller Module • • • • 1746– HS IMC 110 Servo Controller Module • 1746– HSRV Servo Control Module • 1746– QV Open– Loop Velocity Control Module • • 1746– BTM Barrel Temperature Module • • 1746– QS Synchronized Axes Module • • a.Sold and supported by Spectrum Controls, Inc., Bellevue, WA. For additional information, contact Spectrum at (206) 746-9481. Publication 1747-2.39 14 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Programming Instructions The following programming instructions are used with the SLC 500 processors. Included are instruction execution times (µs) for the processors when the instruction is True and when floating point math is used and the instruction is True. Basic Instructions Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Name Function Conditional Instructions Input or Output SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 XIC Examine if Closed 4 2.4 0.44 0.37 Conditional instruction. True when bit is on (1). XIO Examine if Open 4 2.4 0.44 0.37 Conditional instruction. True when bit is off (0). OTE Output Energize 18 11 0.63 0.56 Output instruction. True (1) when conditions preceding it are true. False when conditions preceding it go false. 0.56 Output instruction. Addressed bit goes true (1) when conditions preceding the OTL instruction are true. When conditions go false, OTL remains true until the rung containing an OTU instruction with the same address goes true. OTL Output Latch 19 11 0.63 OTU Output Unlatch 19 11 0.63 0.56 Output instruction. Addressed bit goes false (0) when conditions preceding the OTU instruction are true. Remains false until the rung containing an OTL instruction with the same address goes true. OSR One-Shot Rising 34 20 10.80 9.10 Conditional instruction. Makes rung true for one scan upon each false– to– true transition of conditions preceding it in the rung. TON Timer On-Delay 135 83 1.40 1.31 Counts time intervals when conditions preceding it in the rung are true. Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches preset value. TOF Timer Off-Delay 140 86 1.40 1.31 Counts time intervals when conditions preceding it in the rung are false. Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches preset value. RTO Retentive Timer 140 86 1.40 1.31 This is an On– Delay timer that retains its accumulated value when: • Rung conditions go false. • The mode changes to program from run or test. • The processor loses power. • A fault occurs. CTU Count Up 111 69 1.40 1.31 Counts up for each false– to– true transition of conditions preceding it in the rung. Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches the preset value. CTD Count Down 111 69 1.40 1.31 Counts down for each false– to–true transition of conditions preceding it in the rung. Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches preset value. 1.31 Used with timers and counters. When conditions preceding it in the rung are true, the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and control bits of the timer or counter. RES Reset Publication 1747-2.39 40 26 1.40 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 15 Comparison Instructions Execution Times (µs) Floating Point (µs) a b Instruction Mnemonic and Name Function Conditional (Input) Instructions SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 EQU Equal 60 38 1.25/12.94 1.12 / 12.5 Instruction is true when source A = source B. NEQ Not Equal 60 38 1.25 / 13.25 1.12 / 12.18 Instruction is true when source A =/ source B. LES Less Than 60 38 1.25 / 13.19 1.12 / 13.94 Instruction is true when source A < source B. LEQ Less Than or Equal 60 38 1.25 / 13.19 1.12 / 13.93 Instruction is true when source A < source B. GRT Greater Than 60 38 1.25 / 14.82 1.12 / 12.62 Instruction is true when source A > source B. GEQ Greater Than or Equal 60 38 1.25 / 14.81 1.12 / 14.31 Instruction is true when source A > source B. MEQ Masked Comparison for Equal LIM Limit Test 75 47 38 22.75 Compares 16– bit data of a source address to 16– bit data at a reference address through a mask. If the values match, the instruction is true. - 45 1.95 / 22.81 1.68 / 20.19 True/false status of the instruction depends on how a test value compares to specified low and high limits. a.Floating point times do not apply to SLC 5/03 OS300 processors. b.When only one Execution Time is listed for an instruction, Floating Point does not apply. Publication 1747-2.39 16 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Math Instructions Execution Times (µs) Floating Point (µs) b c Instruction Mnemonic and Namea Function Output Instructions SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 Add Add 122 76 1.70 / 38.44 1.50 / 18.22 When rung conditions are true, the ADD instruction adds source A to source B and stores the result in the destination. SUB Subtract 125 77 1.70 / 38.19 1.50 / 19.50 When rung conditions are true, the SUB instruction subtracts source B from source A and stores the result in the destination. MUL Multiply 230 140 20 / 39.05 17.75 / 21.94 When rung conditions are true, the MUL instruction multiplies source A by source B and stores the result in the destination. 25.9 / 23.27 When rung conditions are true, the DIV instruction divides source A by source B and stores the result in the destination and the math register. DIV Divide 400 242 23 / 57.56 DDV Double Divide 650 392 33 29.6 When rung conditions are true, the DDV instruction divides the contents of the math register by the source and stores the result in the destination and the math register. NEG Negate 110 68 1.70 / 12.38 1.5 / 11.87 When rung conditions are true, the NEG instruction changes the sign of the source and places it in the destination. CLR Clear 40 26 1.70 / 6.62 1.5 / 5.94 When rung conditions are true, the CLR instruction clears the destination to zero. SQR Square Root — 162 32.00 / 70.00 28.8 / 18.87 SCL Scale — 480 d / 32.00 d / 33.06 SCP Scale with Parameters — — 33.10 / 196.10 29.85 / 94.15 CPT Compute Publication 1747-2.39 — — d / 8.8 d / 7.7 When rung conditions are true, the SQR instruction calculates the square root of the source and places the result in the destination. When rung conditions are true, the SCL instruction multiplies the source by a specified rate. The result is added to an offset value and placed in the destination. Produces a scaled output value that has a linear relationship between the input and scaled values. Evaluates an expression and stores the result in the destination. To get the total execution time for a CPT instruction, take the CPT execution time plus each additional math instruction execution time, plus the number of math instructions times 3.01. For example if an SLC 5/03 CPT instruction calls one ADD and one SUB instruction, the calculation is: 8.8 + 1.70 + 1.70 + 2(3.01) = 18.22 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 17 SWP Swap — — 24 + 13.09 per word 22.6 + 12.13 per word Swaps the low and high bytes of a specified number of words in a bit integer, ASCII, or string file. ABS Absolute Value — — 9.95 / 5.20 8.60 / 4.35 Calculates the absolute value of the source and places the result in the destination. XPY X to the Power of Y Register/Data — — d / 699.30 d /335.10 Raises a value to a power and stores the result in the destination. LOG Log to the Base 10 — — d / 390.80 d / 54.55 Takes the log base 10 of the value in the source and stores the result in the destination. LN Natural Log — — d / 392.00 d / 51.35 Takes the natural log of the value in the source and stores it in the destination. SIN Sine — — d / 311.95 d / 38.05 Takes the sine of a number and stores the result in the destination. COS Cosine — — d / 310.90 d / 37.20 Takes the cosine of a number and stores the result in the destination. TAN Tangent — — d / 406.35 d / 43.00 Takes the tangent of a number and stores the result in the destination. ASN Arc Sine — — d / 483.05 d / 41.45 Takes the arc sine of a number and stores the result (in radians) in the destination. ACS Arc Cosine — — d / 510.85 d / 51.90 Takes the arc cosine of a number and stores the result (in radians) in the destination. ATN Arc Tangent — — d / 387.05 d / 40.15 Takes the arc tangent of a number and stores the result (in radians) in the destination. a.Applies to SLC 5/03 OS302, SLC 5/04 OS401 and SLC 5/05 OS500 processors. b.Floating point times do not apply to SLC 5/03 OS300 processors. c.When only one Execution time is listed for an instruction, Floating Point does not apply. d.The execution times assum floating point data. If signed interger data is used, add 15 microseconds per instruction execution time. Publication 1747-2.39 18 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Data Handling Instructions Instruction Mnemonic and Name Execution Times (µs) Floating Point (µs) b c Function Output Instructions SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 TOD Convert to BCD 200 122 38 34.06 When rung conditions are true, the TOD instruction converts the source value to BCD and stores it in the math register or the destination. FRD Convert from BCD 223 136 31 23.88 When rung conditions are true, the FRD instruction converts a BCD value in the math register or the source to an integer and stores it in the destination. RAD Degrees to Radiansa — — d / 24.65 When rung conditions are true, RAD converts degrees (source) to radians and stores the result in the destination. DEG Radians to Degrees a — — d / 32.80 d / 24.70 When rung conditions are true, DEG converts radians (source) to degrees and stores the result in the destination. DCD Decode 80 50 10 8.88 When rung conditions are true, the DCD instruction decodes 4–bit value (0 to 16), turning on the corresponding bit in 16– bit destination. COP File Copy 45 + 21 per word / 31.80 d 29 + 13 per 30 + 2.20 per word word 20.2 + 2.0 per word When rung conditions are true, the COP instruction copies a user– defined source file to the destination file. 21.9 + 2.5 per word When rung conditions are true, the FLL instruction loads a source value into specified elements in a user–defined file. FLL File Fill 37 + 14 per word 25 + 8 per word 28 + 2 per word MOV Move 20 14 MVM Masked Move 115 71 19 17.40 When rung conditions are true, the MVM instruction moves a copy of the source through a mask to the destination. AND And 87 55 1.70 1.5 When rung conditions are true, sources A and B of the AND instruction are ANDed and stored in the destination. OR Inclusive Or 87 55 1.70 1.5 When rung conditions are true, sources A and B of the OR instruction are ORed bit by bit and stored in the destination. XOR Exclusive Or 87 55 1.70 1.5 When rung conditions are true, sources A and B of the XOR instruction are Exclusive ORed and stored in destination. NOT Not 66 42 1.70 1.5 When rung conditions are true, the source of the NOT instruction is NOTed bit by bit and stored in the destination. FFL Load — 150 58 40.75 FFU Unload — LFL Load — 150 58 40.70 LFU Unload — 180 66 34.70 1.25 / 12.19 1.12 / 11.44 150 + 11 per 79 + 2.20 per word word 60 + 2 per word When rung conditions are true, the MOV instruction moves a copy of the source to the destination. First In First Out (FIFO). The FFL instruction loads a word into a FIFO stack on successive false–to–true transitions. The FFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false– to– true transitions. The first word loaded is the first to be unloaded. Last In First Out (LIFO). The LFL instruction loads a word into a LIFO stack on successive false– to– true transitions. The LFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false– to– true transitions. The last word loaded is the first to be unloaded. a.Applies to SLC 5/03 OS302 and SLC 5/04 OS401 processors. b.Floating point times do not apply to SLC 5/03 OS300 processors. c.When only one Execution Time is listed for an instruction, Floating Point does not apply. d.The execution times assum floating point data. If signed integer data is used, add 15 microseconds per instruction execution time. Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 19 Program Flow Instructions Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Name SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 Function Conditional or Output Instructions JMP Jump to Label 38 23 44.45 37.44 Output instruction. When rung conditions are true, the JMP instruction causes the program scan to jump forward or backward to the corresponding LBL instruction. LBL Label 2 4 0.25 0.18 This is the target of the correspondingly numbered JMP instruction. JSR Jump to Subroutine 46 28 131.0 112.0 Output instruction. When rung conditions are true, the JSR instruction causes the processor to jump to the targeted subroutine file. SBR Subroutine 2 4 0.25 0.18 Placed as first instruction in a subroutine file. Identifies the subroutine file. RET Return from Subroutine 34 20 23 20.0 Output instruction, placed in subroutine. When rung conditions are true, the RET instruction causes the processor to resume program execution in the main program file or the previous subroutine file. MCR Master Control Reset 10 6 4 3.0 Output instruction. Used in pairs to inhibit or enable a zone within a ladder program. 13.05 Output instruction. When rung conditions are true, the TND instruction stops the program scan, updates I/O, and resumes scanning at rung 0 of the main program file. 10.31 Output instruction, used for troubleshooting. When rung conditions are true, the SUS instruction places the controller in the Suspend Idle mode. The suspend ID number is placed in word S:7 and the program file number is placed in S:8. 51.0 When conditions preceding it in the rung are true, the IIM instruction is enabled and interrupts the program scan to write a word of masked external input data to input data file. 75.74 When conditions preceding it in the rung are true, the IOM instruction is enabled and interrupts the program scan to read a word of data from the output data file and transfer the data through a mask to the corresponding external outputs. TND Temporary End SUS Suspend IIM Immediate Input with Mask IOM Immediate Output with Mask 32 12 372 475 22 7 340 465 12 12 51.85 70.90 Publication 1747-2.39 20 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Application Specific Instructions Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Name BSL Bit Shift Left BSR Bit Shift Right SQO Sequencer Output SQC Sequencer Compare SQL Sequencer Load SLC 5/01 144 + 24 per word 225 225 — SLC 5/02 89 + 14 per word 137 137 135 SLC 5/03 50 + 2.30 per word 70 60 56 Function Output Instructions SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 31.5 + 2.31 per word On each false– to–true transition, these instructions load a data bit into a bit array, shift the pattern of data through the array, and unload the end bit of data. The BSL shifts data to the left and the BSR shifts data to the right. 44.1 On each false– to–true transition, these instructions load a data bit into a bit array, shift the pattern of data through the array, and unload the end bit of data. The BSL shifts data to the left and the BSR shifts data to the right. 33.2 On successive false–to– true transitions, the SQC moves a step through the programmed sequencer file, comparing the data through a mask to a source word or file for equality. 33.2 On successive false–to– true transitions, the SQL moves a step through the sequencer file, loading a word of source data into the current element of the sequencer file. Communication Instructions Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Name MSG Message Read/ Write SVC Service Communications SLC 5/01 — — SLC 5/02 180 240 SLC 5/03 203 240 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 Function Output Instructions 183 This instruction transfers data from one node to another on the communication network. When the instruction is enabled, message transfer is pending. Actual data transfer takes place at the end of the scan. 200 When conditions preceding it in the rung are true, the SVC instruction interrupts the program scan to execute the service communication portion of the operating cycle. Proportional Integral Derivative Instruction Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Name PID Proportional Integral Derivative Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 — 3600 272 169.82 Function Output Instructions This instruction is used to control physical properties such as temperature, pressure, liquid level, or flow rate of process loops. SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 21 ASCII Instructions Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Namea Function Output Instructions SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 ABL Test Buffer for Line 129.9 156.0 Determines the number of characters in the buffer, up to and including the end– of– line characters (termination). ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 140.7 131.0 Determines the total characters in the buffer. ACI String to Integer 86.62 56.0 Converts an ACSII string to an integer value. ACL ASCII Clear Receive and/or Send Buffer 367.5 332.8 Clears the ASCII buffer. ACN String Concantenate 69.4 + 2.1 per character 56 + 2.5 per character AEX String Extract 56.2 + 4.7 per character 43.4 + 4.0 per character Creates a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and linking it to a new string. AHL ASCII Handshake Lines 138.7 115.1 Sets or resets the RS-232 Data Terminal REady and Request to Sender handshake control lines for the modem. AIC Integer to String 103.4 110.0 Converts an integer value to an ASCII string. ARD ASCII Read Characters 181.8 151.0 Reads characters from the buffer and stores them in a string. ARL ASCII Read Line 190.0 156.0 Reads characters from the buffer up to and including the end-of-line characters and stores them in a string. 53.4 + 1.8 per character 43.5 + 2.5 per character Searches an existing string for an occurrence of the source string. ASR ASCII String Compare 49.69 43.5 Compares two ASCII strings. AWA ASCII Write with Append 365.5 307.8 Adds the two appended characters set from the ASCII configuration menu. AWT ASCII Write 263.8 217.3 Writes characters from a source string to a display device. ASC String Search Combines two strings using ACSII strings as operands. a.Only SLC 5/03 (OS301, OS302), SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 processors use these instructions. Publication 1747-2.39 22 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Interrupt Routine Instructions Execution Times (µs) Instruction Mnemonic and Name SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 STD Selectable Timed Disable — 9 4 3.56 STE Selectable Timed Enable — 9 5 5.0 STS Selectable Timed Start — 72 58 44.38 IIE I/O Interrupt Enable — 42 16 10.44 IID I/O Interrupt Disable — 39 6 5.81 RPI Reset Pending I/O Interrupt — 240 78 + 60 per added slot 91 + 56 per added slot Function Output Instructions Associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function. STD and STE are used to prevent an STI from occurring during a portion of the program; STS initiates an STI. The IIE, IID and RPI instructions are used with specialty I/O modules capable of generating an I/O interrupt. REF I/O Refresh — 240 240 200 When conditions preceding it in the rung are true, the REF instruction interrupts the program scan to execute the I/O scan (write outputs-service comms-read inputs). The program scan then resumes. INT Interrupt Subroutine — 0 0.25 0.18 Associated with STI interrupts and I/O eventdriven interrupts. Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the SLC 5/03 OS302, SLC 5/ 04 OS401, and SLC 5/05 processors. The timing for an indirect address is affected by: • the form of the indirect address • if the indirect address is a source or destination parameter • whether indirect addressing is used in either a COP, FLL, FFL/FFU, LFL/LFU, BSR, BSL, or MVM instruction • whether indirect addressing is used in either an XIC, XIO, OTU, OTL, OTE, or OSR instruction For the address forms in the table on the next page, you can substitute the following file types: For an Integer (N) For a String (ST) Input (I) Control (R) Output (O) Counter (C) Bit (B) Timer (T) Floating Point (F) ASCII (A) Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 23 Execution Times for Word–Level Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address(es), look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction. Source Operand (µs) Destination Operand (µs) If used in a file type instruction Address Forma SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 N7:[*] 65.1 56.15 63.10 54.20 76.35 66.75 ST12:[*].[*] 69.45 60.00 67.45 58.05 80.70 70.60 ST12:[*].0 74.65 59.60 72.65 57.65 85.90 70.20 ST12:0.[*] 74.65 59.60 72.65 57.65 85.90 70.20 N[*]:[]:[ 105.90 89.40 131.50 112.55 138.75 118.70 N[*]:0 111.10 89.00 136.70 112.15 143.95 118.30 N[*]:0 111.10 89.00 136.70 112.15 143.95 118.30 ST[*]:[*].[*] 110.25 93.25 135.85 116.40 143.10 122.55 ST[*]:[*].0 115.45 92.85 141.05 116.00 148.30 122.15 ST[*]:0.[*] 115.45 92.85 141.05 116.00 148.30 122.15 ST[*]:0.0 120.65 92.45 146.25 115.60 153.50 121.75 #N7:[*] 73.05 59.35 64.65 57.30 86.80 69.80 #ST12:[*].[*] 77.40 63.20 69.00 61.15 91.15 73.65 #ST12:[*].0 82.60 62.80 74.20 60.75 96.35 73.25 #ST12:0.[*] 82.60 62.80 74.20 60.75 96.35 73.25 #N[*]:[*] 110.95 92.95 133.40 114.40 146.65 121.35 #N[*]:0 116.15 92.55 138.60 114.00 151.85 120.95 #ST[*]:[*].[*] 115.30 96.80 137.75 118.25 151.00 125.20 #ST[*]:[*].0 120.50 96.40 142.95 117.85 156.20 124.80 #ST[*]:0.[*] 120.50 96.40 142.95 117.85 156.20 124.80 #ST[*]:0.0 125.70 96.00 148.15 117.45 161.40 124.40 a.[*] indicates that an indirect reference is substituted. Publication 1747-2.39 24 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors Execution Times for Bit–Level Indirect Addresses Indirect bit addresses are based on the form of the indirect address and the type of bit instruction. Use the following two tables to calculate the execution time of a bit instruction. Additional Time (µs) Address Form SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 B3/[*] 96.70 77.80 B3:1/[*] 96.70 77.80 B3:[*=/]:[ 91.50 72.80 ST12:[*].[*=/]:[ 100.65 76.65 ST12:[*].[*]/0 100.85 76.25 ST12:[*].0/[*] 100.85 76.25 ST12:[*].0/0 105.85 75.85 ST12:0.[*] /0 105.85 75.85 ST12:0.0/[*] 105.85 75.85 B[*=/]:[ 171.50 141.40 B[*]:1/[*] 171.50 141.40 B[*]:[*=/]:[ 166.30 141.80 ST[*]:[*].[*=/]:[ 170.65 145.65 ST[*]:[*].[*]/0 175.85 145.25 ST[*]:[*].0/[*] 175.85 145.25 ST[*]:[*].0/0 181.05 144.85 ST[*]:0.[*=/]:[ 175.85 145.25 ST[*]:0.[*]/0 181.05 144.85 ST[*]:0.0/[*] 181.05 144.85 ST[*]:0.0/0 186.25 144.45 Execution Time Examples - Word Level and Bit Level Indirect Address Publication 1747-2.39 SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 25 Instruction Execution Times Execution Time (µs) Instruction SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 8.72 12.76 5.45 5.40 5.50 8.10 SLC 5/03 XIC XIO OTU OTL OTE OSR 10.20 14.65 6.30 9.35 6.25 10.50 Execution Time Example - Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address To calculate the execution time of an XIC at B3/[N7:0] using an SLC 5/03 processor add the following: Execution Time for Bit– Level Indirect Address + Instruction Execution Time =10.20 + 96.70 = 106.90 Specifications Specification Memory Size (words) Max. I/O Capacity Max. Local Chassis/Slots The following table summarizes the detailed specifications for the SLC 500 processor family: SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 1747–L511 1747–L514 1747–L524 1747–L531 1747–L532 1747–L541 1747–L542 1747–L543 1747–L551 1747–L552 1747–L553 1K (1747–L511) 4K (1747–L514) 4K 8K (1747–L531) 16K (1747–L532) 3940 Discrete 4096 Discrete 4096 Discrete 16K (1747–L541) 32K (1747–L542) 64K (1747–L543) 4096 Discrete 16K (1747–L551) 32K (1747–L552) 64K (1747–L553) 4096 Discrete 3/30 3/30 3/30 3/30 3/30 1747–L531: Programming Programming Instructions Typical Scan Timea Bit Execution (XIC) •RSLogix 500 (V1.00 or later), SLC– 500 A.I. Series •APS Programming Software •HHT •RSLogix 500 (V1.26.03 or later) •SLC 500 A.I. Series (V8.15 or later) 1747–L532: •RSLogix 500 (V1.24.04 or later) •SLC 500 A.I. Series (V8.10 or later) •APS (V6.0 or later) •RSLogix 500 (V1.24.04 or later) •SLC 500 A.I. Series (V8.10 or later) •APS ( V6.0 or later) •RSLogix 500 (V2.10 or later) 52 71 99 99 99 8 ms/K 4.8 ms/K 1 ms/K 0.9 ms/K 0.9 ms/K 4 µs 2.4 µs 0.44 µs 0.37 µs 0.37 µs a.The scan times are typical for a 1K ladder logic program consisting of simple ladder logic and communication servicing. Actual scan times depend onyour program size, instructions used and the communication protocol. Publication 1747-2.39 26 SLC 500™ Chassis– Based Processors The following table summarizes the communication options for the SLC 500 processor family. Communications Protocol DH485 peer– to– peer Processor SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 receive only receive and initiate receive and initiate DH485 via RS232 port DF1 via RS232 port (full– duplex or half–duplex master or slave) receive onlya receive onlya ASCII via RS232 port Data Highway Plus (DH+) receive onlyb receive onlyb SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 receive and initiatec receive and initiatec receive and initiatec receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiated receive and initiate receive and initiate Ethernet receive and initiate a.A 1747-KE or 1770-KF3 is required to bridge from DF1 (full-duplex or half-duplex slave only) to DH485. b.A 1785-KA5 is required to bridge from HD+ to DH485. c.If using 1747-AIC for isolation, connect to DH-485 network using 1747-PIC; if using 1761-NET-AIC for isolation, directly connect to DH-485 network with 1747-CP3 serial cable (or equivalent RS-232 null-modem cable). d.Either a 1785-KA5 is required to bridge from DH+ to DH485 or the SLC 5/04’s channel-to-channel passthru feature may be used to bridge between DH+ and DH485 or between DH+ and DF1 Full-Duplex (DH+ to DF1 Full-Duplex passthru available starting with OS401). Another option is to use the 1785-KE to bridge between DH+ and DF1 Full-Duplex or DH+ and a DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave network. Note: Publication 1747-2.39 The 1785-KA5 and 1785-KE modules require use of a 1771-series chassis and power supply. SLC 500™ Chassis–Based Processors 27 The following table summarizes the general specifications for the SLC 500 processor family: Description Power Supply Loading Specification SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 350mA at 5V dc. 105 mA at 24V dc SLC 5/03 500 mA at 5V dc. 175 mA at 24V dc SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 1.0 A at 5V dc 200 mA at 24V dc Program Scan Hold-up time after Loss of Power 20 ms to 3 s (dependent on power supply loading) Clock/Calendar Accuracy (Applicable only to SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors) ±54 sec/month at +25° C (77° F) ±81 sec/month @ +60° C (+140°F) Noise Immunity NEMA Standard ICS 2-230 Displacement 0.015 inch, peak-to-peak at 5-57 Hz Acceleration 2.5Gs at 57-2000 Hz Vibration Shock (operating) 30Gs Operating Temperature 0 to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to 185°F) Ambient Temperature Rating Humidity 5 to 95% without condensation Certification UL listed CSA approved Class 1, Groups A, B, C or D, Division 2 CE compliant for all applicable directives The following table summarizes the available memory back up options for the SLC 500 processors. EEPROM and UVPROM memory modules provide non-volatile memory backup. Flash EPROMs (Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) combine the versatility of EEPROMs with the security of UVPROMs. SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 1747-L511 1747-L514 1747-L524 1747-L531 1747-L532 1747-L541 1747-L542 1747-L543 1747-L551 1747-L552 1747-L553 EEPROM 1747-M1 1747-M2 1747-M2 UVPROM 1747-M3 1747-M4 1747-M4 1747-M11 1747-M12 (OS302 or later) 1747-M11 1747-M12 (OS401 or later) Specification Flash 1747-M11 1747-M12 Publication 1747-2.39 Allen-Bradley Support In today’s competitive environment, when you buy any product, you expect that product to meet your needs. You also expect the manufacturer of that product to back it up with the kind of customer service and product support that will prove you made a wise purchase. As the people who design, engineer and manufacture your Industrial Automation Control equipment, Allen-Bradley has a vested interest in your complete satisfaction with our products and services. Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with 75 Sales/ Support offices, 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States, plus Allen-Bradley representatives in every major country in the world. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for: • sales and order support • product technical training • warranty support • support service agreements PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3 and PLC-5 are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation. SLC, SLC 500, SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, Data Highway Plus and PanelView are trademarks of Rockwell Automation. A.I. Series and RSLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Software, Inc. Publication 1747-2.39 - December 1997 Supersedes Publication 1747-2.39 - December 1995 1998 Rockwell International. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA Installation Instructions Remote I/O Scanner (Catalog Number 1747-SN) Inside ................................................................................................page For More Information ............................................................................... 2 Hazardous Location Considerations ........................................................ 3 Environnements dangereux ..................................................................... 3 Overview .................................................................................................. 4 Hardware Features .................................................................................. 5 Required Tools and Equipment ................................................................ 8 Installation ............................................................................................... 8 RIO Link Wiring ...................................................................................... 10 Specifications ........................................................................................ 12 Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 2 Remote I/O Scanner For More Information For Refer to this Document Pub. No. A more detailed description on how to install, configure, and operate your Remote I/O Scanner. Remote I/O Scanner User Manual 1747-6.6 A more detailed description on how to install and use your modular SLC 500 system SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style Installation and Operation Manual 1747-UM011 A reference manual that contains status file data and instruction set information for SLC 500 processors. SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual 1747-RM001 If you would like a manual you can: • download a free electronic version from the internet: www.theautomationbookstore.com • purchase a printed manual by: – contacting your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative – visiting www.theautomationbookstore.com and placing your order – calling 1.800.963.9548 (USA/Canada) or 001.330.725.1574 (Outside USA/Canada Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Remote I/O Scanner 3 Hazardous Location Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations. WARNING ! EXPLOSION HAZARD • Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. • Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off. • Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off. • All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b). Environnements dangereux Cet équipement est conçu pour être utilisé dans des environnements de Classe I, Division 2, Groupes A, B, C, D ou non dangereux. La mise en garde suivante s’applique à une utilisation dans des environnements dangereux. WARNING ! DANGER D’EXPLOSION • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement impropre à une utilisation en environnement de Classe I, Division 2. • Ne pas remplacer de composants ou déconnecter l'équipement sans s'être assuré que l'alimentation est coupée. • Ne pas connecter ou déconnecter des composants sans s'être assuré que l'alimentation est coupée. Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 4 Remote I/O Scanner Overview The Remote I/O (RIO) Scanner, 1747-SN, enables communication between an SLC™ processor and remotely located 1746 I/O chassis and other RIO-compatible Allen-Bradley operator interface and control devices. The 1747-SN scanner communicates with remote devices using the A-B Remote I/O link. The RIO link consists of a single master (scanner) and multiple slaves (adapters). Communication between devices occurs over twisted-pair cable with the devices daisy-chained together. Maximum distance for remote communication is 3,048m (10,000 ft.). The scanner is compatible with any standard RIO adapter device. The SLC processor transfers a maximum of 4 logical racks (32 input and 32 output image words) of discrete remote I/O data into the SLC input and output image files. You can adjust the size of the scanner image files during configuration of your SLC system so that the scanner only transfers the discrete I/O data required by your application program. The 1747-SN Series B or later RIO Scanner can be configured to transfer up to 64 words of data to a remote device via block transfer. Refer to publication 1747-6.6, Remote I/O Scanner User Manual, for information on configuration, programming, and block transfers. The SLC 500™ processor (SLC 5/02 or higher) supports multiple scanners in its local I/O chassis. The maximum number is dependent on the following: • backplane power requirements (power supply dependent) • SLC 500 processor I/O data table limit (4,096 input and output bits) • processor memory to support the application (SLC processor dependent) SLC 5/02 or later processor RIO Scanner (Master of the RIO Link) 1747-ASB Module (Adapter/Slave) Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis Local SLC Chassis Dataliner™ Message Display (Adapter/Slave) PanelView™ Operator Terminal (Adapter/Slave) Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Redi PANEL™ (Adapter/Slave) Remote I/O Scanner 5 Hardware Features The figure below shows the scanner’s features. RIO Link Connector, Status LED, and DIP Switch information follows. SCANNER CAT SER FAC SLC 500 Remote I/O Scanner SERIAL NO. Status LEDs SW1 O N 1 2 1 LISTED IND. CONT. EQ. ON ON OFF OFF 2 KBAUD ON OFF ON OFF 57.6 115.2 230.4 230.4 CONNECT ONE END OF CABLE SHIELD TO CHASSIS MOUNTING BOLT. REFER TO USERS MANUAL. HOST FRN MADE IN U.S.A. PLUG FRN CURRENT REQUIREMENT 600 mA @ 5VDC OPERATING TEMPERATURE SA CODE T3C CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, AND D, DIV 2 UL FOR HAZ. LOC. A196 B COMM FAULT Line 1 Shield Line 2 1747-SN O1 2 N Dip Switch Cable Tie Slots RIO Link Connector RIO Link Connector This 3-pin male connector connects the scanner to the RIO link. The Allen-Bradley replacement part number is 1746-RT29. Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 6 Remote I/O Scanner Status LEDs The scanner has two LEDs, FAULT and COMM, which indicate its operating status. • FAULT LED - indicates the scanner’s overall status. The red FAULT LED is off whenever the scanner is configured and operating properly. • COMM LED - allows you to monitor communication with all configured devices. This LED is green once the scanner is in the Run mode. It is red if a hardware fault is detected. The COMM LED status information is valid only when the FAULT LED is off. The table below explains the scanner and communication status as indicated by the FAULT and COMM LEDs. FAULT LED COMM LED Status Information Flashing Red Not applicable Scanner configuration error. No RIO link communication attempted. Duplicate scanner detected on RIO link. Red Not applicable Major fault on scanner. Off Red Hardware fault detected. Off Off Scanner is operating properly. Off Green Scanner is operating properly. Off Flashing Green Scanner is operating properly. Off Flashing Red Scanner is operating properly. No RIO link communication attempted. Scanner is offline (no RIO link communication attempted). Scanner is online (active communication established with all devices). At least one configured RIO link device is not communicating. None of the configured RIO link devices are communicating. Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Remote I/O Scanner 7 Baud Rate DIP Switch The figure below shows the location of the DIP switch and the DIP switch settings for the supported baud rates. For proper system operation, the baud rate of all devices on the RIO link must be the same. IMPORTANT O N 12 57.6K baud O1 N 2 115.2K baud O N 12 230.4K baud O1 N 2 230.4K baud Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 8 Remote I/O Scanner Required Tools and Equipment Have the following tools and equipment ready: • medium blade screwdriver • termination kit (the package, containing resistors and a ring lug, which was included with the scanner) • approximately 38 cm (15 inches) of #20 AWG wire for grounding the drain shield to the SLC chassis (for Series A retrofits) • adequate length of RIO communication cable (Belden™ 9463) for your specific application Installation Make sure you have set the DIP switch properly before installing the scanner. IMPORTANT Before installation, make sure that your modular SLC power supply has adequate reserve current capacity. The scanner requires 600 mA at 5V dc. Insertion Module Release Card Guide Cable Tie Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Remote I/O Scanner 9 1. Disconnect power. 2. Align the full-sized circuit board with the chassis card guides. The first slot (slot 0) of the first rack is reserved for the SLC 500 processor. 3. Slide the module into the chassis until the top and bottom latches catch. 4. Attach the RIO link cable to the connector on the front of the module, behind the door. Ground the cable’s shield wire to a chassis mounting bracket. Refer to the RIO link wiring illustration on page 10. 5. Insert the cable tie in the slots. 6. Route the cable down and away from module, securing it with the cable tie. 7. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number 1746-N2. Removal 1. Disconnect power. 2. Remove all cabling. 3. Press the releases at the top and bottom of the module and slide the module out of the chassis slot. 4. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number 1746-N2. Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 10 Remote I/O Scanner RIO Link Wiring The scanner is connected to other devices on the RIO link in a daisy-chain (serial) configuration. There are no restrictions governing the space between each device, provided the maximum cable distance (Belden 9463) is not exceeded. A 1/2 watt terminating resistor (included with the module) must be attached across line 1 and line 2 of the connectors at each end (scanner and last physical device) of the RIO link. The size of the resistor depends on the baud rate and extended node capability, as shown in the table below. Note: To use extended node, all devices on the RIO link must support it. Refer to each device’s user manual. Using Extended Node Capability Not Using Extended Node Capability Baud Rate Max. Cable Distance (Belden 9463) Resistor Size 57.6K baud 3048 m (10,000 ft.) 82Ω 1/2 Watt Gray-Red-Black-Gold 115.2K baud 1524 m (5,000 ft.) 230.4K baud 762 m (2,500 ft.) 57.6K baud 3048 m (10,000 ft.) 115.2K baud 1524 m (5,000 ft.) 230.4K baud 762 m (2,500 ft.) 150Ω 1/2 Watt Brown-Green-Brown-Gold 82Ω 1/2 Watt Gray-Red-Black-Gold Terminating Resistor Last Physical Device End RIO Scanner RIO Link Connector RIO Link Connector Terminating Resistor Scanner End Line 1 – Blue Shield – Shield Line 2 – Clear Chassis Mounting Bracket Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Ring Lug Shield Drain Wire (For Series A Retrofits) Shield Drain Wire (For New Series B Installations) Remote I/O Scanner 11 For New Installations To ensure a proper earth ground of the cable shield, follow these steps: 1. While the RIO link connector is plugged into the scanner and lines 1 and 2 are connected, strip the cable back to expose enough shield drain wire to reach a chassis mounting bracket. 2. Attach the ring terminal lug (supplied) to the end of the shield drain wire. 3. Attach the ring terminal lug to the SLC chassis mounting bracket. Note that for new installations the middle (shield) terminal is not used when connecting to the scanner. IMPORTANT The RIO cable shield must be grounded at the scanner end only. For Series A Scanner Retrofits Refer to the illustration on page 10. To eliminate the need to strip the cable back, follow these steps: 1. Attach the shield wire and a short piece of #20 AWG wire (dotted line) to the shield lug of the RIO link connector. 2. Attach the other end of the #20 AWG wire to the ring terminal lug. 3. Attach the ring terminal lug to a chassis mounting bracket. IMPORTANT The RIO cable shield must be grounded at the scanner end only. Ensure that the unshielded portion of the link communication wire (blue and clear) is as short as possible. Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Specifications Backplane Current Consumption 600 mA at 5V dc Operating Temperature 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) Humidity 5 to 95% without condensation Noise Immunity NEMA Standard ICS 2-230 Agency Certification UL / C-UL listed Class I, Division 2, Groups A,B, C, D CE marked for all applicable directives C-Tick marked for all applicable acts SLC 500, PanelView, RediPANEL, and Dataliner are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. Belden is a trademark of Belden, Inc. Publication 1747-IN060D-EN-P - November 2002 Supersedes Publication 1747-IN060C-EN-P - March 2002 PN 40071-138-01(4) Copyright © 2002 Rockwell Automation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Installation Instructions FLEX I/O Remote I/O Adapter Module 1794-ASBLT Series D WARNING ATTENTION Use the 1794-ASBLT Series D adapter when communicating with Classic PLC-5/15 or PLC-5/25 via Remote I/O. The 1794-ASBLT Series D adapter is a replacement for the 1794-ASB Series D adapter only when communicating with PLC-5/15 or PLC5/25. Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.literature.rockwellautomation.com) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can WARNING cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: • identify a hazard • avoid a hazard SHOCK HAZARD BURN HAZARD • recognize the consequence Labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present. WARNING WARNING ATTENTION ATTENTION Environment and Enclosure This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions, there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as "open type" equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts. The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications. See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure. Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the Allen-Bradley publication 1770-4.1 ("Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines"), for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment. When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on, or connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. FLEX I/O is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground. Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding. The use of other DIN rail materials (e.g. aluminum, plastic, etc.) that can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or intermittent grounding. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment: • Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static. • Wear an approved grounding wriststrap. • Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards. • Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment. • If available, use a static-safe workstation. Labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures. Publication 1794-IN110A-EN-P - August 2005 2 North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations: Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements dangereux : Products marked “CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D” are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. When combining products within a system, the most adverse temperature code (lowest “T” number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu’à une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B, C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des marquages sur sa plaque d’identification qui indiquent le code de température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les combinaisons d’équipements dans le système sont sujettes à inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de l’installation. EXPLOSION HAZARD WARNING AVERTISSEMENT • Couper le courant ou s’assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher l'équipement. • Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other means provided with this product. • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit. • If this product contains batteries, they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. A B C C RISQUE D’EXPLOSION • Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. • Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. Install Your Adapter Module • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement inadapté à une utilisation en environnement de Classe I, Division 2. • S’assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de changer les piles. Remote I/O Adapter, Cat. No. 1794-ASBLT Series D These adapters are shipped configured for standard addressing mode. In Standard Addressing Mode, the 1794-ASBLT series D adapter can be used as a replacement for 1794-ASB series A and B remote I/O adapters. 9 1 ATTENTION During mounting of all devices, be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the module. Debris that falls into the module could cause damage on power up. Mount on a DIN Rail Before Installing the Terminal Base Units 1. Hook the lip on the rear of the adapter onto the top of the DIN rail, and rotate the adapter module onto the rail. 2. Press the adapter module down onto the DIN rail until flush. Locking tab C will snap into position and lock the adapter module to the DIN rail. 3. If the adapter module does not lock in place, use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter module flush onto the DIN rail, and release the locking tab to lock the adapter module in place. If necessary, push up on the locking tab to lock. 4. Connect the adapter wiring as shown under “Wiring” later in this document. Mount (or Replace) the Adapter on an Existing System 1. Remove the RIO plug-in connector from the front of the adapter. 2. Disconnect any wiring jumpered to the adjacent terminal base. 2 1794-ASBLT 8 3 4, 5 6 Component Identification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Remote I/O Adapter Module Indicators Communication reset button (PRL) Access door to switches S1 and S2 Switches S1 and S2 (behind door) Remote I/O cable connector +V dc connections -V common connections Flexbus connector 7 WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. 3. Open the module latching mechanism and remove the module from the base unit to which the adapter will be attached. 4. Push the flexbus connector toward the right side of the terminal base to unplug the backplane connection. (When fully retracted, you will see a raised dot on the connector.) 5. Release the adapter locking tab and remove the adapter module. 6. Before installing the new adapter, notice the notch on the right rear of the adapter. This notch accepts the hook on the terminal base unit. The notch is open at the bottom. The hook and adjacent connection point keep the terminal base and the adapter tight together, reducing the possibility of a break in communication over the backplane. 7. Complete the adapter mounting as shown below. Publication 1794-IN110A-EN-P - August 2005 3 When the adapter is locked onto the DIN rail, gently push the flexbus connector into the adapter to complete the backplane Push down and in at the same time to lock the adapter to the DIN rail. To reduce susceptibility to noise, power analog modules and digital modules from separate power supplies. Do not exceed a total length of 32.8 ft (10m) for dc power cabling. ATTENTION Set the Addressing Mode Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20127 C 8. If the adapter module does not lock in place, use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter module flush onto the DIN rail, and release the locking tab to lock the adapter module in place. If necessary, push up on the locking tab to lock. on 9. Reinstall the module in the adjacent terminal base unit. on S1 S2 Flip open cover Connect Wiring ATTENTION If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. WARNING Some switches on this adapter differ from the switches on previous versions. Make certain that you identify each switch before setting. 1. Lift the hinged switch cover on the front of the adapter to expose the switches. 2. Set the switches as shown below. 1. Connect the remote I/O cable to the removable remote I/O connector. Connect To terminal Blue Wire - RIO Shield Wire - RIO Clear Wire - RIO ATTENTION 1 SH 2 If this is the last adapter, you must terminate the remote I/O link here. Use a terminating resistor connected across terminals 1 and 2. Refer to your processor manual for information on the size of the resistor. Allen-Bradley PWR ADAPTER ACTIVE FAULT LOCAL FAULT 1794-ASBLT C B COM D A 24V 1 SH 2 Termination resistor (if required) 82 W or 150 W (refer to your processor documentation for size and usage) 3. Cycle power to the adapter after setting the switches. 8 and 16-point Mode Switch Settings When using this addressing mode Standard (as shipped Compact And Mode Switch 2 S1-1 8 and/or 16-point See note modules 1 8-point modules OFF 16-point modules ON See complementary table below. 8-point modules OFF ON Mode Switch 1 S2-5 ON Mode Switch 0 S2-8 ON ON ON OFF OFF Complementary Primary Chassis OFF ON Complementary OFF ON Chassis Complementary See complementary table below. Primary Chassis 16-point modules OFF OFF OFF Complementary ON OFF OFF Chassis 1 In Standard mode, this switch retains its function as switch position 1 of rack addressing. In standard mode, the module is functionally interchangeable with 1794-ASB series A or B adapters. 2 In compact mode, 32-point modules appear as 8 or 16-point modules. 3 When programming block transfers, address analog modules as module 0 if switch S1-1 is on; module 1 if switch S1-1 is off. 20131_LT 2. Connect +V dc power to the left side of the lower connector, terminal A. 3. Connect -V common to the left side of the upper connector, terminal B. 4. Connections C and D are used to pass +V dc power (D) and -V common (C) to the next module in the series (if required). Publication 1794-IN110A-EN-P - August 2005 4 Complementary I/O Rack Number Switch Settings for PLC-5 Processors I/O Rack Number Mode Switch 2 on Refer to your processor documentation for all other processors. Hold Inputs Rack Fault Select Mode Switch 1 Communication Rate Switches Processor Restart Lockout Hold Last State on S1 S2 I/O Rack Number First I/O Group S1-8 ON OFF ON OFF Mode Switch 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 First I/O Group S1-7 ON ON OFF OFF I/O Group 0 (1st) 2 (2nd) 4 (3rd) 6 (4th) S2-8 S1-6 thru S1-1 Refer to addressing mode tables. Mode Switch 0 ON OFF Hold Inputs S2-6 Hold inputs Reset inputs ON OFF S2-5 S2-3 Bits/s ON OFF ON ON 115.2 k1 ON OFF 230.4 k1 OFF OFF 230.4 k1 1 57.6 k 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Rack Number S1 Switch Position PLC-5/25 6 5 4 3 2 1 Disabled (default) Enabled Not Valid Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 Rack 5 Rack 6 Rack 7 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Restart Locked out Hold Last State Refer to your processor documentation for all other processors. S2-1 ON OFF Reset Outputs Hold Last State I/O Rack Number Switch Settings Rack Number S1 Switch Position PLC5/15 Not Valid Rack 0 Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 6 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 5 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF PLC-5/25 Not Valid Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 Rack 5 Rack 6 Rack 7 PLC-5/15 PLC5/15 and PLC5/25 can only support 57.6 kbps. PLC-5/25 Rack 0 Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 Rack 5 Rack 6 Rack 7 PLC-5/15 Not Valid Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Processor Restart Lockout S2-2 ON OFF S1 Switch Position Rack Fault Select Mode Switch 1 S2-4 Rack Number Not Valid Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack Number Refer to mode selection switches, above. Communication Rate Rack Number Complementary Rack Refer to mode selection switches, above. S2-7 Primary Rack 4 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Publication 1794-IN110A-EN-P - August 2005 3 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 5 Specifications Remote I/O connector Plug Certifications (when product is marked)2 Specifications - Remote I/O Adapter, Cat. No. 1794-ASBLT/D I/O Capacity Power Supply Input Voltage Rating Communication Rate Indicators Flexbus Output Current Isolation Voltage Current Draw Power Dissipation Thermal Dissipation 8 modules Power supply must be capable of providing a turn-on inrush surge current of 23 A (at 24V dc) for 2 ms for each adapter connected to the power supply. 24V dc nominal 19.2V to 31.2 V dc (includes 5% ac ripple) 57.6 kbps 115.2 kbps 230 kbps NOTE: PLC5/15 and PLC5/25 can only support 57.6 kbps Power - green Adapter Active - green Adapter Fault - red Local Fault - red 640 mA maximum 50V continuous Tested at 850V dc for 1 s between user power and flexbus 330 mA at 24V dc; 450 mA maximum 4.6 W maximum @ 31.2V dc Maximum 1.7 BTU/hr @ 31.2V dc 1 2 Part Number 942029-03 CULUS UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada CULUS UL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous locations, certified for US and Canada CSA CSA certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA certified Process Control Equipment for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous locations CE European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with: EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS/NZS CISPR 11, Industrial Emissions You use this category information for planning conductor routing as described in Allen-Bradley publication 1770-4.1, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines. For the latest up-to-date information, see the Product Certification link at www.ab.com for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates and other certification details. Mounting Dimensions Inches (Millimeters) A 2.3 (59) 1.4 (35) .83 (21) General Specifications Dimensions 3.4H x 2.7W x 2.7D inches 87H x 69W x 69D mm Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Vibration Shock Emissions ESD Immunity Radiated RF Immunity EFT/B Immunity Surge Transient Immunity Conducted RF Immunity Enclosure Type Rating Conductors Wire Size Category1 Terminal Screw Torque Remote I/O Cable IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold), IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat), IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock): 0 to 55 °C (32 to 131 °F) IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold), IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat), IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock): –40 to 85 °C (–40 to 185 °F) IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat): 5 to 95% non-condensing IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 5g @ 10-500 Hz IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged shock): Operating 30g Non-operating 50g CISPR 11: Group 1, Class A (with appropriate enclosure) IEC 61000-4-2: 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges IEC 61000-4-3: 10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz 10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz 10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz IEC 61000-4-4: ±2 kV at 5 kHz on power ports ±2 kV at 5 kHz on communications ports IEC 61000-4-5: ±2 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150 kHz to 80 MHz None (open-style) Communications: 12 AWG (2.5mm2) …22 AWG (0.34mm2) solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75°C or greater, 3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum. Power: 12 AWG (2.5mm2) …22 AWG (0.34mm2) solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75°C or greater, 3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum." 2 on communication ports 3 on power ports 3.2 (80) 2.0 (50) 1794-ASBLT 3.4 (87) 1.2 (30) C 2.7 (68) 1794-ASBLT/D 3.4H x 2.7W x 2.7D (87H x 68W x 69D) B A = Mounting hole dimensions for optional wall/panel mounting kit B = DIN rail C = Secure DIN rail approximately every 200mm ( 7 pound-inches (0.8 Nm) Belden 9463 as specified in publication ICCG-2.2 Publication 1794-IN110A-EN-P - August 2005 Publication 1794-IN110A-EN-P - August 2005 6 PN 957974-12 Copyright © 2005 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Installation Instructions FLEX I/O Digital Input Modules 1794-IB8, -IB16, -IB16K and -IB32 WARNING (Modules with a K in the last position of the catalog number are conformally coated to meet noxious gas requirements of ISA/ANSI-71.040 1985 Class G3 Environment.) Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.ab.com/manuals/gi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause WARNING an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: • identify a hazard • avoid a hazard ATTENTION ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions, there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as "open type" equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts. The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications. See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure. Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the Allen-Bradley publication 1770-4.1 ("Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines"), for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment: • Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static. • Wear an approved grounding wriststrap. • Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards. • Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment. • If available, use a static-safe workstation. The following input modules are European Zone 2 approved: 1794-IB8, -IB16 and -IB16K. European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the EEx Marking) This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC. The LCIE (Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques) certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report No. 28 682 010. Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50021. IMPORTANT Environment and Enclosure FLEX I/O is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground. Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding. The use of other DIN rail materials (e.g. aluminum, plastic, etc.) that can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or intermittent grounding. European Hazardous Location Approval • recognize the consequence ATTENTION When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. Observe the following additional Zone 2 certification requirements. • This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation. • The secondary of a current transformer shall not be open-circuited when applied in Class I, Zone 2 environments. • Equipment of lesser Enclosure Type Rating must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Class I, Zone 2 environments. • This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley. • Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when applied in Class I, Zone 2 environments Publication 1794-IN093B-EN-P - May 2004 2 North American Hazardous Location Approval The following input modules are North American Hazardous Location approved: 1794-IB8, -IB16, -IB16K and -IB32. The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations: Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements dangereux : Products marked “CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D” are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. When combining products within a system, the most adverse temperature code (lowest “T” number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu’à une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B, C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des marquages sur sa plaque d’identification qui indiquent le code de température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les combinaisons d’équipements dans le système sont sujettes à inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de l’installation. EXPLOSION HAZARD WARNING • Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. RISQUE D’EXPLOSION AVERTISSEMENT • Couper le courant ou s’assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher l'équipement. • Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other means provided with this product. • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit. • Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement inadapté à une utilisation en environnement de Classe I, Division 2. • If this product contains batteries, they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. • S’assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de changer les piles. Compatibility The following communication adapters are required to ensure compatibility with the 1794-IB32: Remote I/O 1794-ASB series E or later 1794-ASB2 series D or later ControlNet 1794-ACN15 series C, firmware revision 4.1 or later 1794-ACNR15 series C, firmware revision 4.1 or later EthernetTM 1794-AENT series A, firmware revision 2.4 or later TM 1794-APB series A, version 1.1 of the GSD file (you can download the GSD file at www.ab.com/networks/gsd ControlLogixTM Family RSLogix5000 programming software, version 11 or later 3. Make sure the pins on the bottom of the module are straight so they will align properly with the connector in the terminal base. WARNING If you remove or insert the module while the backplane power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.. 4. Position the module (4) with its alignment bar (5) aligned with the groove (6) on the terminal base. 5. Press firmly and evenly to seat the module in the terminal base unit. The module is seated when the latching mechanism (7) is locked into the module. Connecting Wiring for the 1794-IB8, -IB16 and -IB16K using a 1794-TB3 or -TB3S 1. Connect individual input wiring to numbered terminals on the 0-15 row (A) as indicated in the table below. 2. Connect the associated +V dc power lead of the input device to the corresponding terminal on the 34-51 row (C) for each input as indicated in the table below. (The +V power terminals of row (C) are internally connected together.) 3. Connect the associated input common (3-wire devices only) to the corresponding terminal on the 16-33 row. (B) for each input as indicated in the table below. (Commons are internally connected together.) 7 1 3 2 6 4 5 The module mounts on a 1794 terminal base. During mounting of all devices, be sure that all debris (metal chips, wire strands, etc.) is kept from falling into the module. Debris that falls into the module could cause damage on power up. Publication 1794-IN093B-EN-P - May 2004 5. Connect dc common to terminal 16 on the 16-33 row (B). 6. If daisychaining power to the next terminal base, connect a jumper from terminal 51 (+V dc) on this base unit to terminal 34 on the next base unit. 7. If continuing dc common to the next base unit, connect a jumper from terminal 33 (common) on this base unit to terminal 16 on the next base unit. Installing Your Digital Input Module ATTENTION 2. Make certain the flexbus connector (3) is pushed all the way to the left to connect with the neighboring terminal base/adapter. You cannot install the module unless the connector is fully extended. 4. Connect +V dc power to terminal 34 on the 34-51 row (C). TM PROFIBUS 1. Rotate the keyswitch (1) on the terminal base (2) clockwise to position 2 as required for this type of module. 3 Wiring Connections for 1794-IB8, -IB16 and -IB16K (use with 1794-TB3 or -TB3S Terminal Base Units) Input1 Input Terminal Voltage Terminal Common Terminal2 Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 +V dc Common A-0 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 C-34 thru C-51 B-16 thru B-33 C-35 C-36 C-37 C-38 C-39 C-40 C-41 C-42 C-43 C-44 C-45 C-46 C-47 C-48 C-49 C-50 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-21 B-22 B-23 B-24 B-25 B-26 B-27 B-28 B-29 B-30 B-31 B-32 8. If continuing input wiring IN0-IN15 common to the next terminal base, connect a jumper from terminal 42 (COM1) on this terminal base unit to the common terminal on the next terminal base unit. 9. If continuing input wiring power for IN16-IN31 to the next terminal base, connect a jumper from terminal 49 (+V2) on this terminal base unit to the power terminal on the next terminal base unit. (Refer to the installation instructions for the specific terminal base unit. 10. If continuing input wiring IN16-IN31 common to the next terminal base, connect a jumper from terminal 50 (COM2) on this terminal base unit to the common terminal on the next terminal base unit. 3-wire devices use input, supply and common; 2-wire devices use input and supply 1794-TB3 and -TB3S Terminal Base Wiring for 1794-IB8, -IB16 and -IB16K Inputs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 B 34 -V Common Commons -V Common 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 C Voltage In +V Voltage Out +V Voltage Connect V common to terminals B-16 Connect +V to terminal C-34 Use B-33 and C-51 to daisy-chaining to the next terminal base unit (1794-TB3 shown) 2 and 3-Wire Input Wiring for 1794-IB8, -IB16 and -IB16K 0-15 16-33 A B 34-51 C A = Sink input B = Common C = +V dc 2-Wire Device (Sourcing Output) 6. Connect the associated common for IN16 to IN31 to COM2 (terminal 44 46, 48 or 50) on the 34-51 row (C). 7. If continuing input wiring power for IN0-IN15 to the next terminal base, connect a jumper from terminal 41 (+V1) on this terminal base unit to the power terminal on the next terminal base unit. (Refer to the installation instructions for the specific terminal base unit. 11794-IB8 - Inputs 0 thru 7; 1794-IB16, -IB16K - Inputs 0 thru 15 2 5. Connect the associated power to the +V2 terminal (43, 45, 47 or 49) on the 34-51 row (C) as indicated in the table below. 3-Wire Device (Sourcing Output) Connecting Wiring for the 1794-IB32 using a 1794-TB32 or -TB32S 1. Connect individual input wiring (IN0 to IN15) to numbered terminals on the 0-15 row (A) as indicated in the table below. Wiring for 1794-IB32 (use with 1794-TB32 or -TB32S Terminal Base Unit) Input Signal IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 A-0 IN 16 B-17 A-1 IN 17 B-18 A-2 IN 18 B-19 A-3 IN 19 B-20 A-4 IN 20 B-21 A-5 IN 21 B-22 A-6 IN 22 B-23 A-7 IN 23 B-24 A-8 IN 24 B-25 A-9 IN 25 B-26 A-10 IN 26 B-27 A-11 IN 27 B-28 A-12 IN 28 B-29 A-13 IN 29 B-30 A-14 IN 30 B-31 A-15 IN 31 B-32 Power terminals 35, 37, 39 and 41 for IN0-IN15. +V1 connected to terminals 35, 37, 39 and 41 +V1 dc power1 (inputs IN0-IN15) Com1 dc Return (inputs IN0-IN15) +V2 dc power (inputs IN16-IN31) Com2 dc Return (inputs IN16-IN31) Input Signal Common terminals 36, 38, 40 and 42 for IN0-IN15. V1 Return connected to terminals 36, 38, 40 and 42 Power terminals 43, 45, 47 and 49 for IN16-IN31. +V2 connected to terminals 43, 45, 47 and 49 Common terminals 44, 46, 48 and 50 for IN16-IN31. V2 Return connected to terminals 44, 46, 48 and 50 12-wire input devices use signal and supply terminals; 3-wire devices use signal, return and supply terminals 2. Connect the associated power to the +V1 terminal (35, 37, 39 or 41) on the 34-51 row (C) as indicated in the table below. 3. Connect the associated common for IN0 to IN15 to COM1 (terminal 36, 38, 40 or 42) on the 34-51 row (C) as indicated in the table below. 4. Connect individual input wiring (IN16 to IN31) to numbered terminals on the 16-33 row (B) as indicated in the table below. Do not connect to terminals 16 or 33. Publication 1794-IN093B-EN-P - May 2004 4 1794-TB32 or -TB32S Terminal Base Wiring for the 1794-IB32 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bits 02 02 05 10 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Inputs 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Inputs NC NC 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 34 35 NC +V1 COM1 +V1 COM1 +V1 COM1 +V1 COM1 +V2 COM2 +V2 COM2 +V2 COM2 +V2 COM2 NC +V1 = Terminals 35, 37, 39 and 41 (1794-TB32 shown) +V2 = Terminals 43, 45, 47 and 49 COM1 = Terminals 36, 38, 40 and 42 COM2 = Terminals 44, 46, 48 and 50 NC = No connections (terminals 16, 33, 34 and 51) Configuring Your Input Module Configure your input module by setting bits in the configuration word (write word). Dec. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read 1 (-IB16, -IB32) I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0 Read 1 (-IB8) Not used I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0 Read 2 (-IB16) C = Counter Input value of input 15 Read 2 (1794-IB32) I 31 I 23 I 22 I 21 I 20 I 19 I 18 I 17 I 16 Write 1 (-IB8) Not used Write 1 (-IB16) Not used Write 1 (1794-IB32) Not used I 30 I 29 I 28 I 27 I 26 I 25 I 24 Input Filter Time 01 01 04 09 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 00 00 03 08 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description - Filter Time Inputs 0 thru 07 (-IB8) Inputs 0 thru 11 (-IB16, -IB16K) Inputs 12 thru 15 (-IB16, -IB16K) Inputs 0 thru 31 (-IB32) Filter time 0 (default) Filter time 1 Filter time 2 Filter time 3 Filter time 4 Filter time 5 Filter time 6 Filter time 7 C R Not used Input Filter 12-15 Input Filter FT 0-31 Input Filter 0-11 Not used Where I = Input D = Diagnostic data (1794-IB8S only) C = Counter value for input 15 FT = Input filter time CR = Counter reset CF = Counter fast - where 1 = fast input (raw data), 0 = standard input filtered data NOTE: C, CR and CF not available when used with any series 1794-ASB or 1794-ASB2 remote I/O adapter modules. Setting the Input Filter Time To set the input filter time, set the associated bits in the output image table (complementary word) for the module . 15 14 13 12 11 17 15 16 13 15 14 14 12 13 10 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 911 810 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Dec. Octal Specifications - 24V dc 8 Input Module, Cat. No. 1794-IB8 Number of Inputs Module Location On-state Voltage On-state Current Off-state Voltage Off-state Current Input Impedance Isolation Voltage Flexbus Current Power Dissipation Thermal Dissipation FT = 0-31 1794-IB32 FT = 0-7 (1794-IB8) FT = 0-11 (1794-IB16) FT = 12-15 1794-IB16 For example, to increase the off-to-on filter time to 4ms for all inputs at address rack 1, module group 0, (using 1794-IB32 as an example), set bits and program as shown below. Write filter time on system startup. I:000 FLL Write FT to complement of input module. Fill File Source Destination Length 00 Number of Inputs Module Location Mounting On-state Voltage 7 6 5 4 3 7 1794-IB16 1794-IB32 6 2 1 1 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 11 0 00 1 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 0 0 1 0 0 1 Flexbus Current Power Dissipation Thermal Dissipation Specifications - 24V dc 32 Input Module, Cat. No. 1794-IB32 = 4 Octal or 4 Decimal On-state Current = 44 Octal or 36 Decimal Off-state Voltage Off-state Current Input Impedance Isolation Voltage Flexbus Current Power Dissipation Thermal Dissipation 1.5mA minimum 6.0K ohms Tested to withstand 2121V dc for 1s between input and backplane 35mA 6.0W maximum @ 31.2V dc Maximum 20.5 BTU/hr @ 31.2V dc = 4 Octal or 4 Decimal Refer to the Input Filter time chart below for other bit settings. Publication 1794-IN093B-EN-P - May 2004 Off-state Voltage Off-state Current Input Impedance Isolation Voltage 16 (1 group of 16), nonisolated, sinking Cat. No. 1794-TB3, -TB3S Terminal Base Unit Refer to the derating curve. 10V dc minimum 24V dc nominal 31.2V dc maximum 2.0mA minimum 8.0mA nominal at 24V dc 12.0mA maximum 5.0V dc maximum 1.5mA minimum 4.6K ohms Tested at 850V dc for 1s between user and system No isolation between individual channels 30mA 6.1W maximum @ 31.2V dc Maximum 20.8 BTU/hr @ 31.2V dc 32 (2 groups of 16), nonisolated within groups, sinking Cat. No. 1794-TB32, -TB32S Terminal Base Unit 19.2V dc minimum 24V dc nominal 31.2V dc maximum 2.0mA minimum 4.1mA nominal at 24V dc 6.0mA maximum 5.0V dc maximum #O:010 1 1794-IB8 8, nonisolated, sinking Cat. No. 1794-TB3, -TB3S Terminal Base Unit 10V dc minimum 24V dc nominal 31.2V dc maximum 2.0mA minimum 8.0mA nominal at 24V dc 12.0mA maximum 5.0V dc maximum 1.5mA minimum 4.6K ohms Tested at 850V dc for 1s between user and system No isolation between individual channels 20mA 3.5W maximum @ 31.2V dc Maximum 11.9 BTU/hr @ 31.2V dc Specifications - 24V dc 16 Input Module, Cat. No. 1794-IB16 and 1794-IB16K On-state Current O:010 Off to On/On to Off 0.25ms 0.5ms 1ms 2ms 4ms 8ms 16ms 32ms Specifications Input Filter 0-07 CF Filter Time 1794-IB8, -IB16, -IB16K, -IB32 Number of Inputs Module Location On-state Voltage 5 Derating Chart for the 1794-IB16 and -IB16K General Specifications Input Filter Time1 Off to On On to Off Terminal Base Screw Torque Dimensions (with module installed) Indicators (field side indication, customer device driven) External dc power Supply voltage Voltage range Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Vibration Shock Emissions ESD Immunity Radiated RF Immunity EFT/B Immunity Surge Transient Immunity Conducted RF Immunity Enclosure Type Rating Conductors Wire Size Category2 Certifications (when product is marked)3 1 2 3 0.25ms, 0.5ms, 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms 0.25ms, 0.5ms, 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms 0.25ms default - Selectable using configuration word 3 7 pound-inches (0.8Nm) 3.7H x 3.7W x 2.7D inches 94H x 94W x 69D mm 1794-IB8 - 8 yellow status indicators 1794-IB16, -IB16K - 16 yellow status indicators 1794-IB32 - 32 yellow status indicators 24V dc nominal 1794-IB8, -IB16, -IB16K - 10 to 31.2V dc (includes 5% ac ripple) 1794-IB32 - 19.2 to 31.2V dc (includes 5% ac ripple) IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold), IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat), IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock): 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold), IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat), IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock): –40 to 85°C (–40 to 185°F) IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat): 5 to 95% non-condensing IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 5g @ 10-500Hz IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged shock): Operating 30g Non-operating 50g CISPR 11: Group 1, Class A (with appropriate enclosure) IEC 61000-4-2: 4kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges IEC 61000-4-3: 10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz IEC 61000-4-4: ±2kV at 5kHz on signal ports IEC 61000-4-5: ±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 30MHz None (open-style) 31.2 30 28.5 27.5 25 V in On-State Voltage (V dc) 20 15 10 20 30 32 37 40 50 55 60 AmbientTemperature oC The area within the curve represents the safe operating range for the module under various conditions of user supplied 24V dc supply voltages and ambient temperature. 0 10 = Normal mounting safe operating range, (includes ). = Other mounting positions (including inverted horizontal) safe operating range Normal Mounting – Horizontal Other Mounting (including Vertical, and Inverted Horizontal Mounting Voltage (max.) Temperature (max.) Voltage (max.) Normal Other 31.2 37 32 29.0 30.5 41 36 28.5 30.0 45 39 28.0 29.5 48 42 27.5 Temperature (max.) Normal 51 Other 45 48 55 51 55 12AWG (4mm2) stranded copper wire rated at 75°C or higher 3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum 2 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment (all) CULUS UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada (1794-IB32) CULUS UL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous locations certified for US and Canada (1794-IB16, -IB16K, -IB32) CSA CSA certified for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous locations (1794-IB8, -IB16, -IB16K) EEx3 European Union 94/9/EEC ATEX Directive, compliant with: EN 50021; Potentially Explosive Atmospheres, Protection “n” (Zone 2) - (1794-IB8, -IB16, -IB16K) CE3 European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with: EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity (all) C-Tick3 - Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS/NZS CISPR 11, Industrial Emissions (all) Input off-to-on filter time is the time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module. Input on-to-off filter time is time from the input signal dropping below the valid level to recognition by the module. You use this category information for planning conductor routing as described in Allen-Bradley publication 1770-4.1, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines. For the latest up-to-date information, see the Product Certification link at www.ab.com for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates and other certification details. For notification of any additional release notes, refer to www.ab.com/manuals/. Publication 1794-IN093B-EN-P - May 2004 Publication 1794-IN093B-EN-P - May 2004 6 Supersedes Publication 1794-IN093A-EN-P - April 2003 and 1794-RN061A-EN-P - January 2002 PN 957831-40 Copyright © 2004 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Installation Instructions FLEX I/O Input, Output and Input/Output Analog Modules ATTENTION Cat. Nos. 1794-IE8, -IE8K, -OE4, -OE4K, and -IE4XOE2 Series B (Modules with a K in the last position of the catalog number are conformally coated to meet noxious gas requirements of ISA/ANSI-71.040 1985 Class G3 Environment.) Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.ab.com/manuals/gi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an WARNING explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. ATTENTION Environment and Enclosure This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions, there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as "open type" equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts. The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications. See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure. Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the Allen-Bradley publication 1770-4.1 ("Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines"), for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment: • Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static. • Wear an approved grounding wriststrap. • Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards. • Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment. • If available, use a static-safe workstation. European Zone 2 Hazardous Location Approval IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: • identify a hazard • avoid a hazard • recognize the consequence WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. The following analog input/output modules are European Zone 2 approved: 1794-IE8/B, 1794-IE8K/B, 1794-OE4/B, 1794-OE4K/B and 1794-IE4XOE2/B. European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the EEx Marking) This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC. The LCIE (Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques) certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report No. 28 682 010. Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50021. IMPORTANT WARNING ATTENTION If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.. FLEX I/O is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground. Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding. The use of other DIN rail materials (e.g. aluminum, plastic, etc.) that can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or intermittent grounding. Observe the following additional Zone 2 certification requirements. • This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation. • The secondary of a current transformer shall not be open-circuited when applied in Class I, Zone 2 environments. • Equipment of lesser Enclosure Type Rating must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Class I, Zone 2 environments. • This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley. • Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when applied in Class I, Zone 2 environments. Publication 1794-IN100B-EN-P - June 2004 2 3. North American Hazardous Location Approval The following modules are North American Hazardous Location approved: 1794-IE8/B, 1794-IE8K/B, 1794-OE4/B, 1794-OE4K/B and 1794-IE4XOE2/B. The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations: Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements dangereux : Products marked “CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D” are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. When combining products within a system, the most adverse temperature code (lowest “T” number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu’à une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B, C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des marquages sur sa plaque d’identification qui indiquent le code de température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les combinaisons d’équipements dans le système sont sujettes à inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de l’installation. EXPLOSION HAZARD WARNING AVERTISSEMENT 4. Connect any signal wiring shields to functional ground as near as possible to the module. 1794-TB3T or -TB3TS only: Connect to earth ground terminals C-39 thru C-46. Connect the +V dc power to terminal 34 on the 34-51 row (C) and -V common/return to terminal 16 on the B row. ATTENTION RISQUE D’EXPLOSION • Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. • Couper le courant ou s’assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher l'équipement. • Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other means provided with this product. • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit. 5. If daisychaining +V power to the next terminal base, connect a jumper from terminal 51 (+V dc) on this base unit to terminal 34 on the next base unit. 6. If continuing dc common (-V) to the next base unit, connect a jumper from terminal 33 (common) on this base unit to terminal 16 on the next base unit. Wiring Connections for the 1794-IE8/B or -IE8K/B Analog Input Module • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement inadapté à une utilisation en environnement de Classe I, Division 2. • Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. • If this product contains batteries, they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. • S’assurer que l’environnement est classé non dangereux avant de changer les piles. Installing Your Analog Input/Output Module Channel Input 0 7 1 3 Input 1 2 Input 2 6 Input 3 4 5 Input 4 The module mounts on a 1794 terminal base. ATTENTION During mounting of all devices, be sure that all debris (metal chips, wire strands, etc.) is kept from falling into the module. Debris that falls into the module could cause damage on power up. Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 -V dc Common 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Rotate the keyswitch (1) on the terminal base (2) clockwise to position 3 (1794-IE8), 4 (1794-OE4) or 5 (1794-IE4XOE2) as required. Make certain the flexbus connector (3) is pushed all the way to the left to connect with the neighboring termbase/adapter. You cannot install the module unless the connector is fully extended. Make sure the pins on the bottom of the module are straight so they will align properly with the connector in the terminal base. Position the module (4) with its alignment bar (5) aligned with the groove (6) on the terminal base. Press firmly and evenly to seat the module in the terminal base unit. The module is seated when the latching mechanism (7) is locked into the module. Connecting Wiring for the Analog Inputs and Outputs 1. Connect individual input/output wiring to numbered terminals on the 0-15 row (A) for 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S, -TB3T and -TB3TS, or on row (B) for the 1794-TBN as indicated in the following tables. IMPORTANT 2. To reduce susceptibility to noise, power analog modules and digital modules from separate power supplies. Do not exceed a length of 9.8 ft (3m) for dc power cabling. Use Belden 8761 cable for signal wiring. Connect channel common/return to the associated terminal on row (A) or row (B) for the 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S, -TB3T and -TB3TS, or on row C for the 1794-TBN. For input devices requiring terminal base power, connect the channel power wiring to the associated terminal on row (C). Publication 1794-IN100B-EN-P - June 2004 +V dc Power Signal Type Label Marking 1794 -TB2, -TB3, -TB3S, -TB3T, -TB3TS, Input 1794 -TB3, -TB3S 1794 -TB2, TB3, -TB3S Power1 Common Terminal 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS Shield Current I0 A-0 C-35 B-17 B-17 C-39 Voltage V0 A-1 C-36 B-18 B-17 Current I1 A-2 C-37 B-19 B-19 C-40 Voltage V1 A-3 C-38 B-20 B-19 Current I2 A-4 C-39 B-21 B-21 C-41 Voltage V2 A-5 C-40 B-22 B-21 Current I3 A-6 C-41 B-23 B-23 C-42 Voltage V3 A-7 C-42 B-24 B-23 Current I4 A-8 C-43 B-25 B-25 C-43 Voltage V4 A-9 C-44 B-26 B-25 Current I5 A-10 C-45 B-27 B-27 C-44 Voltage V5 A-11 C-46 B-28 B-27 Current I6 A-12 C-47 B-29 B-29 C-45 Voltage V6 A-13 C-48 B-30 B-29 Current I7 A-14 C-49 B-31 B-31 C-46 Voltage V7 A-15 C-50 B-32 B-31 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S - Terminals 16 thru 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 16, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31 and 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3, -TB3S - Terminals 34 thru 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 34, 35, 50 and 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB2 - Terminals 34 and 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 39 thru 46 are internally connected to chassis ground. Chassis Ground (Shield) 1 Use when transmitter requires terminal base power. 3 Terminal Base Wiring for the 1794-IE8/B and -IE8K/B Terminal Base Wiring for the 1794-OE4/B and -OE4K/B 16 I V I 0 1 0 16 34 2 1 17 V I V I 3 2 18 35 4 3 19 36 4 20 37 5 5 21 38 6 6 22 39 V I V I V I 7 7 23 40 i 8 8 24 41 42 10 26 43 T 45 ac or dc 4-W ire Current T ransmitter (External power) 4-W ire Voltage T ransmitter (External power) 13 29 46 14 30 47 48 A 15 31 32 49 33 50 51 0 -15 Input B 16-33 24V Common C 34-51 24V Power Wiring Connections for the 1794-OE4/B and -OE4K/B Output Module Signal Type Output 0 Current I0 A-0 B-0 C-39 Current I0 Ret A-1 C-1 Voltage V0 A-2 B-2 C-40 Voltage V0 Ret A-3 C-3 Current I1 A-4 B-4 C-41 Current I1 Ret A-5 C-5 Voltage V1 A-6 B-6 C-42 Voltage V1 Ret A-7 C-7 Current I2 A-8 B-8 C-43 Current I2 Ret A-9 C-9 Voltage V2 A-10 B-10 C-44 Voltage V2 Ret A-11 C-11 Current I3 A-12 B-12 C-45 Current I3 Ret A-13 C-13 Voltage V3 A-14 B-14 C-46 Voltage V3 Ret A-15 C-15 1794-TB3, -TB3S - Terminals 16 thru 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 16, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31 and 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB2 - Terminals 16 and 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit 1794-TB3, -TB3S - Terminals 34 thru 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 34, 35, 50 and 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB2 - Terminals 34 and 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 39 thru 46 are internally connected to chassis ground. Output 2 Output 3 -V dc Common +V dc Power Chassis Ground (Shield) 8 5 10 7 12 9 11 14 33 13 15 51 I + Current Output Device _ I + Voltage _ Output Device + Row B 16, 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 33 Row C 34, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 51 51 I + Voltage _ Output Device + Current only dc only 2-Wire Output 3-Wire Output Device Device 1794-TBN shown dc only 3-Wire Output Device Wiring Connections for the 1794-IE4XOE2/B 4 Analog Input/2 Output Module Signal Type Channel 1794-TBN Channel Output 1 3 Current only 2-Wire Output Device 2-W ire Current T ransmitter (T erminal base powered loop) 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S, -TB3T, -TB3TS Shield Output (1794-TB3T, Terminal1 -TB3TS 1 6 I + Current Output Device _ (1794-TB3 base shown) Label Marking 4 34 i 3-W ire T ransmitter (T erminal base powered 2 34 T T + ac or dc 12 28 44 T 11 27 33 Even Numbered Terminals 0 thru 14 0 16 V 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 9 25 V I Output Terminal2 1794-TB2, -TB3,-TB3S, -TB3T, -TB3TS 1794 -TB3, -TB3S Input/Output Terminal1 Power Terminal2 1794 -TB2, -TB3, -TB3S Common Terminal 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS Shield Current I0 A-0 C-35 B-17 B-17 C-39 Voltage V0 A-1 C-36 B-18 B-17 Current I1 A-2 C-37 B-19 B-19 C-40 Voltage V1 A-3 C-38 B-20 B-19 Current I2 A-4 C-39 B-21 B-21 C-41 Voltage V2 A-5 C-40 B-22 B-21 Current I3 A-6 C-41 B-23 B-23 C-42 Voltage V3 A-7 C-42 B-24 B-23 Current I0 A-8 C-43 Current RET A-9 Voltage V0 A-10 C-44 Voltage RET A-11 Current I1 A-12 C-45 Current RET A-13 Voltage V1 A-14 C-46 Voltage RET A-15 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S - Terminals 16 thru 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 16, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31 and 33 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3, -TB3S - Terminals 34 thru 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 34, 35, 50 and 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB2 - Terminals 34 and 51 are internally connected in the terminal base unit. 1794-TB3T, -TB3TS - Terminals 39 thru 46 are internally connected to chassis ground. Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output 0 Output 1 -V dc Common +V dc Power Chassis Ground (Shield) 1 2 Label Marking A-9, 11, 13 and 15 are internally connected in the module to 24V dc common. Use when transmitter requires terminal base power. Terminal Base Wiring for the 1794-IE4XOE2/B (1794-TB3 Terminal Base shown) 1 A-1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 and 15 are internally connected in the module to 24V dc common. 2 C-1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 and 15 are internally connected in the module to 24V dc common I V I V I V I V 0 0 1 1 17 16 18 35 34 I+ 2 2 3 3 19 36 – Current Input + – ac or dc 4-Wire Current Transmitter 4 4 20 37 5 5 21 38 22 39 I 6 6 23 40 I R V R 7 7 8 8 24 41 25 42 9 10 9 10 26 43 27 44 I R V R 11 11 28 45 12 12 13 14 15 13 29 46 14 30 47 A 15 31 48 32 49 33 50 B 51 C 0 –1 5 16– 33 34– 51 + Voltage – Input + dc only 3-Wire Transmitter I + Current Output Device – Current only 2-Wire Output Device I + Voltage Output Device – + dc only 3-Wire Output Device Publication 1794-IN100B-EN-P - June 2004 4 Input Map (Read) - 1794-IE8, -IE8K Input Map (Read) - 1794-OE4, -OE4K Dec. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Dec. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 S Analog Input Value for Channel 0 Word 0 Not used - set to 0 Word 1 S Analog Input Value for Channel 1 P U W 3 W 2 W 1 W 0 Word 2 S Analog Input Value for Channel 2 Word 3 S Analog Input Value for Channel 3 Word 4 S Analog Input Value for Channel 4 Word 5 S Analog Input Value for Channel 5 Word 6 S Analog Input Value for Channel 6 Word 7 S Analog Input Value for Channel 7 Word 8 PU Not used - set to zero Where : PU = Power up bit W thru W3 = Wire off current loop status for output channels Output Map (Write) - 1794-OE4, -OE4K U 7 U 6 U 5 U 4 U 3 U 2 U 1 U 0 Where :PU = Power up inconfigured S = Sign bit (in 2’s complement) U = Underrange for specified channel Dec. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 S Output Data Channel 0 Word 1 S Output Data Channel 1 Word 2 S Output Data Channel 2 Word 3 S Output Data Channel 3 M 3 M 2 M 1 M 0 C2 C1 C0 Not used - set to 0 F 3 F 2 F 1 F 0 Word 4 Output Map (Write) - 1794-IE8, -IE8K Dec. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not used - set to 0 Word 5 Not used - set to 0 Not used - set to 0 C3 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 6-9 Word 3 C 7 C 6 C 5 C 4 C 3 C 2 C 1 C 0 F 7 F 6 F 5 F 4 F 3 F 2 F 1 F 0 Word 10 S Safe state value for Channel 0 Word 11 S Safe state value for Channel 1 Word 12 S Safe state value for Channel 2 Word 13 S Safe state value for Channel 3 Where : C = Configure select bit F = Full range bit Input Map (Read) - 1794-IE4XOE2 Dec. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 S Analog Input Value for Channel 0 Word 1 S Analog Input Value for Channel 1 Word 2 S Analog Input Value for Channel 2 Word 3 S Analog Input Value for Channel 3 Word 4 P U Not used - set to zero W 1 W 0 U 3 U 2 U 1 U 0 Output Map (Write) - 1794-IE4XOE2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oct. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 S Analog Output Data - Channel 0 Word 1 S Analog Output Data - Channel 1 Word 2 Not used - set to 0 M 1 M 0 Word 3 0 F 1 F 0 Words 4 and 5 Not used - set to 0 C 4 C 3 C 2 Word 6 Safe State Value for Channel 0 Word 7 Safe State Value for Channel 1 C 1 Dec. Bits 0-10V dc/ 0-20mA 4-20mA -10 to +10V dc OFF1 Dec. C 5 Range Selection Bits - 1794-OE4, -OE4K Channel No. Where :PU = Power up inconfigured S = Sign bit (in 2’s complement) W1 and W0 = Diagnostic bits for current output. Wire off current loop status for output channels 0 and 1 U = Underrange for specified channel 0 Where : S = Sign bit (in 2’s complement) M = Multiplex control bit C = Configure select bit F = Full range bit C0 0 0 F5 F4 F3 F 2 In Ch. 0 F0 C0 00 08 In Ch.1 F1 C1 01 09 In Ch. 2 F2 C2 02 10 In Ch. 3 F3 C3 03 11 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Where: C = Configure Select Bit F = Full range 1 When configured to Off, individual output channels will drive 0V/0mA. Specifications Input Specifications Number of Inputs Where : PU = Power up inconfigured FP = Field power off CF = In configuration mode BD = Bad calibration DN = Calibration accepted W1 and W0 = Wire off current loop status for output channels 0 and 1 U = Underrange for specified channel V = Overrange for specified channel P0 and P1 = Outputs holding in response to Q0 and Q1 Range Selection Bits - 1794-IE8, -IE8K and -IE4XOE2 1794-IE8 In Ch. 0 In Ch. 1 In Ch. 2 In Ch. 3 In Ch. 4 In Ch. 5 1794IE4XOE2 In Ch. 0 In Ch.1 In Ch. 2 In Ch. 3 Out Ch. 0 Out Ch. 1 F0 C0 F1 C1 F2 C2 F3 C3 F4 C4 F5 Dec. Bits 00 08 01 09 02 10 03 11 04 12 0-10V dc/ 0-20mA 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 4-20mA 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -10 to +10V dc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Ch. 6 In Ch. 7 C5 F6 C6 F7 C7 05 13 06 14 07 15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Resolution Voltage Current Data Format Conversion Type Conversion Rate Input Current Terminal Input Voltage Terminal Where: C = Configure Select Bit F = Full range 1 When configured to Off, individual input channels will return 0000H; output channels will drive 0V/0mA. Normal Mode Rejection Ratio Voltage Terminal Current Terminal Step Response to 63% Input Impedance Input Resistance Voltage Absolute Accuracy1 Accuracy Drift with Temperature Calibration Required Maximum Overload Indicators Publication 1794-IN100B-EN-P - June 2004 1794-IE8, -IE8K - 8 single-ended, nonisolated 1794-IE4XOE2 - 4 single-ended nonisolated 12 bits unipolar; 11 bits plus sign bipolar 2.56mV/cnt unipolar; 5.13mV/cnt bipolar 5.13µA/cnt left justified, 16 bit 2s complement successive approximation 256µs all channels 4-20mA (user configurable 0-20mA (user configurable +10V (user configurable) 0-10V (user configurable) 3dB @ 17Hz; -20db/decade -10db @ 50Hz;-11.4db @ 60Hz -3dB @ 9Hz; -20db/decade -15.3db @ 50Hz;-16.8db @ 60Hz Voltage Terminal - 9.4ms Current Terminal - 18.2ms Voltage Terminal - 100k ohms Current Terminal - 238 ohms Voltage Terminal - 200k ohms Current Terminal - 238 ohms 0.20% Full Scale @ 25°C Voltage Terminal - 0.00428% Full Scale/°C Current Terminal - 0.00407% Full Scale/°C None required 30V continuous or 32mA continuous, one channel at a time. 1 green power indicator 5 Output Specifications Number of Outputs Resolution Voltage Current Data Format Conversion Type Output Current Terminal Output Voltage Terminal Step Response to 63% Voltage or Current Terminal Current Load on voltage output Absolute Accuracy1 Voltage Terminal Current Terminal Accuracy Drift with Temperature Voltage Terminal Current Terminal Resistive Load on mA Output 1794-OE4, -OE4K - 4 single-ended, nonisolated 1794-IE4XOE2 - 2 single-ended, nonisolated 12 bits plus sign 0.156mV/cnt 0.320µΑ/cnt left justified, 16 bit 2’s complement Pulse width modulation 0mA output until module is configured 4-20mA (user configurable 0-20mA (user configurable 0V output until module is configured +10V (user configurable) 0-10V user configurable) 24ms Surge Transient Immunity Enclosure Type Rating Conductors Wire Size Category2 Certifications (when product is marked)3 3mA maximum 0.133% Full Scale @ 25°C 0.425% Full Scale @ 25°C 0.0045% Full Scale/°C 0.0069% Full Scale/°C 15-750 ohm @ 24V dc 1 2 3 General Specifications for 1794-IE8, -IE8K, -OE4, -OE4K, and -IE4XOE2 Module Location Terminal Base Screw Torque Isolation Voltage External dc Power Supply Voltage Range Supply Current Dimensions (with module installed) Flexbus Current Power Dissipation Thermal Dissipation Keyswitch Position Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Vibration Shock Emissions ESD Immunity Radiated RF Immunity Conducted RF Immunity EFT/B Immunity IEC 61000-4-5: ±2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports None (open-style) 22-12AWG (0.34mm2-2.5mm2) stranded copper wire rated at 75°C or higher 3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum 2 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment UL UL Listed for Class I, Division 2 Group A,B,C,D Hazardous Locations CULUS UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada (1794-IE8, -OE4) CUL UL Listed for Class I, Division 2 Group A,B,C,D Hazardous Locations, certified for Canada (1794-IE8, -IE8K, -OE4, -OE4K) CSA CSA certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA certified for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous locations EEx3 European Union 94/9/EEC ATEX Directive, compliant with: EN 50021; Potentially Explosive Atmospheres, Protection “n” (European Zone 2) CE3 European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with: EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity C-Tick3 - Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS/NZS CISPR 11, Industrial Emissions Includes offset, gain, nonlinearity and repeatability error terms. You use this category information for planning conductor routing as described in Allen-Bradley publication 1770-4.1, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines. For the latest up-to-date information, see the Product Certification link at www.ab.com for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates and other certification details. For notification of any additional release notes, refer to www.ab.com/manuals/. Cat. No. 1794-IE8, -IE8K, -IE4XOE2 - 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S, -TB3T, -TB3TS Terminal Base Unit Cat. No. 1794-OE4, -OE4K - 1794-TB2, -TB3, -TB3S, -TB3T, -TB3TS, and -TBN Terminal Base Unit 7 pound-inches (0.8Nm) 9 pound-inches (1.0Nm) for 1794-TBN Tested at 850V dc for 1s between user power to system No isolation between individual channels 24V dc nominal 10.5 to 31.2V dc (includes 5% ac ripple) 1794-IE8, -IB8K - 60mA @ 24V dc; 150mA @ 12V dc 1794-OE4, -OE4K - 70mA @ 24V dc; 150mA @ 12V dc 1794-IE4XOE2 - 70mA @ 24V dc; 150mA @ 12V dc 31.8H x 3.7W x 2.1D inches 45.7H x 94W x 53.3D mm 20mA 1794-IE8, -IB8K - 3.0W maximum @ 31.2V dc 1794-OE4, -OE4K - 4.5W maximum @ 31.2V dc 1794-IE4XOE2 - 4.0W maximum @ 31.2V dc 1794-IE8, -IB8K - Maximum 10.2 BTU/hr @ 31.2V dc 1794-OE4, -OE4K - Maximum 13.6 BTU/hr @ 31.2V dc 1794-IE4XOE2 - Maximum 15.3 BTU/hr @ 31.2V d 1794-IE8, -IB8K - 3 1794-OE4, -OE4K - 4 1794-IE4XOE2 - 5 IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold), IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat), IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock): 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold), IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat), IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock): –40 to 85°C (–40 to 185°F) IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat): 5 to 95% non-condensing IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 5g @ 10-500Hz IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged shock): Operating 30g Non-operating 50g CISPR 11 Group 1, Class A (with appropriate enclosure) EC 61000-4-2: 4kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges IEC 61000-4-3: 10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz IEC 61000-4-6: 10V rms with with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 30MHz IEC 61000-4-4: ±2kV at 5kHz on signal ports Publication 1794-IN100B-EN-P - June 2004 Publication 1794-IN100B-EN-P - June 2004 6 Supersedes Publication 1794-IN100A-EN-P - April 2003 PN 957899-39 Copyright © 2004 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. pg51 7/28/05 5:31 PM Page 1 Pressure Series 1950 Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switches Compact, Low Cost, Explosion-proof and Weatherproof ® ® SPECIFICATIONS 1-15/32 [37.30] 3/8 [9.53] 1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION (2) Ø17/64 [6.75] MOUNTING HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C. 27/32 [21.43] 27/32 [21.43] VENT DRAIN PLUG RANGE ADJUSTMENT SCREW 5-7/16 [138.13] 1/2 FEMALE NPT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1-23/32 [43.64] 3-1/2 [88.90] 1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH PRESSURE 3/8 CONNECTION [9.53] Model 1950 Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switch combines the best features of the popular Dwyer series 1900 with an integral explosion-proof and weather-proof housing, making it an exceptional value for either application. It is CE, UL and CSA listed, FM approved for use in Class I, Div 1, Groups C and D, Class II Groups E, F, and G and Class III hazardous atmospheres (NEMA 7 & 9), Raintight (NEMA 3). Weatherproof features include a drain plug and O-ring seal in cover. Electrical connections are easily made by removing front cover. For convenience the set point adjustment screw is located on the outside of the housing. Twelve models offer set points from .03 to 20˝ w.c. (7.5 to 5 kPa) and from .5 to 50 psi (0.035 to 3.5 bar). The unit is very light and compact — about half the weight and bulk of other explosion-proof or weather-proof switches with separate enclosures. Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. Wetted Materials: Consult factory. Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C); 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C) for 1950P-8, 15, 25, and 50. -30 to 130°F (-34.4 to 54.4°C) for 1950-02. Pressure Limits: Continuous: 1950’s - 45˝ w.c. (0.11 bar); 1950P’s - 35 psi (2.41 bar); 1950P-50 only - 70 psi (4.83 bar). Surge: 1950’s - 10 psi (0.69 bar), 1950P’s - 50 psi (3.45 bar), 1950P-50 only - 90 psi (6.21 bar). Enclosure Rating: IP64, NEMA 3, 7 and 9. Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT). Electrical Rating: 15 A @, 125, 250, 480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open and normally closed. Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT. Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for other position orientations. Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on top of housing. Weight: 3.25 Ib (1.5 kg); 1950-02 model, 4.4 lb (2 kg). Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM. SERIES 1950 SWITCHES - MODELS, OPERATING RANGES AND DEAD BANDS Model* Number 1950P-2-2F 1950P-8-2F 1950P-15-2F 1950P-25-2F 1950P-50-2F Approximate Dead Band at Model Range, Number Inches W.C. 1950-02-2S .03 to .10 1950-00-2F .07 to .15 1950-0-2F .15 to .50 1950-1-2F .4 to 1.6 1950-5-2F 1.4 to 5.5 1950-10-2F 3 to 11 1950-20-2F 4 to 20 Min. Set Point Max. Set Point .025 .04 .10 .15 .30 .40 .40 .05 .05 .15 .20 .40 .50 .60 Series 1950G Range, PSID 0.5 to 2 1.5 to 8 3 to 15 4 to 25 15 to 50 Approximate Dead Band at Min. Set Point Max. Set Point .3 1.0 .9 .7 1.0 .3 1.0 .9 .7 1.5 CAUTION: For use only with air or compatible gases. Applications with hazardous atmospheres and a single positive pressure may require special venting. *P=PSID range models Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switch Explosion-Proof, Weatherproof, Compatible with Natural Gases ® ® 1-15/32 [37.30] 1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION CAPTIVE SCREW EXTERNAL GROUND (2) Ø17/64 [6.75] MOUNTING HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C. RANGE ADJUSTMENT SCREW 3/8 [9.53] 27/32 [21.43] 27/32 [21.43] VENT DRAIN PLUG 5-7/16 [138.13] 1/2 FEMALE NPT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1-23/32 [43.64] 3-1/2 [88.90] Patent No. 6,089,098 The Model 1950G Explosion-Proof Switch combines the best features of the popular Dwyer Series 1950 Pressure Switch with the benefit of natural gas compatibility. Units are rain-tight for outdoor installations, and are UL listed for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G and Class III atmospheres, Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) Compliant for 11 2 G EExd IIB & Hydrogen T6 and CSA & FM approved for Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G and Class III atmospheres. The 1950G is very compact, about half the weight and bulk of equivalent conventional explosion-proof switches. Easy access to the SPDT relay and power supply terminals is provided by removing the top plate of the aluminum housing. A supply voltage of 24 VDC, 120 or 240 VAC is required. A captive screw allows the cover to swing aside while remaining attached to the unit. Adjustment to the set point of the switch can be made without disassembly of the housing. MODELS Model Number1 1950G-00-B-24 1950G-0-B-24 1950G-1-B-24 1950G-5-B-24 1950G-10-B-24 1950G-20-B-24 1 CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • 1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH PRESSURE 3/8 CONNECTION [9.53] Range, Inches W.C. .07 to .15 .15 to .50 .4 to 1.6 1.4 to 5.5 3 to 11 4 to 20 SPECIFICATIONS Service: Air and compatible combustible gases. Wetted Materials: Contact Factory. Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17 to 60°C). Note: Set point drift may occur with ambient temperature changes. Pressure Limits: 45˝ w.c. (11.2 kPa) continuous; 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge. Enclosure Rating: IP64, NEMA 3, 7 and 9. Switch Type: 1 Form C relay (SPDT). Electrical Rating: 10A, 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC. Resistive 50mA, 125 VDC. Power Requirements: 24 VDC ±10%. 120 or 240 VAC ±10% optional. Electrical Connections: Internal terminal block. Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT. Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for other position orientations. Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on top of housing. Weight: 2 lb, 15.7 oz (1.35 kg). Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM, ATEX. Approximate Dead Band at Min. Set Point Max. Set Point .04 .06 .11 .4 .9 1.2 .06 .11 .29 .9 1.8 3.0 Note: For alternate supply voltages change 24 to 120 or 240. Example: 1950G-00-B-120. U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 51 Model 2280A Four Channel Control Module Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Applications The information and technical data disclosed in this document may be used and disseminated only for the purposes and to the extent specifically authorized in writing by General Monitors. Instruction Manual General Monitors reserves the right to change published specifications and designs without prior notice. MAN2280 Part No. Revision MAN2280A B/11-22-04 This page intentionally left blank. ii Model 2280A Table of Contents ILLUSTRATIONS ........................................................................................................................ V LIST OF TABLES ....................................................................................................................... VI INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................1 Protection for Life ....................................................................................................................................1 Special Warning ......................................................................................................................................1 Customer Support ......................................................................................................................2 1.0 BEFORE INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................3 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Differences Between Models 2280A and 2280..........................................................................3 General Product Description......................................................................................................3 Controller....................................................................................................................................4 Sensor Assembly .......................................................................................................................5 2.0 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 Location of the Controller...........................................................................................................6 Power Connections ....................................................................................................................6 Battery Backup...........................................................................................................................7 Analog Output Connection.........................................................................................................8 Remote Reset Connection.........................................................................................................8 Choosing Sensor Locations .......................................................................................................8 2.6.1 Likely Sources of Gas Emission ...................................................................................8 2.6.2 Environmental Factors ..................................................................................................8 2.6.3 Catalytic Poisons ..........................................................................................................8 Sensor Installation......................................................................................................................9 Alarm Wiring Connections .......................................................................................................13 Multiple Controller Operation ...................................................................................................14 3.0 START UP AND OPERATION .............................................................................................17 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 Types of User Interfaces..........................................................................................................17 Initial Application of Power.......................................................................................................18 Resetting Latched Alarms........................................................................................................18 Analog Output ..........................................................................................................................18 Calibration Preparation Instructions.........................................................................................19 3.5.1 Gas Application Options .............................................................................................19 Calibration Check Mode...........................................................................................................21 Calibration Mode ......................................................................................................................21 3.7.1 Aborting Calibration ....................................................................................................22 Setup and Setup Check modes ...............................................................................................22 3.8.1 Entering the Password................................................................................................23 3.8.2 High Alarm Options.....................................................................................................23 3.8.3 Low Alarm Options......................................................................................................24 3.8.4 Password Enabled/Disabled Option ...........................................................................24 Setup Mode Selection Table....................................................................................................26 Check Points for Calibration and Operation ............................................................................27 iii Model 2280A 3.10.1 Frequency of Calibration.............................................................................................27 3.10.2 Replacing a Sensor.....................................................................................................27 4.0 MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................................28 4.1 4.2 General Maintenance...............................................................................................................28 Periodic System Verification ....................................................................................................28 5.0 TROUBLESHOOTING..........................................................................................................29 5.1 5.2 5.3 General ....................................................................................................................................29 Troubleshooting Table .............................................................................................................29 Fault Codes..............................................................................................................................30 6.0 CUSTOMER SUPPORT .......................................................................................................31 6.1 6.2 General Monitors’ Offices ........................................................................................................31 Other Sources of Help .............................................................................................................31 7.0 APPENDIX............................................................................................................................32 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 Warranty...................................................................................................................................32 Sensor Operating Principle ......................................................................................................32 General Specifications - Controller ..........................................................................................34 7.3.1 Mechanical Specifications...........................................................................................34 7.3.2 Environmental Specifications......................................................................................34 7.3.3 Electrical Specifications ..............................................................................................34 7.3.4 System Specifications.................................................................................................34 General Specifications - Sensor ..............................................................................................34 7.4.1 System Specifications.................................................................................................34 7.4.2 Environmental Specifications......................................................................................34 7.4.3 Recommended Spare Parts List .................................................................................35 Sample Calibration Schedule and Checklist............................................................................36 Product Configuration Table ....................................................................................................37 7.6.1 Panel Assembly, Panel Mount – 98, Ref: 10199C......................................................39 7.6.2 Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 2280A Controller ................................40 iv Model 2280A Illustrations Figure 1: Model 2280A ..................................................................................................................................4 Figure 2: Schematic Battery Backup System ................................................................................................7 Figure 3: Junction Box Assembly Sensor....................................................................................................12 Figure 4: Protection Circuit for Relay Contacts ...........................................................................................14 Figure 5: Common Relay & Rear Terminal Connections ............................................................................15 Figure 6: Discrete Relay & Rear Terminal Connections..............................................................................16 Figure 7: Front Panel Display ......................................................................................................................17 Figure 8: Portable Purge Calibrator.............................................................................................................20 Figure 9: Panel Assembly, Panel Mount – 98, Ref: 10199C.......................................................................39 Figure 10: Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 2280A Controller ...............................................40 v Model 2280A List of Tables Table 1: Model 2280A Mounting Parts ..........................................................................................................6 Table 2: Sensor Wire Colors .......................................................................................................................10 Table 3: Sensor Cable Colors .....................................................................................................................10 Table 4: Cable Length .................................................................................................................................11 Table 5: De-Energized Alarm Relay Contacts.............................................................................................13 Table 6: Energized Alarm Relay Terminations............................................................................................13 Table 7: High Alarm Set Points ...................................................................................................................24 Table 8: Setup Display Options ...................................................................................................................26 Table 9:Troubleshooting Table....................................................................................................................30 Table 10: Spare Parts List ...........................................................................................................................35 Table 11: Calibration Schedule ...................................................................................................................36 vi Model 2280A Introduction Protection for Life General Monitors’ mission is to benefit society by providing solutions through industry leading safety products, services, and systems that save lives and protect capital resources from the dangers of hazardous flames, gases, and vapors. This manual provides instruction for installing and operating the General Monitors Model 2280A Four Channel Control Module for Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Applications. While the 2280A system is easy to install and operate, this manual should be read in full, and the information contained herein understood, before attempting to place the system in service. The safety products you have purchased should be handled carefully and installed, calibrated, and maintained in accordance with the respective product instruction manual. Remember these products are for your safety. Special Warning Through engineering design, testing, manufacturing techniques, and rigid quality control, General Monitors (GMI) supplies the finest gas detection systems available. The user must recognize his responsibility for maintaining the gas detection system in operational condition. The Model 2280A Four Channel Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Monitor contains components, which can be damaged by static electricity. Special care must be taken when wiring the system, to ensure that only the connection points are touched. General Monitors cautions, as with all equipment of this type, that high levels or long exposure to certain atmospheres will “poison” the sensor catalyst and eventually affect sensitivity. Please refer to Section 2.6.3 for specific information. Use in such atmospheres requires calibration checks on a more frequent schedule than normal. General Monitors should be consulted for an application feasibility determination, before installing a system in such atmospheres. General Monitors’ sensors and sensor housings are designed and tested for use in certain classes of hazardous atmospheres. Explosion-proof integrity cannot be maintained, if sensors and sensor housings are operated in other than the “as designed” condition. Terminal access covers of sensor housings must be securely fastened. Sensor housing must be installed in accordance with National Electrical Code acceptable practices, for the class of hazardous atmosphere. Sensors are designed with sintered metal, or screen covers, that act as flame arrestors. Do not operate sensors without screen or sintered metal parts in place. General Monitors’ gas detection systems are primarily safety devices for the protection of personnel and facilities and must be “always ready”. With proper 1 Model 2280A installation, calibration, and maintenance, the system provides continuous monitoring of hazardous areas. The user must assume all liability for misuse of General Monitors’ gas detection systems. The system’s full two-year warranty will be voided if customer personnel, or third parties, damage the system during repair attempts. Customer Support For additional product information not contained in this manual, please contact General Monitors Customer Support. For contact information, see Section 6.1. 2 Model 2280A 1.0 Before Installation 1.1 Differences Between Models 2280A and 2280 2280A differences: • Auto-Calibration • Front Panel: Polycarbonate with inlay Refer to Section 2.0, Installation, and Section 3.0, Startup and Operation, for details. 1.2 General Product Description The Model 2280A is a four-channel controller with four individual sensor circuits. The controller should be mounted in a weather protected non-hazardous area. Several GMI accessories are available for panel, wall or 19-inch rack installation. For hazardous areas, an explosion proof housing is available for Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C and D. NOTE: Sensor assemblies may be mounted outdoors in hazardous areas (National Electric Code Class 1, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C, and D). The Model 2280A Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Monitor has evolved from earlier GMI systems, which have an established reputation for reliable performance. By carefully following the instructions in this manual, you can be assured of the most dependable, continuous protection against hazardous accumulation of hydrogen sulfide gas. Except for periodic calibration checks, there are no routine maintenance requirements. The Model 2280A Controller is a microprocessor-based instrument, which features recent advancements in electronic circuitry and packaging techniques. The system’s sensor is a second-generation product, incorporating advancements in sensor technology and performance. NOTE: The 2280A is different than its predecessor the 2280. The 2280A calibration is automatic where the 2280 must be manually calibrated. Please check the individual manuals for details about wiring, set up, and operation of these two units. CAUTION: The Model 2280A Controller is easy to install and operate. However, one should fully read and understand this manual before attempting to place the system in service. 3 Model 2280A Figure 1: Model 2280A 1.3 Controller The Model 2280A is a four-channel system where the controller continuously monitors the inputs of four sensors. The sensors are monitored independently (i.e. they are not scanned, nor are the signals summed). Each channel has the following: • LED indicators for High, Low, Fault, Calibration, and Setup • Mode Button, accessed by using a small screw driver • Digital Display in ppm • High, Low and Fault relays NOTE: Standard configuration is common relay 4 Model 2280A NOTE: A service-loop is necessary between the Model 2280A Controller’s rear panel terminals and field/power wiring. This service loop permits the controller to be removed or slid forward for servicing. This service loop is a definite advantage when replacing or changing a controller. 1.4 Sensor Assembly Four sensor assemblies are normally supplied with the system. These assemblies are comprised of the sensor, the sensor housing, and an optional splashguard. NOTE: This sensor assembly is CSA approved for Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C & D hazardous areas. 5 Model 2280A 2.0 Installation 2.1 Location of the Controller The Model 2280A controller should be installed in a weather-protected, nonhazardous area. The following hardware is available to assist installation: Part Description 98 mm (4”) panel mount frame 483 mm (19”) rack mount frame 98 mm (4”) blank panel 98 mm (4”) wall mount bracket NEMA 7 explosion-proof enclosure Desk top cabinet (up to four controllers) Part Number 10199-1 10200-1 10191-2 10202-1 10099 914-006 Table 1: Model 2280A Mounting Parts The following are guidelines for mounting the controller: • To minimize the possibility of electrical shock, mounting must be as free from shock and vibration as possible, in a grounded enclosure that requires a tool for instrument removal. • Even though the controller is RFI resistant, do not mount the controller in close proximity to radio transmitters or similar equipment. • Care should be taken to assure adequate ventilation. • Do not mount the controller in a manner that restricts the natural convection airflow from normal ambient air. • The controller operating temperature range is 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F). 2.2 Power Connections The Model 2280A operates on a nominal line voltage of 117 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 220 VAC operation is optionally available. Note: To eliminate accidental shutdown, GMI does not provide a power ON-OFF switch. Power must remain disconnected until all other wiring connections are made. The following are wiring guidelines for the 2280A Controller: If AC is to power the system, connect the line power supply to the terminals L, N, and GND located at the rear of the controller. Use accepted commercial wiring practices. Primary DC power may be used instead. Use any 24VDC nominal supply with a minimum rating of 2 amperes. 6 Model 2280A Large gauge wire (up to No. 14) should be used to prevent excessive voltage drop. Wiring runs should be as short as possible. Connect the positive supply to 24VDC (+) and the negative return 24VDC (-) on the terminal block. An internal diode protects the system in the event of inadvertent supply polarity reversal. 2.3 attery Backup B An emergency battery backup can be used on a system normally operated by AC. The battery rating (ampere-hour capacity) is dictated by the length of time power outages may last. A Model 2280A Controller requires approximately 2 ampere (peak) at 24 VDC. General Monitors recommends that a Lead-Acid type battery be used. This type of battery can be expected to last for several years with minimum maintenance. The customer furnished battery may be connected as shown in Figure 2. No manual or relay switching is required. In order to keep the 24V lead acid battery (whose voltage is approximately 27VDC when fully charged) continuously charged through the series diode, a regulated 28VDC power supply should be used. The cable lengths should be kept as short as possible. Should AC power to the regulated DC power supply fail, energy to run the system will be obtained from the fully charged lead acid battery. A 24 ampere-hour capacity battery should power one Model 2280A controller with four sensors for at least 12 hours. DO NOT USE MORE THAN A 24VOLT BATTERY. Figure 2: Schematic Battery Backup System 7 Model 2280A 2.4 Analog Output Connection CAUTION: The Analog Output must either be used or jumpered. If not, the Model 2280A indicates a fault in the normal mode with the display reading “A0” and the Fault LED flashing. The two analog output terminals, AO (+) and AO (-), are located at the rear of the unit. The maximum series resistance permitted is 600-ohms. For a 250-ohm resistor in series the voltage produced across the resistor by the 4-20mA signals is 1 to 5 VDC. A differential input amplifier must sense this voltage, as the analog output current cannot be diverted to any external reference potential. 2.5 Remote Reset Connection Remote reset (of the alarm relays) is made to the rear panel of the Model 2280A and should be connected between the RESET and 24VDC(-) terminals. A remote reset button must be a “normally open / momentary closed” type. NOTE: If the system is to be powered from a primary DC power supply or if battery backup is provided, the 24VDC (-) terminal has two wires when remote reset is used. The diameter of the two wires cannot be larger than an AWG 14 wire. 2.6 Choosing Sensor Locations There are no hard and fast rules governing the selection of sensor locations. The customer must evaluate conditions at his own facility to make this determination. However, the following general suggestions should be considered with regard to particular conditions at the site where a Model 2280A is being installed. 2.6.1 Likely Sources of Gas Emission In general, at least one sensor should be located in close proximity to each point where Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) gas is most likely to escape into the air. Consideration should also be given to placing sensors at locations where the H2S may be carried by local air currents, ventilation equipment, etc. 2.6.2 Environmental Factors Avoid installing sensors where they will be unnecessarily exposed to wind, rain, dust, water, shock or vibration. For the temperature range limitations of sensors covered, see Section 7.4.2. 2.6.3 Catalytic Poisons Sensors may be adversely affected by prolonged exposure to certain materials. Loss of sensitivity or corrosion may be gradual if such materials are present in low concentrations, or it may be rapid at high concentrations. The more important materials adversely affecting sensors are: 8 Model 2280A • Halides: compounds containing Fluorine, Chlorine, Bromine and Iodine • Silicones (often contained in greases and aerosols). Silicones do not chemically attack the sensor. They instead, coat it and therefore reduce or stop its response to H2S. • Acid Vapors • Caustic liquids or vapors The presence of such materials in an area does not preclude the use of a sensor. The feasibility of using a sensor in such areas must be determined by an analysis of the specific factors in each application. Consult General Monitors before attempting any such installation. Sensors used in these areas usually require more frequent calibration checks than normal and typically have a shorter life. In many such applications the normal twoyear warranty does not apply. CAUTION: General Monitors discourages the painting of sensor assemblies for two reasons. First, if the sensor head is painted-over, gas will not be able to diffuse into the sensor. Second, many paints contain lead, which can poison a sensor. 2.7 Sensor Installation The standard sensor assembly consists of a sensor housing (GMI P/N 10252-1) and sensor (P/N 50445-1, -5, or -9), (Figure 3). NOTE: When installing the sensors be sure to leave enough clearance from the ground and walls to be able to fit the calibration bottles supplied with the system onto the sensor head. The dash (-) numbers correspond to full-scale ranges of 0-100 ppm, 0-50 ppm or 020 ppm, respectively. The sensor assembly is recognized safe for United States National Electric Code Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Groups B, C, and D hazardous areas, and is approved by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 9 Model 2280A NOTE: Each H2S Sensor is shipped with a red plastic cap fitted over the sensing head. Inside the cap is a desiccant. DO NOT remove this cap until power has already been applied to the system. SAVE the cap and RE-CAP the sensor when powering down the system or if the system power is off for an extended period of time. The desiccant packs may be saved and reused providing that they have been stored in a dry area. CAUTION: Sensors should ALWAYS be mounted pointing downward to prevent the collection of moisture or contaminants. To connect the cable to the sensor: 1. Remove the P/N 10252-1 housing lid to reveal the terminal strip. The sensor is connected in the housing according to color designations as follows: Sensor Housing Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 Sensor Wire Color White Black Red Green Table 2: Sensor Wire Colors 2. Install the sensor assembly with conduit in hazardous areas. A good design would include conduit seals to prevent water build-up. 3. Connect the cable so that the terminal color at the sensor housing matches the terminal color at the controller. General Monitors’ sensor leads are color coded, and should be connected to the rear Terminal Connector as shown in the following table: Terminal Connector W1 B2 R3 G4 Sensor Cable Color White Black Red Green Table 3: Sensor Cable Colors 10 Model 2280A The maximum cable length, using four conductor cable, should be such that the total loop resistance of any signal path (for example the black leads) does not exceed 20Ohms at 25º Celsius. The following table may be used as a guide to determine cable length versus wire size: AWG 14 16 18 20 Feet 3,375 2,250 1,350 900 Meters 1,030 685 410 275 Table 4: Cable Length In the event the system is to have less than four active channels, the sensor should be substituted with a sensor simulator for each unused channel. Otherwise, the unused channel will be in Fault condition (sensor failure). NOTE: If sensors were matched with a specific channel at the factory, each one will be tagged accordingly. Check and match each sensor to the proper channel before installing it. Two accessories are available which can be supplied with the system, if ordered: • Splash Guard, P/N 10395-1 • Test Gas Applicator, P/N 10460-2 Both of these products are designed to provide extra protection in problem environments. NOTE: Shielded cable should be grounded only at the controller, using the ground terminal provided. Care should be taken to insure that the outer braid does not contact the conduit or junction box. 11 Model 2280A Figure 3: Junction Box Assembly Sensor 12 Model 2280A 2.8 Alarm Wiring Connections The Model 2280A can be configured to have individual alarm and fault relays for each channel, or have a common set of relays (that is, any alarm of fault occurring on any of the four channels will cause a relay on the channel one card to activate). The alarm relays may be operated as normally de-energized or normally energized, and latching or non-latching. The Low and High alarm contacts for customer use are DPDT (double pole, double throw), and are rated 4 amps at 115 VAC, resistive. The Fault alarm contact is SPDT (single pole, double throw), 4 amps at 115 VAC, resistive. These contacts are brought out to terminals on the rear of the controller as follows: ALARM RELAY Fault Low Alarm High Alarm CONTACT CONDITION OPEN COM CLOSED 2 C 1 2,3 C 1,4 2,3 C 1,4 Table 5: De-Energized Alarm Relay Contacts The above chart shows the High and Low alarm contacts in the standard deenergized state (with power applied). These two alarm relays are normally deenergized unless specially ordered for normally energized operation. The Fault relay is always supplied normally energized. If normally energized, the terminations are: ALARM RELAY Fault Low Alarm High Alarm CONTACT CONDITION OPEN COM CLOSED 2 C 1 1,4 C 2,3 1,4 C 2,3 Table 6: Energized Alarm Relay Terminations 13 Model 2280A CAUTION: Inductive loads, such as bells, buzzers, relays, contactors, solenoid valves, etc., connected to the high alarm, low alarm and malfunction alarm relays must be clamped down as shown in the diagrams below. Unclamped inductive loads can generate voltage spikes in excess of 1000 Volts. Spikes of this magnitude will cause false alarms and possible damage. Figure 4: Protection Circuit for Relay Contacts 2.9 Multiple Controller Operation Up to sixteen points of gas detection utilizing one set of alarm relays may be configured by interconnecting the “=”, “H”, and “M” terminals of TB2 at the rear of four Model 2280A controllers. Each Specific terminal, such as the “H” terminal, is connected from controller to controller using 20AWG wire (or larger). The controllers must be installed adjacent to each other, and the interconnecting wires kept as short as possible. By using two or three Model 2280A controllers, respectively, the same method may be used to interconnect eight or twelve sensors (Figure 10). 14 Model 2280A Figure 5: Common Relay & Rear Terminal Connections 15 Model 2280A Figure 6: Discrete Relay & Rear Terminal Connections 16 Model 2280A 3.0 Start Up and Operation 3.1 Types of User Interfaces User interfaces are provided so that the operator may interpret and direct the Model 2280A in the performance of its various functions. User interfaces consist of a digital display, status indicators, a mode button, and a reset button. • The digital display provides the user with the gas concentration at the sensor site, fault diagnostic codes, calibration prompts, and setup parameters. • The status indicators provide the user with an indication of the current mode of operation: HIGH (High alarm), LOW (Low alarm), FAULT, CAL (Calibration or Calibration Check modes) and SETUP (Setup and Setup Check modes). • Mode button provides the user access to the Calibration, Calibration Check, Setup, and Setup Check modes. The Mode button is accessed using a small screwdriver in the front of the unit. • The Reset button allows the user to reset latched alarms. Figure 7: Front Panel Display 17 Model 2280A 3.2 Initial Application of Power Before applying power for the first time, double-check all the wiring components. Insure that the sensor is correctly installed. The system has a time delay feature. The High and Low alarm circuits are disabled for approximately 45 seconds after power is applied. This feature prevents false alarms while the sensor circuits are stabilizing. At the initial application of power, the unit will enter a 45-second start-up mode. During this time, the display will read “SU”. The unit will then enter operational mode and the current gas concentration of the sensor will display. If a channel fault occurs, the FAULT LED will flash, the fault relay will become active and the unit will display the appropriate error code. This fault indication is independent of the abovementioned time delay feature. NOTE: A defect in one sensor circuit does not affect the operation of other channels. 3.3 Resetting Latched Alarms The user may select a “latching” or “non-latching” alarm output for High and/or Low alarms. If an alarm output activates and the condition that caused that activation is no longer present, a non-latching alarm output resets automatically. A latched alarm output needs to be reset manually Resetting latched alarm outputs is done with the Reset button located on the Channel 1 board. Pressing the Reset button resets any latched conditions that are no longer valid. EXAMPLE: The sensor detects a gas concentration in excess of an alarm set point. The associated alarm outputs activate. After a few moments, the gas concentration drops below the alarm set point. If the alarm outputs are latched, the operator can press the Reset button and the latched alarm outputs returns to the normal (safe) state. 3.4 Analog Output The Analog Output is a 0 to 21.7mA current signal with 4 to 20mA being proportional to 0 to 100% of full scale. Analog Output Values Signal Range 4-22mA Fault <1.0mA Start-up 4mA Calibration 1.5mA Detection Range 4-20mA Over-Range 20 - 21.7mA When a channel is in the Calibration, Calibration Check, Setup, or Setup Check modes, a 1.5mA signal is generated by this output. During Calibration mode the digital display 18 Model 2280A shows prompts associated with the calibration procedure. During Calibration Check Mode, the digital display shows the gas concentration as a flashing digit, or pair of digits. When a channel enters into a fault condition a 0mA signal is generated by this output. During a fault, the display shows a fault code. If the sensor attached to the channel is seeing gas in excess of 100% of full-scale, the output generates a signal between 20 and 21.7mA (not proportional). 3.5 Calibration Preparation Instructions Before a full calibration or calibration check is begun, ensure the sensor assembly is seeing “clean air”. If the atmosphere at the sensor contains a low background of H2S observe the following procedure: 1. Obtain a GMI field calibrator plastic bottle (P/N 50000). Assure that it contains no H2S by flushing it with clean air. Place your hand or a cover over the bottle’s open end and take it to the sensor. 2. Place the bottle over the sensor. 3. Wait a few minutes for the sensor to become permeated with clean air. 4. Remove the sensor from the bottle. After each use of the field calibrator bottle, clear the bottle of residual H2S gas by flushing it with clean air. 3.5.1 Gas Application Options 3.5.1.1 Breaker Bottles and Ampoules General Monitors offers ampoules with breaker bottles as a method of reliably introducing calibration gas to the Model 2280A. The ampoule is placed inside the breaker bottle into the breaker slot, and the breaker bottle is placed over the sensor. The ampoule should contain 50% full-scale of H2S of the sensor range. For example, 100 ppm full-scale is a 50 ppm ampoule. Check the date code on the ampoule to make sure the expiration date has not passed. Follow the calibration procedure below in Sections 3.6 and 3.7. To apply gas using Breaker Bottles and Ampoules: 1. Remove cap and flush breaker bottle with fresh air. 2. Insert one ampoule into the ampoule holder. Replace the cap. 3. Place cap over the sensor and rotate bottle for a tight fit. 4. Turn knob clockwise until ampoule breaks. 5. Allow the sensor to see the gas for 1 to 2 minutes. 3.5.1.2 Portable Purge Calibrator An alternate method for introducing calibration or test gas to the Model 2280A is available. The H2S Portable Purge Calibrator is a compact, practical, accurate and safe 19 Model 2280A system for field calibration of H2S sensors. The bottle is filled with a hydrogen sulfide (H2S) in air mixture and is available in 7 concentrations. The temperature limitation for operation and storage is 0°F to +130°F (-18°C to +54°C). Make sure the Model 2280A has had power applied for at least 24 hours to ensure that the metal oxide film of the sensor has stabilized. Make sure the sensor is seeing clean air. Figure 8: Portable Purge Calibrator To Use the Portable Purge Calibrator 1. Place the calibration cup over the sensor. 2. Apply the gas by opening the ON/OFF valve on the cylinder. 3. Allow the sensor to see the gas for1 to 2 minutes. NOTE: Do not store the cylinder with the regulator fully engaged in the cylinder valve. 20 Model 2280A 3.6 Calibration Check Mode This procedure is used to periodically check the response of an installed system to a known concentration of H2S gas that is at least 50% of the full-scale reading. To perform a calibration check, use the following procedure: NOTE: The Calibration Check mode cannot be entered if the channel is in alarm. 1. Enter the Calibration Check mode by pressing and holding the Mode button until the CAL LED begins to flash (about ten seconds). The channel displays the calibration level. When the CAL LED begins to flash, release the Mode button. The channel is now in the Calibration Check mode. 2. When the Mode button is released, the display indicates a flashing pair of bars (--) for about ten seconds. 3. When the display indicates flashing digits, for example “0”, apply the test gas to the sensor. The display begins to go up scale as the sensor sees the gas. If no gas is applied, the channel returns to the normal operating mode after 6 minutes. 4. The reading stabilizes after 1 to 2 minutes of exposure to the test gas. This response time may increase due to the presence of the Dust Guard, Splash Guard or other sensor accessories. 5. If the sensor does see the gas, the read-out on the display flashes for as long as the unit remains in the Calibration Check mode. The operator should compare the reading with the gas concentration applied and determine if it is necessary to calibrate the sensor. 6. Remove the gas and expose the sensor to clean air. If the gas is not removed within 6 minutes, the channel reverts to a fault condition. 7. Press the Mode button. Calibration level is displayed for a short time, and the channel exits out of Calibration Check mode. NOTE: Low and High alarms are disabled during Calibration Check mode. 3.7 Calibration Mode This procedure is used for initial installation of the system. It is also used to re-calibrate the system if the controller or sensor is replaced, or if the calibration check is not within expected limits. NOTE: For better results power up the sensor at least an hour before calibration. Make sure the calibration gas is the same concentration as the user specified calibration level. It is recommended to recalibrate after 24 hours. To calibrate the Model 2280A: 1. Make sure the sensor is seeing clean air. 21 Model 2280A 2. Enter Calibration mode by following the procedure for entering Calibration Check mode in 3.6. Continue to press and hold the Mode button until the CAL LED becomes steady, approximately fifteen seconds. When the CAL LED is steady, release the Mode button. The display shows flashing bars (--) for approximately 30 to 90 seconds. When the display changes from (--) to AC, clean air calibration is complete. The channel is now being calibrated at clean air. 3. When the channel displays AC, apply gas to the sensor. Watch the display change from AC to CP as the sensor detects gas. If the display does not change from AC to CP after six minutes, the channel returns to normal operation. 4. After 2 to 5 minutes, the calibration routine is complete and the display changes from CP to CC. If the display indicates F2 (failure to calibrate), remove the gas, wait 5 minutes then recalibrate. 5. Remove the gas and watch the display return to normal operation. NOTE: Low and High alarms are disabled during Calibration mode. 3.7.1 Aborting Calibration Calibration can be aborted before the calibration gas has been applied. To abort Calibration: 1. Wait until AC displays. Calibration cannot be aborted when “- -“ is flashing. 2. Press the Mode button and hold it for approximately 5 seconds. Release the button, after the calibration level displays. 3. The channel returns to normal operation. 3.8 Setup and Setup Check modes The Setup Check mode allows the operator to view the selected options for the module without allowing any changes to be made. Once this mode has been entered, the module automatically displays each of the selected options for a short period of time and then it returns to normal operation. The Setup mode allows the operator to change the operating parameters by making choices for selected options. The Setup Check & Setup modes display identical information with the following exceptions: • The Setup Check mode allows the user to view the operating parameters of the channel, whereas the setup mode allows the user to change these parameters. • Entering the optional password is only available in the Setup mode. NOTE: The Setup and Setup Check modes cannot be entered if the channel is in alarm or fault. During the Setup mode, the operator is allowed to select options. The selection procedure is the same for most of the options. Pressing the Mode button toggles the available choices. When the display has indicated a choice for five consecutive seconds, 22 Model 2280A without the operator pressing the Mode button, the setup routine accepts that selection and moves on to the next option available. NOTE: Before entering the Setup mode to make changes, the user should fill out the Setup Mode Selection Table (Section 3.9). This aids the user during the selection process in the Setup mode. The Password, the High & Low alarm set points, and the Calibration Level options offer the operator more than two choices. While these options are being selected, pressing the Mode button repeatedly, sequences the display to the next available choice for that option. To enter the Setup Check mode: 1. Press and hold the Mode button until the SETUP LED begins flashing (about twenty seconds). 2. When the SETUP LED is flashing, release the Mode button to enter the Setup Check mode To enter the Setup mode: 1. Press and hold the Mode button until the SETUP LED begins flashing (about twenty seconds). 2. Continuing to press and hold the Mode button until the SETUP LED stops flashing (about five seconds more). 3. When the SETUP LED stops flashing and stays on, release the Mode button and the unit enters the Setup mode. 3.8.1 Entering the Password This option applies to the Setup mode only: • If the Password option is enabled, the right digit of the display is blank and a “0” appears in the left digit on the display. Press the Mode button until the first number of your password displays, and then wait about five seconds. • The left digit of the display blanks out and a “0” appears in the right digit on the display. Press the Mode button until your correct password number displays, then wait about five seconds. If the password is correct the unit proceeds to the Password Enabled/Disabled option. If the password is incorrect the user cannot proceed and the unit returns to the normal operating mode. Once in the operating mode the user may re-enter the setup mode. The factory default password is 00. 3.8.2 High Alarm Options Next, the HIGH LED is flashing while the energized/de-energized option displays. This option is available for discrete relays configuration only. The display indicates the current selection, (En or dE). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. De-Energized (dE) is the factory default for this selection. 23 Model 2280A The HIGH LED on the front panel flashes while the latching/non-latching option displays. The display indicates the current selection, (nL or LA). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. Latching (LA) is the factory default for this selection. The last High alarm option to appear on the display is the alarm set point (trip level). If this level is reached or exceeded, the High alarm outputs activate. The display indicates the current High alarm set point. Press the Mode button repeatedly, until the desired High alarm set point appears on the display. 60% of full-scale value is the factory default for this selection. In case of common alarms, this option is available at the master board only. High Alarm (All Values in ppm) Measure Set Point Increment Range Range 0-100 5-95 5 0-50 2-48 2 0-20 1-19 1 Table 7: High Alarm Set Points NOTE: The High set point cannot be set lower than the current Low set point. To accomplish this, you need to go through setup twice. The Low set point should be set lower than the desired High set point, then re-enter the Setup mode and set the High set point. 3.8.3 Low Alarm Options Next, the Low LED flashes while the energized/de-energized option displays. This option is available only for discrete alarms configuration. The display indicates the current selection, (En or dE). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. De-Energized (dE) is the factory default for this selection. The Low LED on the front panel flashes while the latching/non-latching option is displayed. The display will indicate the current selection, (nL or LA). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. Non-Latching (nL) is the factory default for this selection. The last Low alarm option to appear on the display is the alarm set point (trip level). If this level is reached or exceeded, the Low alarm outputs activate. The display indicates the current Low alarm set point. Press the Mode button repeatedly, until the desired Low alarm set point appears on the display. The Low set point cannot be set higher than the High set point. 30% of full-scale value is the factory default for this selection. In case of common alarms, this option is available at the master board only. 3.8.4 Password Enabled/Disabled Option After the Calibration Level option has been selected, the Password Enabled/Disabled option displays. The display indicates the current selection, (PE or Pd). Press the Mode button to toggle the selection. Password Disabled (Pd) is the factory default for this selection. 24 Model 2280A If password disabled is selected, the unit returns to normal operation. If this setting is changed from password disabled to password enabled, the user enters a new password. The unit displays the left digit of the existing password (flashing on the display). The right digit is blank until the left digit has been selected. Press the Mode button repeatedly until the desired value displays. Once the left digit is correct, wait for five seconds and the right digit of the display begins flashing and the left digit is blank. Press the Mode button repeatedly, until the desired value displays. 25 Model 2280A 3.9 Setup Mode Selection Table This section helps the operator make selections during the Setup mode. It is recommended that the operator fill-in the selections in the proper blanks and then use this page as a reference while programming the Model 2280A. The table shown below indicates the order of options in the Setup mode. To the right of the option is a description of the choices that are available for that option. ENTER SELECTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Password Enter the Password, if the Password is enabled Set the Energized (En) / De-Energized (dE) Option High Alarm Options Set the Latching (LA) / Non-Latching (nL) Option Set the High alarm set point Set the Energized (En) / De-Energized (dE) Option Low Alarm Options Set the Latching (LA) / Non-Latching (nL) Option Set the Low alarm set point Set the Password to be Disabled (Pd) or Enabled (PE) Password Options If the Password option to be changed from Disabled to Enabled: Set the password digits Table 8: Setup Display Options 26 Left__________ Right__________ Model 2280A 3.10 Check Points for Calibration and Operation 3.10.1 Frequency of Calibration GMI recommends that the calibration be checked on each sensor at least every ninety (90) days. If a sensor is installed where it may be subjected to splashing water, mud or dirt accumulation, or adverse gases, more frequent calibration is recommended. The exact frequency can vary with the severity of conditions and must be established in the field. 3.10.2 Replacing a Sensor When a sensor is replaced, the new sensor must be calibrated. To avoid false alarms, GMI recommends disabling all the alarm circuits until the sensor is calibrated. For better results, the sensor should be powered up at least 24 hours before calibration. 27 Model 2280A 4.0 Maintenance 4.1 General Maintenance Once installed, the Model 2280A Controller requires little or no routine maintenance, other than periodic calibration checks. General Monitors recommends that a calibration schedule be established and adhered to. GMI also recommends that a logbook be kept, showing calibration dates and dates of sensor replacement. Considering the toxicity of hydrogen sulfide, General Monitors’ strongly recommends the period between calibrations should never exceed 90 days. It is important that the owner/operator of this equipment determine the correct calibration schedule for their particular environment. Environmental conditions and contaminants can cause the frequency of calibration to be substantially shorter than 90 days. This is the only method of ensuring proper system operation and response to hydrogen sulfide. More frequent calibration checks are encouraged to detect problems, such as mud collecting on the sensor heads; accidental painting over of sensors, etc. A calibration check is defined as the procedure of applying a known concentration of gas to the system sensors, while observing the controller. The visual display will indicate the gas concentration, and alarm indicators/circuits will activate in direct relationship to gas concentration. Calibration adjustments must be made if results vary (Section 3.7). 4.2 Periodic System Verification The following system verifications should be performed annually. Verify wiring, terminal connections and stability of mounting for all integral safety equipment including, but not limited to: • Power supplies • Control modules • Field detection devices • Signaling / output devices • Accessories connected to field and signaling devices Proper system operation should be verified by performing a full, functional test of all component devices of the safety system, ensuring that the proper levels of alarming occur. Fault/Malfunction circuit operation should be verified. Calibration intervals should be independently established through a documented procedure, including a calibration log maintained by plant personnel or third party testing services. 28 Model 2280A 5.0 Troubleshooting 5.1 General It is highly recommended that a spare sensor be on hand at all times. Sensor failure tends to be one of the potential causes of real downtime. A full complement of other GMI recommended spare parts should also be on hand. (Please refer to Section 7.4.3). In the event the system is to have less than four active channels, the sensor should be substituted with a sensor simulator for each unused channel. Otherwise, the unused channel will be in fault condition (sensor failure). It is recommended that defective controllers be returned to the factory for repair, even if the warranty has expired. 5.2 Troubleshooting Table The information presented in the following table is designed to correct the more common problems, which appear during system startup and operation. Should the various actions suggested in the table fail to restore normal operation, we recommend that the factory be consulted and, if necessary, that the system be returned to the factory for repair. This section is intended to be a guide in correcting problems that may arise in the field. This section is not all-inclusive, and General Monitors should be contacted for assistance, if the corrective actions listed do not eliminate the problem. If equipment or qualified personnel required for various tests is not available, it is recommended that the defective unit be returned to General Monitors for repair. A complete written description of the problem should be included. NOTE: If the equipment is under warranty, any repairs performed by persons other than General Monitors’ authorized personnel may void the warranty. Please read the warranty statement carefully. 29 Model 2280A 5.3 Fault Codes In addition to the Fault LED on the front panel, the Model 2280A provides a fault code on the digital display whenever a fault condition occurs. The Fault Codes that can appear on the digital display are: FAULT CODE AO DESCRIPTION SOLUTION Open Analog Output Signal Check connections on rear terminal pins 5 & 6 and the analog output circuitry. If the problem is fixed, but “AO” is still displayed, restart the 2280A unit. Make sure the supply voltage level is within specification limits. Make sure the supply voltage level is within specification limits. HI High Supply Voltage LO Low Supply Voltage SE Sensor Failure Sensor heater connections are open, shorted, defective, or wired incorrectly. F2 Failed to Complete Calibration F3 Software Checksum Error F5 Reset Button Malfunction F6 Mode Select Button Malfunction EEPROM Verification Error for Calibration Storage EEPROM Verification Error for Setup Storage F7 F8 F9 Calibration Check Period Exceeded Make sure the sensor wires are connected properly (in the field and at the rear of the unit) and recalibrate if necessary. If this fault continues to occur, replace the sensor. If this fault occurs, remove the gas and expose the sensor to clean air for at least five minutes. Then attempt another calibration. If the second attempt fails, replace the sensor. If this fault continues to occur after the sensor has been replaced, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. This fault occurs during initial power-up of the unit. If this fault occurs, remove and reapply power to the unit. If the fault continues to occur, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the fault occurs, consult the factory or your GMI Representative. If the calibration checks gas is left on the sensor for more than 6 minutes, this fault occurs. Remove the gas and expose the sensor to clean air. Table 9:Troubleshooting Table 30 Model 2280A 6.0 Customer Support 6.1 General Monitors’ Offices Area Phone/Fax/Email UNITED STATES Toll-Free: +1-800-446-4872 Phone: +1-949-581-4464 Fax: +1-949-581-1151 Email: [email protected] Corporate Office 26776 Simpatica Circle Lake Forest, CA 92630 9776 Whithorn Drive Houston, TX 77095 Phone: +1-281-855-6000 Fax: +1-281-855-3290 Email: [email protected] UNITED KINGDOM Heather Close Lyme Green Business Park Macclesfield, Cheshire United Kingdom, SK11 0LR Phone: +44-1625-619583 Fax: +44-1625-619098 Email: [email protected] IRELAND Ballybrit Business Park Galway, Republic of Ireland Phone: +353-91-751175 Fax: +353-91-751317 Email: [email protected] SINGAPORE No. 2 Kallang Pudding Rd. #09-16 Mactech Building Singapore 349307 Phone: +65-6-748-3488 Fax: +65-6-748-1911 Email: [email protected] MIDDLE EAST LOB12, #G20 P.O. Box 61209 Jebel Ali, Dubai United Arab Emirates Phone: +971-4-8815751 Fax: +971-4-8817927 Email: [email protected] 6.2 Other Sources of Help General Monitors provides extensive documentation, white papers and product literature for its complete selection of safety products. A selection of these documents are available online at the General Monitors website at http://www.generalmonitors.com. 31 Model 2280A 7.0 Appendix 7.1 Warranty General Monitors warrants the Model 2280A to be free from defects in workmanship or material under normal use and service within two years from the date of shipment. General Monitors will repair or replace without charge any such equipment found to be defective during the warranty period. Full determination of the nature of, and responsibility for, defective or damaged equipment will be made by General Monitors’ personnel. Defective or damaged equipment must be shipped to General Monitors’ plant or representative from which the original shipment was made. In all cases this warranty is limited to the cost of the equipment supplied by General Monitors. The customer will assume all liability for the misuse of this equipment by its employees or other personnel. All warranties are contingent upon proper use in the application for which the product was intended and does not cover products which have been modified or repaired without General Monitors’ approval, or which have been subjected to neglect, accident, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been removed or altered. Except for the express warranty stated above, General Monitors disclaims all warranties with regard to the products sold, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness and the express warranties stated herein are in lieu of all obligations or liabilities on the part of General Monitors for damages including, but not limited to, consequential damages arising out of, or in connection with, the performance of the product. 7.2 Sensor Operating Principle GMI’s sensor is a solid-state, continuous, diffusion type element. The sensor uses the ability of Hydrogen Sulfide to strongly and significantly adsorb onto certain materials as the basis for measurement. Specifically, H2S adsorbs onto many different metals (as well as many other materials, including numerous hydrocarbons, sulfur dioxide, and other sulfur compounds). GMI has developed a proprietary metal oxide semi-conductor, which is extremely selective in permitting H2S to adsorb onto it. That is, very few other compounds found in practical applications will affect this metal oxide. The semiconductor material is therefore specific to H2S. The semiconductor is located in the system circuit, acting as a resistor. When air, which contains H2S, diffuses into the sensor through the outer flame arrestor, the adsorption of the H2S onto the semiconductor causes its electrical resistance to decrease. The sensor is temperature controlled to prevent adsorption rate variations from ambient temperature changes. The decrease in resistance is extremely repeatable over a range of 0-20, 0-50 or 0-100 ppm H2S. Therefore, the change produces a signal approximately proportional to the logarithm of the H2S concentration. This signal is processed, linearized, and displayed as a digital number on the front of the controller. The controller’s analog 32 Model 2280A current output signal tracks the digital reading as well. The adsorption process is reversible so that when the air containing no H2S diffuses into the sensor, the H2S gas desorbs. The semiconductor then resumes its original “clean air” resistance value. 33 Model 2280A 7.3 General Specifications - Controller 7.3.1 Mechanical Specifications Dimensions: Weight: Mounting: 4.0”W x 6.9”H x 11.5”D (102mm x 175mm x 292mm) 6.2 lbs. (2.86 kg) Rack, panel, wall 7.3.2 Environmental Specifications Temperature Range: Storage Temperature: Operating Humidity: 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C) -4°F to +149°F (-20°C to 65°C) 15% to 95% Non-Condensing 7.3.3 Electrical Specifications Power: Alarm Circuits: Output Signal: 105-130 VAC/50-60 Hz 205-255 VAC/50-60 Hz 22-30VDC. 9-Watts nominal per channel (117 VAC) 4 Amp relays @ 117 VAC, resistive 0-21.7 mA, 300-Ohm maximum load Accuracy: ± 5%, 1.5-20mA 7.3.4 System Specifications Digital Readout: Accuracy: Electrical Classification: Warranty: Approvals: 0-20, 0-50 or 0-99 ppm ± 2 or ±10% of applied gas, whichever is greater General purpose (non-hazardous, indoors) Two years CSA 7.4 General Specifications - Sensor 7.4.1 System Specifications Type: Response Time: Repeatability: Specificity: Electrical Classification: Warranty: Continuous diffusion, adsorption type T50 < 1 minute with full-scale gas applied (screen) T50 < 2 minutes with full-scale gas applied (sintered) ±10% of reading or 2 ppm, whichever is greater Hydrogen Sulfide specific Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C and D Two years 7.4.2 Environmental Specifications Temperature Range: -40° to +167° F (-40° to 75° C) 34 Model 2280A 7.4.3 Recommended Spare Parts List Qty 2 2 1 Description Fuse, .8 amp, 250 VAC Fuse, 3.15 amp, 250 VAC Sensor Part Number 951-012 951-213 Per Original Order Table 10: Spare Parts List 35 Model 2280A 7.5 Sample Calibration Schedule and Checklist Sensor Serial Number Location ___________________ _____________________ 1. Installation and Preliminary calibration. Record date after preliminary calibration is done. Date: __________________ Date: __________________ 2. 24-hour calibration. Record date after 24hour calibration is done. 3. 7-day calibration check. Record date and reading of calibration check. Repeat after 7 days if reading deviates more than ±20% or 2 ppm, whichever is greater. Otherwise go to step 4. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 4. 14-day calibration check. Record date and reading of calibration check. Repeat after 14 days if reading deviates more than ±20% or 2 ppm, whichever is greater. Otherwise go to step 5. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 5. 30-day calibration check. Record date and reading of calibration check. Repeat after 30days if reading deviates more than ±20% or 2 ppm, whichever is greater. Otherwise go to step 6. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 6. 60-day months calibration check. Record date and reading of calibration check. Repeat after 60 days if reading deviates more than ±20% or 2 ppm, whichever is greater. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 7. 90-day calibration check. Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Date/Reading ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Table 11: Calibration Schedule 36 Model 2280A 7.6 Product Configuration Table MODEL 2280A FOUR CHANNEL H2S CONTROLLER A B C D E F 1 1 1 01 1 4 A. CONTROLLER 2280A 1 (Std) -P1 2 -P2 Model 2280A Controller 110 VAC/24VDC 220 VAC/24 VDC 6.2 lbs. B. RELAY ALARM 1 4 (STD) RA1 RA1 COMMON RELAY/COMMON ALARMS DISCRETE RELAYS/DISCRETE ALARMS C. RELAY – STATE - NC 1 2 (STD) RS 1NC RS 2NC LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, DE-ENERGIZED LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED 3 RS 3NC LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, DE-ENERGIZED 4 RS 4NC LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED 5 RS 5NC 6 RS 6NC NON-LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, DEENERGIZED NON-LATCH ALARM, NON-LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED 7 RS 7NC NON-LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, DE-ENERGIZED 8 RS 8NC NON-LATCH ALARM, LATCH WARN, ENERGIZED C. H2S – SENSOR 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 16. NONE (STD) 50445-1 50445-5 50445-9 50448-1 50448-5 50448-9 50454-1 50454-5 50454-9 51457-1 51457-1L 51457-5 51457-5L 51457-9 51457-9L No Sensor Sensor Al 0 to 100 PPM H2S Sensor Al 0 to 50 PPM H2S Sensor Al 0 to 20 PPM H2S Sensor SS 0 to 100 PPM H2S Sensor SS 0 to 50 PPM H2S Sensor SS 0 to 20 PPM H2S Sensor PTB AL 0 to 100 PPM H2S Sensor PTB AL 0 to 50 PPM H2S Sensor PTB AL 0 to 20 PPM H2S Sensor SS Atex H2S 0-100 (Replaces 50457-1) Sensor SS Atex H2S 0-100 (W/Lugs) Sensor SS Atex H2S 0-50 (Replaces 50457-5) Sensor SS Atex H2S 0-50 (W/Lugs) Sensor SS Atex H2S 0-20 (Replaces 50457-9) Sensor SS Atex H2S 0-20 (W/Lugs) 37 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.0 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. Model 2280A D. H2S METER SCALE: 1 2 3 (STD) H2S1 H2S2 H2S3 99 PPM SCALE 50 PPM SCALE 20 PPM SCALE E. ACTIVE CHANNELS: 0 1 4 (STD) Controller Only One Active Channel 1X Cal Kit Refill 4 Ea #20/#50/#1 3X H2S sensor simulator w/o SW 1X Sensor Housing 1X Calibration Bottle Two Active Channels 2X Cal Kit Refill 4 Ea #20/#50/#1 2X H2S sensor simulator w/o SW 2X Sensor Housing 2X Calibration Bottle Three Active Channels 3X Cal Kit Refill 4 Ea #20/#50/#1 1X H2S sensor simulator w/o SW 3X Sensor Housing 1X Calibration Bottle Four Active Channels 4X Cal Kit Refill 4 Ea #20/#50/#1 4X Sensor Housing 1X Calibration Bottle 38 6.2 Lbs. 0.7 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. 1.0 Lbs. 9.4 Lbs. 0.7 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. 1.0 Lbs. 12.6 Lbs. 0.7 Lbs. 0.5 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs. 1.0 Lbs. 15.8 Lbs. 0.7 Lbs. 3.0 Lbs 1.0 Lbs. Model 2280A 7.6.1 Panel Assembly, Panel Mount – 98, Ref: 10199C \\ Figure 9: Panel Assembly, Panel Mount – 98, Ref: 10199C 39 Model 2280A 7.6.2 Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 2280A Controller Figure 10: Interconnection Drawing Zone Control Model 2280A Controller 40 Model 2280A Index password enabled/disabled option, 23 periodic calibration checks, 28 polycarbonate inlay, 3 portable purge calibrator, 20 recommended spare parts list, 35 replacing a sensor, 27 reset button, 17 rfi resistant, 6 screen parts, 1 semi-conductor, 32 sensor assemblies, 5 sensor failure, 29 sensor housing, 1 sensor specifications, 34 service-loop, 5 setup parameters, 17 shielded cable, 11 sintered parts, 1 spare sensors, 29 splash-guard, 11 standard sensor assembly, 9 status indicators, 17 system circuit, 32 system verification, 28 temperature range limitations, 8 terminal connector, 10 test gas applicator, 11 troubleshooting table, 29 user interfaces, 17 warning, 1 warranty, 32 warranty, 34 alarm relays, 13 ampoules, 19 analog output, 18 auto-calibration, 3 battery backup, 7 breaker bottles, 19 cable length, 11 calibration check, 21 calibration intervals, 28 calibration preparation instructions, 19 calibration prompts, 17 common relay, 4 controller, 34 controller operating temperature range, 6 damaged equipment, 32 de-energized, 23 desiccant, 10 digital display, 17 entering the password, 23 explosion-proof integrity, 1 fault codes, 30 fault condition, 19 fault diagnostic codes, 17 four channel system, 3 frequency of calibration, 27 gas concentrations, 17 high set point, 24 inductive loads, 14 introduction, 1 latching/non-latching, 18 low set point, 24 mode button, 17 mounting, 6 41 4 Pilot Operated Air and Water Solenoid Valves Brass Body • 3/8" to 1" NPT qwer Features • Diaphragm poppet valves suitable for controlling air-inert gas and liquids. • Internal piloting controls large orifices to provide high flows. • Can be used to pilot large actuators to provide quick closing of large control valves. • Resilient seating for tight shutoff. • Mountable in any position. A NC E P NO 3/2 SERIES 8316 % ) Construction Valve Parts in Contact with Fluids Body Brass Seals and Disc NBR Diaphragm Assembly NBR Core Tube 305 Stainless Steel Core and Plugnut 430F Stainless Steel Core Springs 302 Stainless Steel and 17-7PH Stainless Steel Shading Coil Copper Pilot Seat Cartridge and Disc-Holder CA Electrical Watt Rating and Power Consumption Spare Coil Part No. Standard Coil and General Purpose Explosionproof AC VA VA Class of DC AC DC AC DC Insulation Watts Watts Holding Inrush F 10.6 6.1 16 30 238210 238310 238214 238314 F 22.6 17.1 40 70 238610 238710 238614 238714 Standard Voltages: 24, 120, 240, 480 volts AC, 60 Hz (or 110, 220 volts AC, 50 Hz). 6, 12, 24, 120, 240 volts DC. Must be specified when ordering. Other voltages available when required. Nominal Ambient Temperature Ranges: AC: 32˚F to 125˚F (0˚C to 52˚C) DC: 32˚F to 104˚F (0˚C to 40˚C) Refer to Engineering Section for details. Approvals: CSA certified. Meets applicable CE directives. Refer to Engineering Section for details. Solenoid Enclosures Standard: Watertight, Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X. Optional: Explosionproof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, and 9. (To order, add prefix “EF” to catalog number.) See Optional Features Section for other available options. Important: A minimum operating pressure differential must be maintained between the pressure and exhaust ports. Supply and exhaust piping must be full area, unrestricted. ASCO flow controls and other similar components must be installed in the cylinder lines only. 3.09 R1 SERIES 4 8316 Specifications (English units) Operating Pressure Differential (psi) Pipe Size (ins.) Orifice Size (ins.) Max. AC Cv Flow Factor Min. ➀ Air-Inert Gas Max. Fluid Temp. ˚F Max. DC Watt Rating/ Class of Coil Insulation ➁ Brass Body Water Air-Inert Gas Water AC DC Catalog Number Constr. Ref. No AC DC 150 250 150 250 150 250 150 125 250 125 250 125 250 125 125 250 125 250 125 250 125 125 250 125 250 125 250 125 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 8316G54 8316G14 8316G64 8316G24 8316G74 8316G44 8316G34 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 150 250 150 250 150 250 150 125 250 125 250 125 250 125 125 250 125 250 125 250 125 125 250 125 250 125 250 125 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 8316G56 8316G16 8316G66 8316G26 8316G76 8316G46 8316G36 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized) 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 11/16 11/16 1 3 2.5 3.2 3.2 4.8 4.8 12.5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 NORMALLY OPEN (Open when de-energized) 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 11/16 11/16 1 2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 4.8 4.8 12.5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Notes: ➀ 10 psi Minimum Operating Pressure Differential required. Valve vents to "zero" psi. ➁ On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts. Specifications (Metric units) Watt Rating/ Class of Coil Insulation ➁ Operating Pressure Differential (bar) Pipe Size (ins.) Orifice Size (mm) Kv Flow Factor (m3/h) Max. AC Max. DC Brass Body Water Air-Inert Gas Water AC DC Catalog Number Constr. Ref. No. AC DC 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 8316G54 8316G14 8316G64 8316G24 8316G74 8316G44 8316G34 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 3/8 16 2.14 0.7 10 9 9 9 81 3/8 16 2.14 0.7 17 17 17 17 81 1/2 16 2.74 0.7 10 9 9 9 81 1/2 16 2.74 0.7 17 17 17 17 81 3/4 17 4.11 0.7 10 9 9 9 81 3/4 17 4.11 0.7 17 17 17 17 81 1 25 10.71 0.7 10 9 9 9 81 Notes: ➀ 1 bar Minimum Operating Pressure Differential required. Valve vents to "zero" bar. ➁ On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts. 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 8316G56 8316G16 8316G66 8316G26 8316G76 8316G46 8316G36 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 17.1/F 6.1/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F 22.6/F 10.6/F Min. ➀ Air-Inert Gas Max. Fluid Temp.˚C NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized) 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 16 16 16 16 17 17 25 2.57 2.14 2.74 2.74 4.11 4.11 10.71 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 10 17 10 17 10 17 10 NORMALLY OPEN (Open when de-energized) 3.10 R1 SERIES 4 8316 Dimensions: inches (mm) Constr. Ref. No. 1 ins. mm 2 ins. mm H K L P 5.08 129 5.26 134 3.08 78 3.15 80 2.76 70 2.76 70 3.94 100 4.12 105 Constr. Refs. 1,2 3.11 R1 SERIES 4 8316 Dimensions: inches (mm) Constr. Ref. No. 3 4 5 ins. mm ins. mm ins. mm A B C H K L M N P R W 1.61 41 1.61 41 X X 1.41 36 1.41 36 1.80 46 1.66 42 1.66 42 X X 6.01 153 6.19 157 6.63 168 3.46 88 3.53 90 3.71 94 3.38 86 3.38 86 4.44 113 2.16 55 2.16 55 2.81 71 .53 13 .53 13 .88 22 4.32 110 4.50 114 4.57 116 .50 13 .50 13 1.74 44 3.31 84 3.31 84 5.32 135 Constr. Refs. 3, 4, 5 FLOW DIAGRAMS Normally Open Normally Closed De-Energized 3.12 R1 Energized De-Energized Energized Dell Dimension Desktop PC Specifications: ELO TOUCH 17” FLAT PANEL TOUCH SCREEN MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS MODEL: 1725L, P/N: 069914-001 The 1725L was designed from a blank sheet of paper to address the key needs of touch applications, resulting in a product that can truly be called "designed for touch." It has a unique combination of flexibility, reliability, performance, ease-of-use and installation, all with a distinctive visual appeal. Features • • • • • • • • • • • • • High quality panel with 140°x140° viewing angle Analog and digital (DVI-D) video inputs "Designed for touch" features such as a stable tilt base (-5° from vertical to 90°/horizontal) Cables hidden from user's view Mounting holes on base bottom for tabletop security Base removable or reversible for wall mounting, plus VESA mounting option Built-in speakers located in display head Available with AccuTouch Five-Wire Resistive Technology, IntelliTouch Surface Wave Technology or Surface Capacitive Technology and dual serial/USB interface Sealed touchscreen Controls on the side rather than the front, plus lockout function for public use Multilingual on-screen display (OSD) with extras including speaker volume, treble, bass, and balance Long-lasting product cycle Worldwide agency approvals Specifications Model 1725L Series 3000 Availability Worldwide Case/bezel color Dark gray Display Size: 17.0" diagonal Type: Active matrix TFT LCD Aspect ratio: 5 x 4 Useful screen area Horizontal: 13.3" (338 mm) Vertical: 10.6" (270 mm) Monitor dimensions Width: 17.1" (434 mm) Height (inc. base): 16.9" (430 mm) Depth (inc. base): 9.62" (244 mm) Optimal (native) resolution 1280 x 1024 Other supported resolutions 1280 x 1024 at 60 or 75 Hz 1280 x 960 at 60 Hz 1152 x 864 at 75 Hz 1024 x 768 at 60, 65 Hz (Sun), 70 or 75 Hz 832 x 624 at 75 Hz (Mac) 800 x 600 at 56, 60, 72 or 75 Hz 720 x 400 at 70 Hz 640 x 480 at 60, 66 Hz (Mac), 72 or 75 Hz Colors 16.2 million with dithering (6 bit) Brightness LCD panel 260 cd/m2 (typical) Brightness LCD panel with touchscreen AccuTouch: 213 cd/m2 (typical) IntelliTouch: 239 cd/m2 (typical) Surface capacitive: 218 cd/m2 (typical) Response time 25 msec (typical) Viewing angle (typical, from center) Horizontal (left/right): ±70° or 140° total Vertical (up/down): 60/67° or 127° total Contrast ratio 450:1 (typical) Input video format Analog (no proprietary video card needed); Digital Video Input (DVI-D) Input sync format Separate horizontal and vertical sync, composite sync and sync-on-green Input video signal connector Mini D-Sub 15-Pin; DVI-D Input frequency Horizontal: 31.5-80 kHz Vertical: 56.3-75 Hz Power supply Type: External power supply, 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz Monitor input voltage: 11.4-19.95 VDC Current (12 VDC): 4A max. Current (19 VDC): 2.65A max. Power dissipation 50 W max. Temperature Operating: 0oC to 40oC Storage: -20oC to 60oC Humidity Operating: 20%-80% Storage: 10%-90% noncondensing Weight (approx.) Actual: 20.92 lb (9.49 kg) Monitor without stand: 15.08 lb (6.84 kg) Shipping: 27.42 lb (12.44 kg) Shipping box dimensions Warranty Monitor: 3 years Backlight lamp life: typical 40,000 hours to half brightness Agency approvals UL, cUL, FCC, IC, CE, TÜV-GS, VCCI, C-Tick, MPR II Speakers 2 watt/channel speakers located in display head On-screen display (OSD) OSD lockouts for power and user controls OSD extras include volume, treble, bass, balance User's controls Side: menu, up, down, select, power OSD: contrast, brightness, H/V position, recall defaults, color temperature, volume, sharpness, phase, clock, OSD position, OSD time, auto adjust, language (English, German, Spanish, Japanese, French), input select (analog or digital) OSD disable/enable: power, volume, and/or OSD menu Mounting options 100 mm or 75 mm M4 VESA mount 100 mm M5 threaded holes on base bottom for table top security Removable base Reversible stand for wall mounting Stand rotates from -5o (from vertical) to 90o (horizontal) Optional stability plate Part Number All monitors have antiglare surface treatment. Touch Technology Touch Interface Part # AccuTouch Dual serial/USB 069914-001 IntelliTouch Dual serial/USB 442072-001 Surface capacitive Dual serial/USB F80972-000 Accessories Power Cable: A North American power cable and a European power cable are included. For touchmonitors being shipped to the United Kingdom, add a UK power cable at no cost by specifying part number 276875-000. Replacement Power Supply Brick: Part number E54714-000. Available at additional cost. Stability Plate: Mounts to the pedestal of the monitor to increase stability. Part number D47582-000. Available at additional cost. Drawing: MS500439 Rev A (309K PDF). Touch/Video Cables: Detachable touch and video cables are included. Bulletin F-43 9/14/05 9:01 AM Page 1 Bulletin F-43 ® Series RM Rate-Master Flowmeters Specifications - Installation and Operating Instructions Dimensions in Inches (Centimeters) Model RMA Model RMB Model RMC A B A 4 -9/16 (11.59) B 3 (7.62) 6-7/16 (16.35) 1/8 NPT CONN. 1/4 NPT CONN. J BACK WIDTH F K C E 8-1/2 (21.59) 15 -1/8 (38.42) 12 -1/4 (31.12) 1/2 NPT CONN. C 1-5/8 (3.17) 10 - 32 Thds. 3-15/16 (8.56) 1/4 - 20 Thds. 8-3/4 (10.72) 10 - 32 Thds. D 3/8 (.95) 5/8 (1.59) 1 (2.54) E 1-1/16 (2.60) 1-7/8 (3.42) 2-3/4 (5.83) F 1-3/16 (2.73) 1-3/4 (3.29) 2-1/4 (5.33) G 3/4 (1.91) 1 (2.54) 1-7/16 (2.98) H 1 (2.54) 1-7/16 (2.98) 1-31/32 (3.51) I (OPEN) 1-3/8 (3.49) 1-13/16 (4.60) 2-1/2 (6.35) J 3/4 (1.91) 1-1/4 (3.18) 2 (5.08) K 4-13/16 (12.22) 8-3/4 (22.23) 15-3/8 (39.05) L 1 (2.54) 1-1/2 (3.81) 2-1/4 (5.72) D PANEL CUTOUT FOR FLUSH MOUNTING I FULL OPEN G H Fig. 1 Fig. 2 L HIGH WIDE Dwyer Series RM Rate-Master Flowmeters are furnished in three models (see Fig. 2), each available in a broad array of flow ranges with direct reading scales for air, gas or water. Installation, operation and maintenance are very simple. Only a few common-sense precautions must be observed to assure long, trouble-free service. CAUTION: Dwyer Rate-Master® Flowmeters are designed to provide satisfactory long-term service when used with air, water or other compatible media. Refer to factory for information on questionable gases or liquids. Avoid solutions of acids, bases or salts having a pH below 5.0 or above 8.5. Caustic solutions, antifreeze (ethylene glycol) and aromatic solvents should definitely not be used. Calibration Each Rate-Master® Flowmeter is calibrated at the factory. If at any time during the meter’s life, you wish to re-check its calibration, do so only with devices of certified accuracy. DO NOT attempt to check a Rate-Master® Flowmeter with a similar flowmeter, as seemingly unimportant variations in piping and back pressure may cause noticeable differences in the indicated reading. If in doubt, return your Dwyer Rate-Master® Flowmeter to the factory. Its calibration will be checked for you at no charge. Before proceeding with installation, check to be sure you have the Rate-Master model and flow range you require. LOCATION: Temperature, Pressure, Atmosphere and Vibration: Dwyer Rate-Master® Flowmeters are exceptionally tough and strong. They are designed for use at pressures up to 100 psi (6.89 bar) and temperatures up to 130°F (54°C). DO NOT EXCEED THESE LIMITS! The installation should not be exposed to strong chlorine atmospheres or solvents such as benzene, acetone, carbon tetrachloride, etc. The mounting panel should be free of excessive vibration, as it may prevent the unit from operating properly. DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. P.O. BOX 373 • MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46361, U.S.A. 8-9/16 (21.75) 15 -3/16 (38.58) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 2-1/16 (5.24) PANEL HOLE SIZES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING 5/8 (1.59) 15/16 (2.38) 7/16 (1.11) PIPE BOLT ® 4-5/8 (11.75) 1/4 (0.64) 9/32 (0.71) 13/32 (1.03) Inlet Piping Run: It is good practice to approach the flowmeter inlet with as few elbows and restrictions as possible. In every case, the inlet piping should be at least as large as the connection to the flowmeter; i.e.,1/8″ Iron Pipe Size for RMA models 1/4″ IPS for RMB models,1/2″ IPS for RMC models. Length of inlet piping makes little difference for normal pressurefed flowmeters. For flowmeters on vacuum air service, the inlet piping should be as short and open as possible. This will allow operation near atmospheric pressure and thereby insure the accuracy of the device. (Note: for vacuum air service, the flow control valve, if any, should be on the discharge side of the flowmeter. Either the TMV unit or a separate in-line valve may be applied.). Discharge Piping: As on the inlet, discharge piping should be at least as large as the flowmeter connection. Also, for pressure-fed flowmeters on air or gas service, the discharge piping should be as short and open as possible. This will allow operation of the flow tube at near atmospheric pressure and insure the accuracy of the device. This is of less importance on water or liquid flowmeters, as the flowing medium is generally incompressible and moderate back pressure will not affect the accuracy of the instrument as calibrated. POSITIONING AND MOUNTING All Rate-Master® Flowmeters must be mounted in a vertical position with inlet connection at the bottom rear and outlet at the top rear. Bezel or Through-Panel Mounting: Make panel cutout using appropriate dimensions from Fig. 2. Flowmeter must fit into panel freely without forcing or squeezing. Insert the flowmeter from the front of the panel and install the mounting clamps from the rear. Insert and tighten the clamp bolts in the locations shown in Fig. 3. Do not exceed 5 in./lbs. Make connections to inlet and outlet ports using small amount of RTV sealant or Teflon® thread tape to avoid leakage. Avoid excess torque, which may damage the flowmeter body. Phone: 219/879-8000 Fax: 219/872-9057 www.dwyer-inst.com e-mail: [email protected] Bulletin F-43 9/14/05 9:01 AM Page 2 Fig. 6 Fig. 5 MOUNTING BRACKET SCREW 4 REQUIRED Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5B Surface Mounting: Drill appropriate holes in panel, using the dimensions shown in Fig. 2. Hold the flowmeter in position in front of the panel and install the clamp bolts from the rear. (The mounting clamps may be used as washers, if desired, by installing them backwards or straightening them out.) Pipe up inlet and discharge following the directions in the previous sections. Surface Mounting on Piping Only: An alternate method of surface mounting, omitting the clamp bolts and supporting the flowmeter solely on the connecting piping, is possible. For this method, extra-long or straight pipe threads should be used so that nuts may be run onto the pipe and later tightened against the back of the panel to retain the unit in proper position. Use appropriate hole layout in formation from Fig. 2, but omit the small holes. Surface Mounting on Piping Only Without Panel: For a temporary or laboratory type installation, the panel may be omitted altogether and the flowmeter installed directly in rigid piping. Its light weight permits this without difficulty. OPERATION To start system, open valve slowly to avoid possible damage. Control valves on BV and SSV models are turned clockwise to reduce flow, counter-clockwise to increase flow. A nylon insert is provided in the threaded section of the valve stem to give a firm touch to valve and to prevent change of setting due to vibration. The performance of low range units used in air or gas applications may be affected by static electricity. Excessive static charge may cause the ball float to behave erratically or provide a false reading. To ensure the proper function of the unit, the application should be designed to minimize or dispel static electricity. The standard technique for reading a Variable Area Flowmeter is to locate the highest point of greatest diameter on the float, and then align that with the theoretical center of the scale graduation. In the event that the float is not aligned with a grad, an extrapolation of the float location must be made by the operator as to its location between the two closest grads. The following are some sample floats shown with reference to the proper location to read the float. Variable Area Flowmeters used for gases are typically labeled with the prefix “S” or “N”, which represents “Standard” for English units or “Normal” for metric units. Use of this prefix designates that the flowmeter is calibrated to operate at a specific set of conditions, and deviation from those standard conditions will require correction for the calibration to be valid. In practice, the reading taken from the flowmeter scale must be corrected back to standard conditions to be used with the scale units. The correct location to measure the actual pressure and temperature is at the exit of the flowmeter, except when using the Top Mounted Valve under vacuum applications, where they should be measured at the flowmeter inlet. The equation to correct for nonstandard operating conditions is as follows: Q2 = Q1 x Where: P1 x T2 P2 x T1 Q1 = Actual or Observed Flowmeter Reading Q2 = Standard Flow Corrected for Pressure and Temperature Fig. 6B Fig. 7 P1 = Actual Pressure (14.7 psia + Gage Pressure) P2 = Standard Pressure (14.7 psia, which is 0 psig) T1 = Actual Temperature (460 R + Temp °F) T2 = Standard Temperature (530 R, which is 70°F) Example: A flowmeter with a scale of 10-100 SCFH Air. The float is sitting at the 60 grad on the flowmeter scale. Actual Pressure is measured at the exit of the meter as 5 psig. Actual Temperature is measured at the exit of the meter as 85°F. Q2 = 60.0 x (14.7 + 5) x 530 14.7 x (460 + 85) Q2 = 68.5 SCFH Air CAUTION: Do not completely unscrew valve stem unless the flowmeter is unpressurized and drained of any liquid. Removal while in service will allow gas or liquid to flow out the front of the valve body and could result in serious personal injury. For applications involving high pressure and/or toxic gases or fluids, special non-removable valves are available on special order. Please contact factory for details. MAINTENANCE The only maintenance normally required is occasional cleaning to assure reliable operation and good float visibility. Disassembly: The flowmeter can be disassembled for cleaning simply as follows: 1. Remove valve knob from RMB or RMC -BV or -SSV units by pulling the knob forward. It is retained by spring pressure on the stem half-shaft so that a gentle pull will remove it. On RMA-BV or -SSV models, turn the valve knob counter-clockwise until the threads are disengaged. Then withdraw the stem from the valve by gently pulling on the knob. 2. Remove the four mounting bracket screws located in the sides of the flowmeter. See Fig. 3. Pull the flowmeter body gently forward away from the back plate to avoid undue strain on the body. Leave the piping connections intact. There is no need to disturb them. See Fig. 4. 3. Threaded body style flowmeters - Remove the slip cap with a push on a screwdriver as shown in Fig. 5. Remove the plug ball stop as shown in Fig. 6 using allen wrench sizes as follows: Model RMA - 1/4″, Model RMB - 1/2″ and Model RMC - 3/4″ Threadless body style flowmeters - Release the plastic retaining clip with a screw driver (Figure 5B), it will unclip from the valve body (TMV Option) or the plug ball stop, slide the clip back until the valve body or ball stop can be removed. The clip will remain in the body for convenience. Using a screwdriver gently lift up on the plug in the groove as shown in Figure 6B until the o-ring seal is released and remove the plug. For the TMV option gently pull up on the valve knob to release the valve body seals and remove the valve. 4. Take out the ball or float by inverting the body and allowing the float to fall into your hand, as shown in Fig. 7. (Note: It is best to cover the discharge port to avoid losing the float through that opening.) Cleaning: The flow tube and flowmeter body can best be cleaned with a little pure soap and water. Use of a bottle brush or other soft brush will aid the cleaning. Avoid benzene, acetone, carbon tetrachloride, alkaline detergents, caustic soda, liquid soaps (which may contain chlorinated solvents), etc. Also, avoid prolonged immersion, which may harm or loosen the scale. Reassembly: Simply reverse steps 1 through 4 and place the flowmeter back in service. A little stopcock grease or petroleum jelly on the “O” rings will help maintain a good seal as well as facilitate assembly. No other special care is required. Teflon® is a registered Trademark of E.I. DuPont Company ©Copyright 2005 Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. 9/05 DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. P.O. BOX 373 • MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46361, U.S.A. Phone: 219/879-8000 Fax: 219/872-9057 FR# 56-440197-00 Rev. 16 www.dwyer-inst.com e-mail: [email protected] PAA SERIES POWER SUPPLY PAA300F R (LVD) PAA Power factor 0.99 Harmonic attenuator(Complies with IEC61000-3-2) Universal input voltage (AC85~264V) Built-in inrush current, overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits UL recognized, TÜV approved, CSA certified Three-year warranty ¡ ORDERING INFORMATION PAA300F-5Optional:Ex.with Alarm signal:w Output voltage Universal input Output wattage Series name SPECIFICATIONS MODEL PAA300F-3 2.6A typ(ACIN 100V) 1.3A typ(ACIN 200V) CURRENT 68%typ EFFICIENCY ISOLATION ENVIRONMENT SAFETY AND NOISE REGULATIONS 74%typ 78%typ 80%typ 20A typ(ACIN 100V) 40A typ(ACIN 200V) LEAKAGE CURRENT 0.75mA max(60Hz, according to UL, CSA, VDE and DENTORI) PAA300F-48 81%typ 81%typ lo=100% VOLTAGE [V] 3 5 12 15 24 48 CURRENT [A] 60 60 27 22 14 7.0 LINE REGULATION [mV] 20max 20max 48max 60max 96max 192max LOAD REGULATION [mV] 40max 40max 100max 120max 150max 300max 0~+50 ˚C¶1 80max 80max 120max 120max 120max 150max -10~0 ˚C ¶1 [mVp-p] RIPPLE 0~+50 ˚C¶1 NOISE -10~0 ˚C¶1 [mVp-p] TEMPERATURE 0~+50 ˚C REGULATION -10~+50 ˚C [mV] [mV]¶2 DRIFT 140max 140max 160max 160max 160max 200max 120max 120max 150max 150max 150max 200max 160max 160max 180max 180max 180max 300max 40max 50max 120max 150max 240max 480max 50max 60max 150max 180max 290max 580max 12max 20max 48max 60max 96max 192max START-UP TIME [ms] 500 max (ACIN 85V, lo=100%) HOLD-UP TIME [ms] 20typ OUTPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT RANGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION OPERATING INDICATION [V] (lo=100%) ±10% 2.85~3.45 Works over 105% of rating and recovers automatically. 4.00~5.25V Works at 115%~140% of rating LED(Green) REMOTE SENSING Provided REMOTE ON/OFF Provided INPUT-OUTPUT RC AC3,000V, 1minute, Cutoff current= 10mA, DC500V,50MΩ min.(At Room Temperature) INPUT-FG AC2,000V, 1minute, Cutoff current= 10mA, DC500V,50MΩ min.(At Room Temperature) OUTPUT RC-FG AC 500V, 1minute, Cutoff current=100mA, DC500V,50MΩ min.(At Room Temperature) OUTPUT-RC AC 100V, 1minute, Cutoff current=100mA, DC100V,50MΩ min.(At Room Temperature) OPERATING TEMP., HUMID. AND ALTITUDE STORAGE TEMP., HUMID. AND ALTITUDE -10~+65ª,20~90%RH (Non condensing)(Refer to DERATING CURVE), 3,000m(10,000feet)max -20~+75ª,20~90%RH (Non condensing) , 9,000m(30,000feet)max VIBRATION 10~55Hz, 19.6m/s2(2G), 3 minutes period, 60 minutes each along X, Y and Z axis IMPACT 196.1m/s2(20G), 11ms, once each X, Y and Z axis AGENCY APPROVALS UL 1950, EN60950, VDE0160, CSA C22.2 No.234 Complies with DENTORI and IEC60950 CONDUCTED NOISE Complies with FCC-B, CISPR22-B, EN55022-B, VCCI-B HARMONIC ATTENUATOR Complies with IEC61000-3-2 ¶1 According to 20MHz oscilloscope or Ripple-Noise meter(Equivallent to KEISOKU-GIKEN : RM101). ¶2 Drift is change in DC output for an eight hour period after a half-hour warm-up at 25ª, with the input voltage held constant at the rated input/output. ¶ Avoid prolonged use under over-load. 110 PAA300F-24 4.4A typ(ACIN 100V) 2.2A typ(ACIN 200V) INRUSH CURRENT RIPPLE PROTECTION CIRCUIT AND OTHERS PAA300F-15 0.99 typ(ACIN 100V,lo=100%)/ 0.95 typ(ACIN 200V,lo=100%) POWER FACTOR OUTPUT PAA300F-12 50/60Hz (47~63)Hz FREQUENCY INPUT PAA300F-5 AC85~264V 1º (ACIN 100V/200V)or DC120~340V VOLTAGE SINGLE OUTPUT MODEL MAX OUTPUT WATTAGE DC OUTPUT PAA300F-3 PAA300F-5 PAA300F-12 PAA300F-15 PAA300F-24 PAA300F-48 180W 3V60A 300W 5V60A 324W 12V27A 330W 15V22A 336W 24V14A 336W 48V7.0A ¡EXTERNAL VIEW PAA M5 l M4 8 FG hole M4 l 6.6 70-+0.5 100-+0.5 120 10 25 150-+0.5 190 Voltage adjust LED 20 28max 19.5 AIR FLOW 21 12 38.5 15.5 (Top) 4-M4 (Both sides) 76 9 28 Treminal cover 92 79 10 V.ADJ Short piece 50-+0.5 + 8.6 Name plate Output terminal(-) Output (+) terminal 8-M4(Bottom) 106 - AC (L) AC (N) FG -S +S CB VB RG RC 150-+0.5 (Bottom) ¡RISE TIME & FALL TIME (PAA300F-5) 7max 20 ¶ Weight: 2.2kg or less ¶ Tolerance + 1 - ¶Mounting torque:1.5N . m(16kgf . cm)max ¡EFFICIENCY (PAA300F-5) 80 78 EFFICIENCY 76 DC Output AC Input 74 72 Load factor100% Load factor 50% 70 0 l 50ms/DIV 10 0 140 l 180 l 220 l INPUT VOLTAGE ¡HARMOINC CURRENT (PAA300F-5) HARMONIC CURRENT Load factor 100% Input voltage AC 100V 1 0.1 0.01 1 0 2 0 HARMONIC ORDER 3 0 A 10 Harmonic current standard class A,D(at odd number) A HARMONIC CURRENT 300 ¡HARMONIC CURRENT (PAA300F-5) 10 0.001 0 260 l V 4 0 Harmonic current standard class l A,D(at odd number) 1 100% Load factor Input voltage AC 230V 0.1 0.01 0.001 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 HARMONIC ORDER 111 Ordering information Unit type PAA600F PAA PAA 600 1 2 F 3 -5 4 -O 5 1Series name 2Output wattage 3Universal input 4Output voltage 5Optional C :with Coating G :Low leakage current R :Positive logic control W :with Alarm signal R MODEL MAX OUTPUT WATTAGE[W] DC OUTPUT PAA600F-3 360 3V 120A PAA600F-5 600 5V 120A PAA600F-12 636 12V 53A PAA600F-15 645 15V 43A PAA600F-24 648 24V 27A PAA600F-48 624 48V 13A SPECIFICATIONS MODEL VOLTAGE[V] CURRENT[A] INPUT FREQUENCY[Hz] EFFICIENCY[%] ACIN 100V ACIN 200V ACIN 100V INRUSH CURRENT[A] ACIN 200V LEAKAGE CURRENT[mA] VOLTAGE[V] CURRENT[A] LINE REGULATION[mV] LOAD REGULATION[mV] 0 to +50C *1 RIPPLE[mVp-p] -10 - 0C *1 0 to +50C *1 RIPPLE NOISE[mVp-p] -10 - 0C *1 0 to +50C TEMPERATURE REGULATION[mV] -10 to +50C *2 DRIFT[mV] START-UP TIME[ms] HOLD-UP TIME[ms] OUTPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT RANGE[V] OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION OPERATING INDICATION REMOTE SENSING REMOTE ON/OFF INPUT-OUTPUT-RC INPUT-FG OUTPUT-RC-FG OUTPUT-RC OPERATING TEMP.,HUMID.AND ALTITUDE STORAGE TEMP.,HUMID.AND ALTITUDE VIBRATION IMPACT AGENCY APPROVALS CONDUCTED NOISE HARMONIC ATTENUATOR CASE SIZE/WEIGHT COOLING METHOD POWER FACTOR OUTPUT PROTECTION CIRCUIT AND OTHERS ISOLATION ENVIRONMENT SAFETY AND NOISE REGULATIONS OTHERS ACIN 100V ACIN 200V PAA600F-3 PAA600F-5 PAA600F-12 PAA600F-15 PAA600F-24 PAA600F-48 AC85 - 264 1f or DC120 - 340 5.4typ 8.2typ 2.7typ 4.1typ 50/60 (47 - 63) 70typ 76typ 80typ 81typ 83typ 83typ 0.99typ (Io=100%) 0.95typ (Io=100%) 20typ (Io=100%) 40typ (Io=100%) 0.75max (60Hz, According to UL, CSA, VDE and DEN-AN) 3 5 12 15 24 48 120 120 53 43 27 13 20max 20max 48max 60max 96max 192max 40max 40max 100max 120max 150max 300max 80max 80max 120max 120max 120max 150max 140max 140max 160max 160max 160max 200max 120max 120max 150max 150max 150max 200max 160max 160max 180max 180max 180max 300max 40max 50max 120max 150max 240max 480max 50max 60max 150max 180max 290max 580max 12max 20max 48max 60max 96max 192max 500max (ACIN 85V, Io=100%) 20typ (ACIN 100V, Io=100%) 2.85 - 3.45 t10% Works over 105% of rating and recovers automatically 4.00 - 5.25V Works at 115 - 140% of rating LED (Green) Provided Provided AC3,000V 1minute, Cutoff current = 10mA max,DC500V 50MW min (At Room Temperature) AC2,000V 1minute, Cutoff current = 10mA max,DC500V 50MW min (At Room Temperature) AC500V 1minute, Cutoff current = 100mA max,DC500V 50MW min (At Room Temperature) AC100V 1minute, Cutoff current = 100mA max,DC100V 50MW min (At Room Temperature) -10 to +65C, 20 - 90%RH (Non condensing) (Refer to DERATING CURVE), 3,000m (10,000feet) max -20 to +75C, 20 - 90%RH (Non condensing), 9,000m (30,000feet) max 10 - 55Hz, 19.6m/s2 (2G), 3minutes period, 60minutes each along X, Y and Z axis 196.1m/s2 (20G), 11ms, once each X, Y and Z axis UL 1950, EN60950, VDE0160, CSA C22.2 No.234 Complies with DEN-AN and IEC60950 Complies with FCC-B, CISPR22-B, EN55022-B, VCCI-B Complies with IEC61000-3-2 190X92X200mm (without terminal block and screw) (WXHXD) /4.0kg max Forced cooling (internal fan) *1 According to 20MHz oscilloscope or Ripple-Noise meter(equivalent to KEISOKU-GIKEN : RM101). *2 Drift is change in DC output for an eight hour period after a half-hour warm-up at 25C, with the input voltage held constant at the rated input/output. * Avoid prolonged use under over-load. A-44 ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Four Channel System
- Continuous Combustible Gas Monitoring
- 0-100% LEL Detection Range
- Adjustable High and Low Alarms
- LED Indicators
- Digital Display
- High, Low, and Fault Relays
- Battery Backup Option
- Remote Reset Option
- Analog Output
Frequently asked questions
The Model 610A Controller has four channels.
The Model 610A Controller operates in the range of 0-100% LEL (Lower Explosive Limit).
Any GMI low temperature catalytic bead combustible gas sensor assembly may be used with the system.
The system operates on nominal line power of 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Primary DC power may be used instead. Use any 24V nominal direct current supply with a minimum rating of 2 amperes.
The analog output terminals are located on the rear panel. The analog output is 0 – 21.7mA into a maximum 300-Ohm load.
Remote reset connections are made to rear panel terminal board connections RESET and the 24VDC (-) terminal. If a remote reset switch is used, it must be a “normally open, momentary action” type.